The provided text from “01.pdf” serves as a comprehensive guide to using Microsoft Excel efficiently. It begins by explaining various keyboard shortcuts and mouse actions for navigating within worksheets and workbooks, along with methods for data entry and cell editing. The text then covers essential formatting techniques, including adjusting cell dimensions, aligning content, and basic visual styling, emphasizing the difference between data and formatting. Furthermore, it introduces concepts of inserting and deleting rows, columns, and cells. The guide also explains number formatting options, allowing users to customize how numerical data is displayed. Conditional formatting is discussed as a way to visually highlight data based on specific criteria. The text details the “Go To Special” feature for advanced cell selection based on various attributes like blanks, constants, formulas, and more. It thoroughly explains “Paste Special” functionalities for selective data transfer, including formulas, values, formats, and operations. Finally, the document covers the “Find and Replace” tool and demonstrates using random data generation formulas and lookup functions like IFS, FILTER, and a basic INDEX/MATCH.

Excel Fundamentals Study Guide

Quiz

Explain the concept of a cell reference in Excel and provide an example of a relative cell reference.
What are the three fundamental types of data that can be entered into a cell in Excel?
Describe the order of operations that Excel follows when evaluating a formula containing multiple operators.
What is the purpose of the SUM function in Excel, and how would you use it to add a range of cells?
Differentiate between using direct numbers and cell references within an Excel formula, and explain why using cell references is generally preferred.
Explain the difference between the “Fill Series” options for “Linear” and “Growth” trends, providing a scenario where each would be useful.
Describe how the “Text Join” function works and provide an example of how you might use it to combine text from multiple cells.
What is the purpose of the LEFT, RIGHT, and MID functions in Excel, and how do their functionalities differ?
Explain the function of the IF formula in Excel and describe its three main arguments.
How does the RANK.EQ function in Excel determine the rank of a number within a list of numbers, and what is the significance of the “ref” argument?

Answer Key for Quiz

A cell reference is a pointer to a specific cell or range of cells in a worksheet. It allows formulas to refer to the values in those cells. A relative cell reference changes when the formula containing it is copied to another cell. For example, if cell G3 contains the formula =C3+D3+E3+F3, and this formula is copied to cell G4, it will automatically update to =C4+D4+E4+F4.
The three fundamental types of data are numbers (numerical values used for calculations), text (alphanumeric characters, including words and labels), and formulas (equations that perform calculations on data).
Excel follows the standard mathematical order of operations, often remembered by the acronym PEMDAS/BODMAS: Parentheses/Brackets, Exponents/Orders, Multiplication and Division (from left to right), and Addition and Subtraction (from left to right).
The SUM function adds all the numbers in a range of cells. To use it to add cells A1 through A5, you would enter the formula =SUM(A1:A5) in the desired cell and press Enter.
Using direct numbers in a formula means manually typing the values. Using cell references means pointing to cells containing the values. Cell references are preferred because if the data in the referenced cells changes, the formula result automatically updates. Using direct numbers requires manually editing the formula every time the underlying data changes.
The “Linear” trend in “Fill Series” adds a constant step value to the previous value in the series, creating an arithmetic progression (e.g., 2, 4, 6, 8…). This is useful for creating sequences with a consistent difference. The “Growth” trend multiplies the previous value by a constant step value, creating a geometric progression (e.g., 2, 4, 8, 16…). This is useful for creating sequences with a consistent percentage increase or decrease.
The “Text Join” function concatenates (joins) text strings from multiple ranges and/or strings with a specified delimiter between each text string. For example, =TEXTJOIN(“, “, TRUE, A1:C1) would join the text in cells A1, B1, and C1, separated by a comma and a space, ignoring any empty cells.
The LEFT function extracts a specified number of characters from the beginning (left side) of a text string. The RIGHT function extracts a specified number of characters from the end (right side) of a text string. The MID function extracts a specified number of characters from a text string, starting at a specified position.
The IF formula checks whether a condition is met, and returns one value if true and another value if false. Its three main arguments are: Logical_test (the condition to evaluate), Value_if_true (the value to return if the condition is true), and Value_if_false (the value to return if the condition is false).
The RANK.EQ function returns the rank of a number within a list of numbers. The “ref” argument specifies the array or range of numbers to rank against. Excel compares the “number” argument to all the numbers in the “ref” range to determine its rank.

Essay Format Questions

Discuss the importance of using formulas and functions in Excel for data analysis and manipulation. Provide specific examples of how different types of formulas (e.g., mathematical, text, logical) can be applied to solve common data-related tasks.
Explain the concept of cell referencing in detail, including the differences between relative, absolute, and mixed references. Illustrate with scenarios how each type of reference can be effectively used in creating and copying formulas.
Describe the various “Fill Series” options available in Excel and analyze their utility in generating different types of data sequences. Discuss specific situations where the “Date” series options can streamline data entry and analysis.
Compare and contrast the functionalities of several key text manipulation functions in Excel (e.g., LEFT, RIGHT, MID, TEXTJOIN, LEN, TRIM). Explain how these functions can be used individually and in combination to clean, format, and extract information from text data.
Analyze the role of logical functions, particularly the IF, AND, and OR functions, in creating dynamic and decision-making spreadsheets. Provide detailed examples of how these functions can be nested and combined to handle complex conditions and automate outcomes based on data values.

Glossary of Key Terms

Cell: The intersection of a row and a column in a worksheet, identified by a unique address (e.g., A1).
Cell Reference: A way to identify a specific cell or range of cells in a worksheet, used in formulas to refer to their values.
Relative Cell Reference: A cell reference that automatically adjusts when the formula containing it is copied to another cell.
Absolute Cell Reference: A cell reference that remains constant regardless of where the formula is copied, indicated by dollar signs before the column letter and row number (e.g., $A$1).
Mixed Cell Reference: A cell reference where either the column or the row is absolute, but not both (e.g., $A1 or A$1).
Formula: An expression that calculates the value to display in a cell. Formulas can contain numbers, operators, cell references, and functions.
Function: A predefined formula in Excel that performs specific calculations or operations on data.
Argument: A value or cell reference passed to a function, providing the data it needs to perform its calculation.
Operator: Symbols used in formulas to specify the type of calculation to perform (e.g., +, -, *, /).
Order of Operations: The sequence in which Excel performs calculations in a formula (PEMDAS/BODMAS).
Range: A contiguous group of two or more cells specified by the cell addresses of the top-left and bottom-right cells, separated by a colon (e.g., A1:B5).
Concatenate: To join two or more text strings together into a single string.
Delimiter: A character or sequence of characters used to separate data elements.
String: A sequence of characters, treated as text in Excel.
Logical Test: An expression in a formula that evaluates to either TRUE or FALSE.
Criteria: Specific conditions or rules used to filter or analyze data.
Array: A range of cells containing values that are used in a formula.
Rank: The position of a number within a sorted list of numbers.
Round Off: To approximate a number to a specified number of decimal places or to the nearest whole number.
Data Validation: A feature in Excel used to control the type of data or values that can be entered into a cell.
Filter: A way to display only the rows in a list that meet certain criteria, hiding the other rows.
Sort: To arrange data in a specific order, either alphabetically or numerically.

Briefing Document: Analysis of Provided Sources

This briefing document reviews the main themes and important ideas presented in the provided excerpts. The sources primarily focus on basic Microsoft Excel functionalities and formulas, explained in a conversational and tutorial-like manner.

Source: “01.pdf”

This source is a transcript of an Excel tutorial, covering fundamental operations and formulas. The main themes and important ideas are:

1. Basic Formula Construction and Cell Referencing:

Summation using direct cell references: The tutorial begins by explaining how to calculate the total of marks across different subjects (Hindi, English, Maths, Science) for a student. It emphasizes using the “=” sign to start a formula and then adding individual cell references (e.g., =c3+d3+e3+f3).
“You know g3 = c3 + d3 + e3 + f3 ok”
Understanding cell relationships: The tutorial highlights the relative nature of cell references. As a formula is dragged down, the row numbers in the cell references automatically adjust (e.g., g3 referencing c3:f3 becomes g4 referencing c4:f4, and so on).
“so you understand one thing as this is your g4 this will be g5 this will be g6 this will be g7 in the same way this will also be c4 this will be c5 c6 will be c7, d4 will be d5, d6 will be d7, so it will keep increasing in this manner, okay, you have understood one thing, we are talking about cells here…”
Difference between cell references and direct numbers/text in formulas: The tutorial explains that cell references update when a formula is dragged, while direct numbers and text within a formula remain constant. Text must be enclosed in double quotes.
“Numbers: If you are writing a direct number, if you are writing a number then it is always fixed, it will never change and in the same way, if you are writing any text, it is always fixed. The second thing is that the number is written directly, the text is written inside the double ted comma, okay now these things are now.”
Summation using the SUM function: The tutorial introduces the SUM function as a more efficient way to add a range of cells. It emphasizes the syntax: =SUM(number1, number2, number3, …) or =SUM(range).
“If we say equals to sum then we will put equals to sum and tab and always remember one thing, never listen to any person in the formula, you always have to listen to the formula, you have to do what the formula is saying, what is the formula saying number one comma number two comma number three comma number four comma and so on it has come then we will do number one comma number two comma number three comma number four and turn off the parentheses and hit enter.”
Using ranges with the colon operator: The colon (:) is explained as a way to define a range of consecutive cells (e.g., c3:f3 means all cells from c3 to f3 inclusive).
“if I say now what does it mean, add a1 to a2, then plus th, then plus four, plus fv, I can also write it like this, from a1 to a5, when you have consecutive numbers, there is this colon in between. What does this colon say? What does this colon say? It says from to means this is a range…”
Quick Sum using Alt+=: The tutorial introduces a keyboard shortcut for quickly summing a contiguous range of numerical cells above or to the left.
“The easiest way is that wherever you want the sum, you go to the cell and keep a condition along with it that there should not be any gap in between and then After that, if you press Alt Equal Two together then the formula appears to be the same.”
Basic Formatting: Simple formatting adjustments like using the format painter and adjusting column widths are briefly mentioned.

2. Filling Patterns with Series:

Linear Series (Addition/Subtraction): This section explains how to use the “Series” option (under the “Fill” dropdown in the “Home” tab) to create sequences with a constant step value (addition or subtraction). It demonstrates creating sequences like 2, 4, 6… and 100, 95, 90…
“Whenever you have to do plus or minus, if you keep it in linear, then you have to do plus or minus. You have to do plus. Well, how much plus has to be done. Step value means, how much has to be done, then you have to do two and when to stop, what answer should come, stop when you reach 100, stop where the last 100 comes, then stop .”
Growth Series (Multiplication/Division): This section explains how to create sequences with a constant multiplicative or divisive step value. Examples include 2, 4, 8, 16… and 100, 50, 25…
“Second, the one that comes to you, comes to you, growth and growth deals in what , deals in both of these, in multiply and divide… when you use growth, it will be 2 * 2, then it will be 4, but 4 * 2 will be 8, 8 * 2 will be 16, 16 * 2 will be 32, 32 2 * 2 will be 64, that is this.”
Date Series: This section details how to create sequences of dates, with options to increment by day, weekday (skipping weekends), month, or year, and with a specified step value.
“Within the date, I have already told you in number format but still let me tell you what does date date mean today? … one way can be that I keep increasing every day from today, one way can be, I can show month wise and one way can be, I can show year wise…”
Using the SEQUENCE function (briefly mentioned): The tutorial briefly introduces the SEQUENCE function as an alternative for generating number sequences, available in later versions of Excel. It advises against using it for now due to potential issues with references if rows/columns are deleted.

3. Understanding Constants and Formulas:

Defining Constants and Formulas: This section clarifies the difference between entering a value directly into a cell (constant) and entering a formula that calculates a value (formula). The formula is visible in the formula bar, while the calculated value is displayed in the cell.
“side I wrote I give, this cell is mine and here I write 100 and on one side here is the cell of mine, I write the sum a1 a10 then the answer is this is my formula will be visible in the bar but the answer is mine what will be visible is 100 so here which is only value there is no formula so what has become constant and here the value is there but is this value constant is it just value no check the formula b what? There is some formula attached to it.”
Types of Constants and Formulas: The tutorial distinguishes between number constants, text constants, logical constants (TRUE/FALSE entered directly), and error constants (errors entered directly). Similarly, it discusses number formulas, text formulas, logical formulas (resulting in TRUE/FALSE), and error formulas (resulting in errors).
Using “Go To Special”: The “Go To Special” feature (Ctrl+G, then “Special…”) is introduced as a way to select cells based on their content type (constants or formulas) and subtype (numbers, text, logicals, errors, blanks). This allows for targeted actions like formatting or editing specific types of cells.

4. Filtering Data:

Introduction to Filtering: The tutorial briefly introduces filtering as a crucial Excel feature for analyzing data by showing only rows that meet specific criteria. It highlights its importance for reporting and understanding data.
“Filtering is very important. Filter and Sorting is one of the most important topics of Excel. The best feature is the single which helps us in many things, which also helps us in a lot of reporting, it helps us a lot in understanding something after seeing it, especially with the data…”
Conceptual Explanation of a Filter: A simple analogy of a water filter is used to explain that filtering removes unwanted elements (impurities) to show the desired outcome.

Important Quotes Highlighting Key Concepts:

(On relative cell references): “so it will keep increasing in this manner, okay, you have understood one thing, we are talking about cells here…”
(On the SUM function): “always remember one thing, never listen to any person in the formula, you always have to listen to the formula, you have to do what the formula is saying…”
(On the colon operator for ranges): “What does this colon say? It says from to means this is a range…”
(On the difference between constants and formulas): “here which is only value there is no formula so what has become constant and here the value is there but is this value constant is it just value no check the formula b what? There is some formula attached to it.”
(On the purpose of filtering): “The best feature is the single which helps us in many things, which also helps us in a lot of reporting, it helps us a lot in understanding something after seeing it, especially with the data…”

Overall, “01.pdf” provides a beginner-friendly introduction to essential Excel concepts, focusing on formula creation, cell referencing, efficient summation techniques, generating sequences, understanding data types within cells, and the basic concept of filtering. The explanations are conversational and emphasize practical application.

The analysis of the remaining sources will follow in a similar structured manner to provide a comprehensive briefing document. Please provide the text from the subsequent files (“02.pdf”, “03.pdf”, etc.) for a complete analysis.

Excel Basics & Formulas FAQ

1. What are cells in Excel, and how do they relate to formulas?

Cells in Excel are the individual rectangular boxes where you enter data. Each cell is identified by a column letter and a row number (e.g., A1, B3). Formulas in Excel are expressions that perform calculations on the data in these cells. When you write a formula, you often refer to cell addresses to use the values contained within those cells in your calculations. For example, =C3+D3+E3+F3 in cell G3 adds the values in cells C3, D3, E3, and F3, and the result is displayed in G3.

2. What are the three basic components of an Excel formula, and how do they behave when dragging the formula to other cells?

The three basic components of an Excel formula are: * Cell references: These refer to specific cells (e.g., A1, $B$2, C$3). When a formula with relative cell references (like C3) is dragged, the cell references automatically adjust relative to the new row or column. Absolute references (like $C$3) remain fixed regardless of where the formula is dragged. Mixed references (like C$3 or $C3) have one part fixed and the other relative. * Numbers: These are constant numerical values entered directly into the formula (e.g., 90, 27). Numbers remain constant and do not change when the formula is dragged. * Text: These are constant text values entered directly into the formula and must be enclosed in double quotes (e.g., “Pass”). Text also remains constant when the formula is dragged.

Dragging a formula applies the same underlying calculation to adjacent cells, automatically adjusting relative cell references based on the new position, while keeping numbers and text constants.

3. What is the SUM function in Excel, and what are the different ways to use it to add numbers?

The SUM function in Excel is used to add numbers together. You can use it in several ways: * Adding individual cells: You can list individual cells separated by commas, like =SUM(C3, D3, E3, F3). * Adding a range of cells: For consecutive cells, you can specify a range using a colon, like =SUM(C3:F3). This adds all the numbers in the range from C3 to F3 (inclusive). * Adding non-adjacent cells and ranges: You can combine individual cells and ranges, like =SUM(A1:A5, C3, F1:F10).

A quick way to use the SUM function for a contiguous range is to select the cell where you want the total and press Alt + =. Excel will often automatically detect the adjacent range of numbers and insert the SUM formula.

4. How can you fill a series of numbers or dates automatically in Excel using the “Fill Series” option?

The “Fill Series” option in Excel allows you to automatically populate a range of cells with a sequence of numbers, dates, or text based on a defined pattern. To use it: 1. Enter the starting value in a cell. 2. Select the cell (or a range of cells establishing a pattern). 3. Go to the Home tab, in the Editing group, click on Fill, and then select Series. 4. In the Series dialog box: * Choose whether you want the series to fill in Rows or Columns. * Select the Type of series: * Linear: For sequences with a constant increment (e.g., 2, 4, 6…). Set the Step value. * Growth: For sequences with a constant multiplier (e.g., 2, 4, 8…). Set the Step value. * Date: For date sequences. Choose the Date unit (Day, Weekday, Month, Year) and set the Step value. Weekday will skip Saturdays and Sundays. * Autofill: Extends existing patterns. * In the Step value box, enter the increment or multiplier. For dates, it’s the number of days, weeks, months, or years to add. Use a negative value to decrement. * In the Stop value box (optional), enter the value at which the series should end. 5. Click OK.

You can also often drag the fill handle (the small square at the bottom-right of a selected cell) to automatically fill a series based on an initial value or pattern.

5. What is the difference between “Constants” and “Formulas” when using “Go To Special” in Excel?

The “Go To Special” feature in Excel allows you to select cells based on specific characteristics. When you choose either “Constants” or “Formulas,” you are selecting cells based on how their values are derived: * Constants: This option selects cells that contain values entered directly into them. These values can be numbers, text, logical values (TRUE/FALSE), or errors that were directly typed in (not resulting from a formula). If you further refine the selection within “Constants” by checking specific data types (Numbers, Text, Logicals, Errors), only constants of those types will be selected. For example, selecting “Constants” and then only “Numbers” will select all cells containing manually entered numbers, including dates (as Excel stores dates as numbers). * Formulas: This option selects cells that contain formulas. Similar to “Constants,” you can further refine the selection by checking the “Numbers,” “Text,” “Logicals,” or “Errors” checkboxes. This will select formulas that result in those specific types of output. For instance, selecting “Formulas” and then “Numbers” will select all cells containing formulas that calculate and display numerical results.

The key difference is whether the value in the cell is the result of a calculation (Formula) or directly input by the user (Constant).

6. How do relative, absolute, and mixed cell references work in Excel formulas, and when would you use each type?

Cell references in Excel tell formulas which cells to use in calculations. There are three types: * Relative References (e.g., A1): By default, cell references are relative. When you copy or drag a formula containing relative references to another cell, the row and column parts of the references automatically adjust relative to the new position. Use relative references when you want the formula to apply to a range of similar data, and the referenced cells should change accordingly for each row or column. * Absolute References (e.g., $A$1): An absolute reference is specified by adding a dollar sign ($) before both the column letter and the row number. When a formula with an absolute reference is copied or dragged, the cell reference remains unchanged. Use absolute references when you want a formula to always refer to a specific cell, regardless of where the formula is copied. This is useful for referencing constants, tax rates, or other fixed values. * Mixed References (e.g., $A1 or A$1): A mixed reference has either the row or the column part absolute and the other part relative. $A1 keeps the column fixed but allows the row to change when the formula is copied down. A$1 keeps the row fixed but allows the column to change when the formula is copied across. Use mixed references when you want either the row or the column reference to remain constant while the other adjusts. For example, when calculating percentages of a total where the total is in a single row but you want to apply the formula to multiple rows of individual values.

To quickly toggle between relative, absolute, and mixed references for a selected cell reference in the formula bar, you can press the F4 key.

7. What are some common text functions in Excel, such as LEFT, RIGHT, MID, LEN, TRIM, LOWER, UPPER, and PROPER, and how are they used?

Excel provides several functions for manipulating text strings: * LEFT(text, num_chars): Extracts a specified number of characters from the beginning (left side) of a text string. * RIGHT(text, num_chars): Extracts a specified number of characters from the end (right side) of a text string. * MID(text, start_num, num_chars): Extracts a specified number of characters from the middle of a text string, starting at a given position. * LEN(text): Returns the number of characters in a text string. * TRIM(text): Removes extra spaces from a text string, including leading, trailing, and multiple spaces between words. It leaves a single space between words. * LOWER(text): Converts all uppercase letters in a text string to lowercase. * UPPER(text): Converts all lowercase letters in a text string to uppercase. * PROPER(text): Capitalizes the first letter of each word in a text string and converts all other letters to lowercase (also known as sentence case or title case). * TEXTJOIN(delimiter, ignore_empty, text1, [text2], …): Joins two or more text strings into one text string with a specified delimiter between each text string. ignore_empty is a TRUE/FALSE value to specify whether to ignore empty cells.

These functions are used to clean, format, extract, and combine text data within your spreadsheets.

8. Explain the IF, AND, and OR logical functions in Excel, and provide examples of their use.

Logical functions in Excel allow you to perform conditional tests and return different values depending on whether the conditions are true or false: * IF(logical_test, value_if_true, value_if_false): Checks if a condition (logical_test) is TRUE or FALSE. If it’s TRUE, it returns value_if_true; otherwise, it returns value_if_false. * Example: =IF(B2>45, “Pass”, “Fail”) in cell C2 checks if the value in B2 is greater than 45. If it is, “Pass” is displayed; otherwise, “Fail” is displayed. * Example with empty cell check: =IF(A2=””, “Pending”, “Payment Done”) checks if cell A2 is empty. If it is, “Pending” is displayed; otherwise, “Payment Done” is displayed. * AND(logical1, [logical2], …): Returns TRUE if all of its arguments are TRUE; otherwise, it returns FALSE. * Example: =AND(B2>5, C2>4) checks if both the value in B2 is greater than 5 AND the value in C2 is greater than 4. It returns TRUE only if both conditions are met. This can be used within an IF function: =IF(AND(B2>5, C2>4), “Bonus Eligible”, “Not Eligible”). * OR(logical1, [logical2], …): Returns TRUE if any of its arguments are TRUE; it returns FALSE only if all of its arguments are FALSE. * Example: =OR(B2>5, C2>4) checks if either the value in B2 is greater than 5 OR the value in C2 is greater than 4. It returns TRUE if at least one of the conditions is met. This can also be used within an IF function: =IF(OR(B2>5, C2>4), “Meets Criteria”, “Does Not Meet Criteria”).

These logical functions are fundamental for creating dynamic and decision-making spreadsheets.

Excel Navigation Keyboard Shortcuts

Based on the sources, there are several keyboard shortcuts for page navigation within Excel.

To move to another sheet within the same workbook, you can use the following shortcuts:
Control Page Down: This will move you one sheet to the right (or downwards in the sheet list).
Control Page Up: This will move you one sheet to the left (or upwards in the sheet list).
To move between different workbooks that are open, you can use the following shortcut:
Control Tab: This will jump from one open workbook to the next. You can repeatedly press Tab while holding Control to cycle through the open workbooks.

Additionally, you can use the mouse to navigate between sheets by clicking on the sheet tabs at the bottom of the Excel window. You can also go to another workbook by clicking on it if it’s visible, or by selecting it from the Window menu (which can be accessed without clicking, though the exact keyboard shortcut for this menu is not specified in the sources).

For fast movement within a single sheet (not between sheets), the sources mention:

Page Up: To quickly scroll upwards.
Page Down: To quickly scroll downwards.

These shortcuts help you navigate large datasets within a single worksheet.

The name box can also be used to jump to a specific cell within a sheet by typing the cell address (e.g., A1, Z100) and pressing Enter. While not directly page navigation, it’s a method for quick movement to a specific location within a potentially long sheet.

The sources emphasize using these shortcuts for efficient work within Excel, especially for repetitive tasks.

Managing Multiple Excel Workbooks

Based on the sources and our conversation history, here’s a discussion on workbook movement in Excel.

Our previous conversation established that you can move between different open workbooks using the keyboard shortcut Control Tab [our conversation history]. This allows you to cycle through all the Excel workbooks you currently have open.

The new source provides further context related to working with multiple workbooks:

You can open new workbooks by going to the “File” tab, then “New”, and selecting “Blank workbook” or choosing from various templates. Templates offer pre-designed layouts for different tasks, saving you from starting from scratch.
You can also open existing workbooks by going to “File” and then “Open”. This will allow you to browse your file system to select the workbook you want to open. Alternatively, you can use the search functionality within Excel to find and open workbooks.
The source also mentions the concept of a “workbook” as the entire file you are working in. When you save your work, you are saving the entire workbook. Multiple worksheets can exist within a single workbook.
Interestingly, the source details how you can move or copy entire sheets between different workbooks. To do this:
Right-click on the sheet tab you want to move or copy.
Select “Move or Copy…” from the context menu.
In the “Move or Copy” dialog box, under “To book:”, you can choose a currently open workbook or select “(new book)” to create a new workbook for the sheet.
If you want to create a copy and keep the original sheet in the current workbook, make sure to check the “Create a copy” box. Otherwise, the sheet will be moved to the destination workbook.
The “View” tab in Excel also offers options for managing multiple workbook windows:
“New Window” allows you to open another window displaying the same active workbook. This can be useful for viewing different parts of a large workbook simultaneously.
“Arrange All” lets you tile or cascade all open workbook windows on your screen. You can choose from options like “Tiled”, “Horizontal”, “Vertical”, or “Cascade” to arrange them in a way that suits your workflow.
“View Side by Side” helps you compare two workbooks (or two windows of the same workbook) next to each other.
“Switch Windows” provides a dropdown list of all open workbooks, allowing you to easily select and switch to the desired one.

These features, along with the Control Tab shortcut, provide comprehensive ways to navigate and manage multiple workbooks in Excel. You can open new and existing workbooks, move content (sheets) between them, and arrange their windows for efficient multitasking.

Excel Cell Data Entry Methods and Techniques

Based on the sources, there are several methods for entering data into cells in Excel. These methods cater to different user preferences and situations:

Direct Cell Entry: The most straightforward method is to simply select a cell and begin typing. Once you have entered your data, you can press Enter to move to the cell below or press Tab to move to the cell to the right. This is the initial way to input new information into a blank cell.
In-Cell Editing (Double-Click): If you need to modify existing data within a cell, you can double-click inside the cell. This action places the cursor directly within the cell’s content, allowing you to make changes at the desired position.
Formula Bar Editing: Another way to edit cell content is by using the formula bar located above the worksheet. When you select a cell, its content is displayed in the formula bar. You can then click in the formula bar and edit the data directly. This can be particularly useful when the cell contains a long formula or a significant amount of text that might be easier to view and edit in the expanded space of the formula bar. Pressing Enter after editing in the formula bar will save the changes to the selected cell.
Using the F2 Key: A keyboard shortcut for entering edit mode in a cell is by selecting the cell and pressing the F2 key. This action places the cursor at the end of the cell’s content, ready for modification. The source also notes that on some laptops, like HP models, you might need to press the Function (Fn) key along with F2 to achieve the same result.

Beyond basic entry, the source also touches upon efficient data entry techniques:

Fill Handle for Series: For entering sequential data like numbers or dates, you can use the fill handle. After entering the initial value (or a pattern of values) in a cell, a small square appears at the bottom-right corner of the selected cell. You can click and drag this fill handle down or across adjacent cells. For numbers, if you only enter ‘1’ and drag, it will copy the ‘1’. To create a series (1, 2, 3…), you need to either enter the first few values to establish a pattern or click on the drop-down arrow that appears after dragging and select “Fill Series“.
Auto Update Settings: The source briefly mentions a setting in Excel that can automatically extend data ranges and formats based on patterns. This setting can be found under File > Options > Advanced. Turning this setting on allows Excel to automatically recognize patterns and apply them when you enter new data adjacent to existing data. Turning it off will prevent this automatic updating.

These methods provide flexibility for entering and modifying data in Excel cells, whether you are starting fresh or editing existing content. The choice of method often depends on personal preference and the specific task at hand.

Excel Data Entry Shortcuts: Efficiency Tips

Based on the sources, there are several useful shortcuts to enhance data entry efficiency in Excel.

Moving Between Cells After Entry:
Pressing Enter after entering data in a cell will automatically move the cursor to the cell directly below. This is useful for entering lists of data in a column.
Pressing Tab after entering data will move the cursor to the cell immediately to the right. This is helpful when entering data across rows.
Editing Existing Cell Content: When you need to modify data that is already in a cell, you can use the following shortcuts to enter edit mode:
Double-clicking directly inside the cell will place the cursor within the cell’s content, allowing you to make changes.
Alternatively, you can select the cell and then make your edits in the formula bar located above the worksheet.
Selecting a cell and pressing the F2 key will also put you into edit mode, with the cursor typically positioned at the end of the cell’s content. On some HP laptops, you might need to press Fn + F2 to achieve this.
Filling Data in Adjacent Cells: Excel offers shortcuts for quickly populating adjacent cells with similar or sequential data:
The fill handle, the small square at the bottom-right of a selected cell, can be clicked and dragged to copy the cell’s content or extend a series into neighboring cells. For a numerical series, you might need to establish a pattern (e.g., by entering ‘1’ and ‘2’ in consecutive cells and then dragging) or use the “Fill Series” option from the AutoFill Options menu that appears after dragging.
To quickly fill down the content and formatting of the cell directly above the currently selected cell(s), use the shortcut Control D.
Similarly, to fill right the content and formatting of the cell immediately to the left of the selected cell(s), use Control R.
Entering Multiple Lines in a Cell: If you need to enter text on multiple lines within a single Excel cell, you can use the shortcut Alt Enter to insert a line break at your desired point.

These data entry shortcuts can significantly speed up your work in Excel by reducing the need to constantly use the mouse for navigation and repetitive actions. Understanding and utilizing these shortcuts can lead to a more efficient data entry process.

Excel Basic Formatting Guide

Based on the sources, basic formatting in Excel involves modifying the appearance of your data to make it more readable, understandable, and presentable. It encompasses various aspects, from the fundamental structure of workbooks and worksheets to the visual styling of cells and their contents.

Workbook vs. Worksheet

Before discussing formatting, it’s important to understand the distinction between a workbook and a worksheet. A workbook is the entire Excel file you save. Think of it like a notebook. Inside this workbook, you can have multiple worksheets, which are like the individual pages in a notebook where you do your work. Your manager might ask for a specific worksheet (a single page with certain data) or the entire workbook (the whole file containing all your work). You can add more worksheets by clicking on the plus (+) sign.

Saving Your Work

To preserve your formatting and data, you need to save your work. Excel provides two primary options: Save and Save As.

Save As is used when you save a file for the first time. It prompts you to choose the file name, location on your computer, and the file format (e.g., Excel Workbook, PDF).
Save is used for subsequent saves after the initial “Save As”. It saves the changes to the same file name and location without prompting you again.
The shortcut key for both Save and Save As (after the initial save) is Control S. If you press Control S on a file that hasn’t been saved before, it will act like “Save As”.

Basic Formatting Steps

The process of basic formatting typically involves these steps:

Selecting Data: Before applying any formatting, you need to select the cell(s) or range of cells you want to modify. You can select the entire current region of data by clicking anywhere within it and pressing Control A.
Adjusting Cell Dimensions: You can adjust the width of columns and the height of rows to better display your data.

You can double-click the right border of a column header to automatically adjust the column width to fit the widest content.
Keyboard shortcuts for adjusting column width include Alt H O I and Alt O C A.
To adjust the row height automatically, you can use the shortcut Alt H O A.

Understanding Data vs. Formatting: In Excel, there’s a distinction between the raw data you enter and the formatting you apply to it to make it presentable. Formatting includes things like colors, borders, font styles, and alignment.

Common Formatting Options

The “Home” tab in Excel contains the primary tools for basic formatting.

Alignment: You can change the horizontal alignment of text within a cell (left, center, right) and the vertical alignment (top, middle, bottom). Left alignment generally looks natural for text, while center alignment can be suitable for headings.
Font: You can modify the appearance of text by applying styles like bold (Control B), italics (Control I), and underline (Control U). You can also change the font type (e.g., Calibri, Arial) and font size. Additionally, you can change the color of the font.
Cell Styles (Fill Color): You can change the background color of cells using the “Fill Color” option (the paint bucket icon). This can help to visually highlight specific data.
Borders: You can add borders around cells or ranges of cells to define them visually.
You can apply all borders (thin lines around each cell).
You can apply a thick outside border to emphasize the edges of a selected range.
The “Borders” dropdown offers various border styles.
To access more border options, you can go to “More Borders…”.
To remove borders, you can select the range and choose “No Border” from the borders dropdown.
Shortcut Keys for Formatting: Excel offers several shortcut keys for common formatting actions:
Accessing the “Home” tab functions starts with pressing Alt H. After pressing Alt H, letters will appear over the various groups and commands within the “Home” tab.
For All Borders: Alt H B A.
For Thick Outside Border: Alt H B T.
For More Borders: Alt H B M (likely based on the pattern).
For No Border: Alt H B N (likely based on the pattern).
Bold: Control B.
Italic: Control I.
Underline: Control U (source says Control Ya – likely a typo and should be Control U).
Merge & Center: To combine multiple adjacent cells into a single larger cell and center the content within it, you can use the Merge & Center option in the “Alignment” group of the “Home” tab. Select the cells you want to merge and then click “Merge & Center”.
Turning Off Gridlines: The faint lines that appear around cells (gridlines) can be turned off for a cleaner visual presentation by going to the “View” tab and unchecking the “Gridlines” option in the “Show” group.

Number Formatting

Excel allows you to display numbers in various formats. You can access these options in the “Number” group of the “Home” tab.

General: The default format.
Number: Displays numbers with decimal places.
Currency: Adds a currency symbol (e.g., $) and decimal places.
Accounting: Similar to currency, but aligns the currency symbol and decimal points in a specific way.
Percentage: Multiplies the value by 100 and adds a percent (%) sign.
Comma Style: Adds a thousand separator (comma).
Increase/Decrease Decimal: Allows you to control the number of decimal places displayed.

You can also access more number format options by clicking the arrow in the bottom-right corner of the “Number” group. This opens the “Format Cells” dialog box, where you have more granular control over number formatting, including date, time, fractions, scientific notation, text, and custom formats. The Text format can be useful for displaying numbers with more than 15 digits, as Excel might otherwise convert them to scientific notation or round them.

Date Formatting

Excel recognizes and formats dates in various ways. You can choose from predefined short date and long date formats in the “Number” group or access more options in the “Format Cells” dialog box. Custom date formatting allows you to specify the exact way you want dates to be displayed using codes like d (day), m (month), and y (year).

Conditional Formatting

Conditional formatting allows you to automatically apply formatting to cells based on specific rules or conditions. This is found in the “Conditional Formatting” group on the “Home” tab.

Highlight Cell Rules: Allows you to format cells based on criteria like greater than, less than, between, equal to, text that contains, a date occurring, or duplicate values.
Top/Bottom Rules: Allows you to format cells based on their ranking, such as the top 10 items, bottom 10%, above average, or below average.
Data Bars: Fills cells with colored bars that represent the value in relation to other cells in the selected range.
Color Scales: Applies a gradient of colors to cells based on their values.
Icon Sets: Adds icons to cells that visually represent their values relative to other values.

You can clear conditional formatting from selected cells or the entire sheet. You can also manage conditional formatting rules to edit, delete, or reorder them.

Table and Cell Styles

Excel also offers predefined Table Styles and Cell Styles that apply a consistent set of formatting to tables and individual cells, respectively. These can be found in the “Styles” group on the “Home” tab and provide a quick way to format your data with a professional look.

In summary, basic formatting in Excel is crucial for organizing and presenting your data effectively. By understanding and utilizing the various tools and shortcuts available, you can create clear and professional-looking spreadsheets.

ZERO to HERO in Excel! 📈 Full Step-by-Step Course with AI

The Original Text

Hey, have you brought a resume? There is neither AI nor chat, GPT. There is no need to bring a resume like this. The formula does not solve it. Everyone says drink tea, drink tea, the problem will be solved. Drinking tea does not solve the problem. Got my sister married. Did 99 workshops. Did thousands of interviews. Neither did I get a job nor did Excel come. So what happened ? What happened? What happened? Forget it. Now let’s talk a little about the real thing. Single compress features and The formulas range from basic to advanced and now there is a twist of AI in it, so in this video I have covered all the important features and formulas which are important for you if you want to survive in the corporate world. Here we have created such creative dashboards. If we talk about data, we have worked on huge data here, so whether you are a beginner or advanced, we have covered all these things here. What else will be the benefit? If you complete this video, then you get free certification and access to it. You can get data for practice on our app. Yes, you will also get the data which I have used in this video and apart from that, you will get extra data. You can check it under the free content inside our app. Mam, how to know what all I have covered in the video, for that you can check the description where pay time. If stumps are given, then you can go there and jump to your topic in a single click. So, if you want to do live training with us, that too on many accounting software’s, data analytics and finance, then you can join us. You will get all the information in the description, so check it quickly, like it, comment and don’t forget to subscribe because a lot of courses are coming, be it Excel. Pabi I have SQL, SAP, Telemark busy, so many courses, don’t wait too long, let’s start this video right here, let’s get started, now stop wasting, watch it, let’s start from the very beginning. If you want to read about Excel, then first of all you have to open Excel, then go to your search engine and type excel from here, after that you can open it from here, it will hardly take 5 seconds and your Excel will be open with you. There may be different versions, the version we are using here is 2021, it will take a little time and will open, see that it has opened and here we will maximize it so that the entire screen is visible to you, now it is possible that if you are opening it for the first time, then all these files will not be visible to you, whatever options you are seeing, all these will not be visible to you and if you are already working. Your files will be visible here, after that you can see Home New Open here , we will read about them later, here you can see that there is a blank workbook in which we work and apart from this, many templates are also made, here you will get more templates, so basically what are templates, see, it is simple, when suppose you are doing some work from scratch, then you will go to the blank workbook, but what are templates? Let me explain with an example, suppose you have 10 pictures and now you have to make a video of them. So what do you do? You go to some app, put those 10 pictures and choose a template and put it. There are many effects inside that template, there are a lot of stickers, there are a lot of text, there are a lot of frames, it automatically gets applied on your pictures and a video is prepared for you very quickly. So that which is ready in a second, what is it, that is your template, so in the same way, if you do not want to do any work from scratch, then here you have many templates available, you can use these templates, all you have to do inside it is your data, you can save it in it, you can do whatever you have to work in it, like this is a bill page checklist, you have to do some work in it, you open it and do the work inside it. You have to do something else, this is some weekly attendance report. If you want to work in it, you can do it in it. It has already created many templates in this way, if you want, you can use them. Here you also get to know how Ekal works, like Get Started with the formula, the formula is explained in detail, Power Query, Pivot Table, Pie Chart, if you want to see then you can see these also. Above you have it saying that suggested search, if you want to do any search, search from here, if there is any template related to it, then it will appear in front of you, here you get lots of templates, okay, let’s go, now we will read further, because we are studying from scratch, so what will we take, we will take a blank workbook because we have to learn to create all the things ourselves, so what you are seeing right now is Excel as is. You open Excel, you get this type of interface. Now the first thing we are going to do is to do an interface overview. What are we going to do? So let’s do that. To do that, I have found a way to do that, just because you have understood everything, so I have already taken a screenshot of this entire screen. From that screenshot, now I will be able to draw, I will be able to explain each and every feature to you very well, so I did one, now as soon as I move it down a little bit. And let’s zoom it from here so that it becomes easier for you to understand and from here we take the draw, see if there is a different feature visible on the top or any feature is visible somewhere else, then you do not need to worry, these features can be added to you too, how will it happen, we will add it now, okay, after that, now we start reading, you will see the Excel logo at the top most, this will let you know that you have opened Excel, after that You have the option of auto save, for now it is off, you can also keep it on so that the work you are doing gets saved automatically. In any case, you were doing some work, you were working on a big data and suddenly the light went off, your system is not charging and it is switched off, then in such a case, even if all your data is lost, it will continue to be saved. You can save it from here , at any place like let’s say this is the option you are seeing. Let’s say Quick Access Tool Bar, what is Quick Access Tool Bar ? There is an option of Redo and Undo, so you can do it directly here only. If you want to keep something else here, then you click on it. Whatever you want to keep here, you can keep it here, like Touch Touch Mouse Mode, Sort Ascending Descending, Spelling Check, Quick Point of Email, Open key, New key, whatever option you want to keep, you can keep it here. I find these options to be the most useful like there is an option to save or undo and so on. There is an option of Redo, I find these the most useful, so I have kept them here, you think something else, don’t do anything, see where my cursor is going, click on this dot drop down and add any option from here, OK, now let’s move forward, when you open Excel for the first time, then by default the name that comes here is Book One, so this is your file name, this is the name of your file, basically this is the current name of your file. The name given is Book One. Can we change it? Yes, of course we can. Is it mandatory to do so now? It is not at all mandatory. You can change it even when you are saving it. You can give whatever name you want to give. Yes, of course you can give it as per your wish to save it. You can do it by default. What comes is Book One, Book Two, Book Three. Now I open another file just because three files are already open, so by default that is it. What name will come, book four will come, you can change the name if you want, you can do it, after that you get this search engine inside which you can search, earlier if there is any file created, if anything is created, then you can search it here, after that look above, you will see all the same options, because we have taken the same screenshot of this, so that you can understand easily, here you can see my picture here. It is coming and here you will write ‘TS’, see, ‘ Not for now’ it is writing ‘Coming’, the picture is visible. Otherwise, the initials of your name are also visible here, so here I can tell you that this is just because I have logged in, this is my licensed version, so your picture will be visible here or the initials of your name will be visible. These three things will help you to minimize and maximize. You can save your screen by using this cross. You can also close it directly. After closing it, as soon as you cross it, it asks you whether to save it or not. It’s totally up to you. If you want to save it, you can do it. Look, these are the options here. Okay, I was talking about these options. Let’s go here right now, we are not going to get any other option in the left most left. That’s it. There were options which we have explored. Now let’s move towards this side a little bit. See, always remember this thing, whether it is single or any software, it is full of features and Excel has a lot of features but do we have to learn all the features. Do we have all the features visible on the screen here? So the answer is no. Okay, we do limited things which are useful to us, we do those things. Now as you can see, here I use a different color like you can see here. It is File Home New Tab Insert Draw Page Layout Formula Data Review View Help Acro, you may not have some options in the middle like it is not a new tab, whether it is a draw or not , then this is the one of Acrobat, it is okay, we can add it, I will tell you how to add it later, but what do we call these, what do we call these, what do we call tabs, what do we call tabs, file tab is home tab, new tab is insert tab, draw tab is page layout. If there are tabs, then these are your tabs. Now you will see a color difference. Here you are seeing a color difference, which is charcoal yellow and sorry, charcoal gray and this one above is black, right, meaning there is a box inside this black, what do we call this box, what do we call this box, what do we call ribbon, what do we call this ribbon, what is ribbon, so basically there is a tab at the top, there is a box below the tab, inside which all the features are given now about it. We will read in what is that box called ribbon, that is, there are things given inside the ribbon, okay after that you can see that there is Clipboard, then there is a line, there is Alignment, there is font, then there is a line, there are numbers, then there is a line, there is style, then there is a line, look, the same thing is there in other tabs too, there is insert, then there is tables, then there is a line, there is illustration, then there is a line, there is charts, then there is a line, there is spark line, then there is a line. What is this basically that you are seeing, what is this, so let us read it, these are our groups, if I talk about what is alignment, what is font, what is clipboard, what is number, what is style, what is cell, what is all this, what are your groups, what are groups, basically if suppose I have to do some work related to font, then the whole Excel has been put in this group, then inside it you will get all the options scattered like this. No, if it is in a very organized way, then this is your group, this is a group of fonts and inside the group, like this is visible to you for the font, this is the BiU border color and all these things which are there in the paint, so these are what are inside and what are the features, these are the features but the group that has been formed which means within which these features are, each one that is visible written below is your group. If I talk about insert, then the table is a group. Illustration is a group, Chart is a group, Spark line is a group, Filter is a group, but if I talk about page layout, then theme is a group, page setup is a group, scale to fit is a group, sheet option is a group, arrange is a group, so in this way it is a group and all the things that come inside it are its features. Got it, no one understands anything, there is no doubt anywhere, please let me know in the comment section, this is the whole thing . The session is going to be quite long, so there may be n number of doubts in it, so you keep writing down the entire doubt, wherever it is, you can tell it in one go, you can tell it separately, no issue, but you must tell it so that it can be replied to and you can get clarity about it. Okay, so you keep writing the note down and after that you will tell it because you are going to read it completely, right, so let’s go a little more. Let’s move ahead. After moving ahead, we leave these two options. This or 28 and this is visible. We will understand later. Now we will go down. What we see is this sheet one. So we call it sheet. What do we call sheet and with this plus sign, we can insert more. Add, insert is the same thing, we can insert. Now suppose I have created many sheets here, I want one more sheet, I come to this sheet, once the last sheet is here, I did plus, then look, another sheet has been created, I have this sheet inside it, it is by the name of sheet 14, it is fine, I have to delete it, I right clicked on it, I have deleted it, I come to the first sheet, look, by following these three dots, these three dots will appear in your sheet only when this one of yours. The portion will be filled on the screen. This portion will be filled only when there is nothing to do further. Otherwise, the option to do further will not appear. Okay, from here you can increase more sheets. After this, the options that you see are these options. Here on one side there is this and on the other side there is this, both of them do the same work, do the work of movement, do the work of which one do the work of movement and The movement it is doing is basically the one which is taking you left to right, left to right and the one above is taking you up and down. What is it taking you up and down? Okay and what are these two called scroll bars? What are scroll bars called? Okay, we call them scroll bars because it is helping us in scrolling. Now I am also showing this to you by zooming. If I am telling you, what I am doing is going left and right here and there like this again and again. If I want to go up and down then I use this, so these are our scroll bars, after that the options you will see are these three types of views. Okay, there are three types of views, so what do they mean? Look at what they do. Understand that, which is the first view. I take it for a second, which is the first view, what is the first view, what is your first view called? The first view is called normal view because it is the normal screen and you will see it in normal view, so what will we call it? Normal view which is the second view and is your page layout view. Well, if you go near it, it will automatically tell you the name. Like, if I moved the cursor here, this name came automatically. What is page layout? What is page layout? What does page layout do? Suppose you have to check this because you have created the data and then after that. Obviously, if you take a print out of it, then you have to know that later on, if I take a print out of it, then my data is not getting cut in the print. If I do this, in any case, if you want to check this thing, then you can do it like I suppose, now I click on the page layout, then it is showing me that if at today’s time I go to print it, then my data will be cut in this manner. You can see in different pages, it will be cut in this manner, so now. I can adjust my data accordingly and on clicking on the normal view, the normal work that we do is good, after this comes the page break view preview, so you can also see directly how the page break is happening, so it is showing me the page, in this way, this line is visible, this will become one page, this will become the second page and the rest will go in the third page. These four pages of yours are being created because you have written below also, in this way. This gives us the view, for now we have taken this normal view, so from here you understand the three types of views. Okay, after that see what is the option you are seeing here. I take it for once. Yes, after that what is this option you are seeing? Just give me a minute, look, this is what you have, to zoom in and zoom out, you zoom in and zoom out to zoom in and zoom out. From here, look at the zoom of your screen. If it is zoomed then it is at 175. Now if we zoom in then it will reduce. If we have to do more then it will become more. So if you want to zoom in and zoom out then you can do it directly from here. So here you have learned most of the things about the interface. Now let us move a little further that inside the interface you will see this in the middle. Just because when we started Excel, it was looking like this, so here they are coming in the form of boxes. So, what do these boxes mean? What are these boxes, what are they called, why are they called, why are they there, now we are going to understand the meaning of all these. Okay, now you have understood what we are going to understand, as much as you have understood is enough, now we are going to read about these boxes, so let’s just give me a minute, we have come here, look, you know that we are going to read about pay boxes here and the boxes that you had read till now, in what way were they coming, a line was coming like this. One line was coming like this and then one line was going like this And one line was going in this way and after that it was coming in the middle as a box, it is coming in the same way, look at the side, see this, a line is coming from here, a line is coming from here, a line is going from here, and a line is going from here, by doing this this box is getting formatted and what do we call this box, I am talking about it, so what do we call this box, we call this box, okay, what is this? Let’s say cell, let’s say OK, I understood that all the boxes in our Excel, we call them cells, so from now on, whenever I say something, I will not say box, I will say, is this work to be done in this cell, is this work to be done in this cell, okay, let’s go next. We see that you are looking at the top A B CD, so I can say that this line is a, this line is b and you are seeing numbers written on the side. So I can do one thing, I can write this as one, I can write this as two, so that means this cell is made up of a and b and one and two, so what do we call a and b, what do we call a and b a column, what do we call a column, this is a, not a b, from now on we will not say that a is b or b is a line or c is a line, there is a column, we call a column, so from now on, what will we call a, column a, what will be the meaning of column, then this a As far as this is, the entire line of b means the entire line of b means the entire column of c means the entire column of c. The entire column of n. The entire column of What is completely there is called row, we do not call it line, we call it row. Okay, so now I can say that look, to make a cell, I need columns and if I need rows, then I can say what is needed to make a cell, column is needed, row is needed in plus. What are your columns? What are your alphabets, which you can see on the top and what are your daily lives, they are numbers. Okay, together with them, your cell is formed. Now suppose we will understand which cell is which cell? They understand that suppose I am on this cell, look, now not only the grid lines are off, that means the lines themselves are off, the cells are still being formed, so let’s do one thing. I ask here, here I explain to you how we understand the cell. Now this is a cell. You look above, the color of all the others is of the same type, one has become a little darker, that means this is the income column, this is the eye column, also look here, which one is this 90, so this 90, so what does it mean? This cell is made up of what is it made up of? Aa is made up of columns and 90 rows. Because now you have not understood that a cell is made up of what? It is made up of a column and a row. So what is this cell made up of? I is a column and a row is 990 so what is its name? The name of the cell itself is called aa 90 and look here i 90 that is why we call this box the name box. If you go to this , this is our name box, that’s why we call it name box because it tells us the name of the cell, so that’s your name box. Okay, why is the name box telling us because it is telling us the name of the cell? How will the name of the cell come? Now we will find the name of the cell. Look, we have come to this cell, quickly tell me which cell is this. Look, what is this cell? Look, what is darker from here is j and from here 67 That means j column consisting of 67 rows. This cell has been created and what is the name of the cell j 67 So here is your g67 Suppose I have to do the same thing here now so tell me what is its name its name is q So we will see our column from here 66 Your cry So what is the name of this cell q6 66 So you can see here it is coming by writing q66 Got it understood one or two more let’s see here Suppose I clicked here So what is the darkness here Look at the dark color here What is darker is v and from here darker is 65 that means v column 65th row and what is the name of our cell become v65 ok this is how we do our interface this is how we name our cell this is your name box now you have learned three to four things what have you learned look at all the alphabets written here all the alphabets written what are your columns and see all the numbers you have seen here You can see the numbers here , you can see the numbers, I am just telling you this, okay, these are your daily occurrences, okay, and here, this is a box which is made, we call it a cell, now you have Learned Name Box. Now suppose you write something inside a cell. Now I am telling you to write inside the cell and after that I am explaining the difference in it. This cell is yours and inside it you start writing anything, so if I am writing anything then it is visible above here. So, whatever you write inside a cell is written here also, that is why it is said that if suppose it comes outside the cell and I have to make some changes in it, then to make the changes, if I If I directly change from here and write the taan here then see it has taken the taan here also. If I have written the taan here then it has taken the taan here too. If you have not written anything in this cell then look above it is empty. If it has been written in this cell then see your writing has come in it. You have written something in some cell. Look and it is being written here and the other way around. If this cell is empty then this cell is empty. So in this way, whatever you write inside any cell is written here also. This is why we call it the formula bar. Later , when you will put the formula and write it inside the cell, you can edit it by looking here instead of looking inside the cell. So this is your formula bar where your formula will be shown because the value is shown inside the cell, so this is the formula bar. Gradually, I will explain it better. I will explain it better where we will learn to do data entry. Now I will be able to explain it well. I zoom it out and make you revise the whole thing for once. As you saw, you get exactly the initiative cross, after that you get this file, home new tab and all these, what are yours, these are your tabs, if I go to home, then if I ask you, clipboard, font, alignment , number, what are all these, these are your groups, inside the groups, what are all these available to you, these are your features available, this is yours, this is your name box, this is your formula bar. Your A B C D E F G H What are all these, your columns, all the numbers you have written, these are your days, all these things are made below, this is your sheet, with Plus, you can create more sheets from these, with which we go left, right or up and down, what are these called scroll bars, what are your views, the first one is the normal view, the second one is your page layout view and the third one is page break view and from here you can see it. If you can zoom, here we have completed our interface. Now let us read about our next topic, which is workbook and worksheet. Now we will understand workbook and worksheet, what is workbook, what is worksheet, let’s understand with an example. Okay, Raju is a student. Raju is a student. Okay, and he goes to school, he goes to school, he has four He studies subjects basically Hindi, English, Maths and Science. Okay, he studies four subjects. So now you tell me that if he makes a joint notebook of all four subjects in which he writes the homework of all and does all the work inside it, then will it be okay? Can he do all the work in one notebook? Tell me, can he do all the work in one notebook? The answer is no. He cannot do all this work in one notebook. What will he do? That Means will make one notebook for one subject, that means there are four subjects, so there it will make four notebooks for each subject, inside each notebook it will do its work, Hindi inside this, English inside this, Maths inside this and Science inside this, oh ok, in the same way Raju makes each notebook for each of his work, That Means makes a separate notebook for each of his different subjects, in the same way, when we work, we are different. They create files, what did they create, notebooks, what did they create, notebooks for their different works, but what do we create to do different works, what will we create, we will create notebooks, we are not studying in school right now, we will create workbooks, basically, inside Excel, when you create different files, we call them workbooks, you have seen so many of these things files here in the file tab, these are different files, right, that means these are my different workbooks, that is why. Here it is written Recover Unsaved Workbook More Workbook What is the meaning of workbook this blank workbook is ok so what is the meaning of workbook this is this file this is this file and there suppose now Raju has to work Raju has to work now let’s take another example he is making a Hindi notebook he is making a Hindi notebook and there are 10 chapters inside it how many chapters are there in 10 chapters okay so what will he do what will he do one Will take only one page and will write 10 chapters inside it. Isn’t it possible? And anyway, if a page ends at the top line, you still go to the next page because I have to start chapter two from a separate page, chapter three has to be started from a separate page, chapter four has to be started from a separate page, so we call it that we make separate pages, that is yours, what is called here. Now as if I have to explain it to you, I only know the basics of Excel but here I have created an interface for you in the first sheet, I have created a workbook for you in the second sheet, I have saved the file for you in the third sheet. In this way, whatever topic I will be teaching you, I have created it here so that it becomes easy for me, so in the same way, the pages in the notebooks are pre-defined. What does pre-defined mean that the notebook you buy? It depends on whether you have bought 200 pages, whether you have bought 300 pages or bought 500 pages. This happens in the sheets. You can insert as many sheets as you want here. You just keep clicking on the plus plus sign and you will get that many sheets. We here, the pages are already available, they are already given, we do not already have the sheets. If we have to do any other work, do a plus and create another sheet, so here are our pages, basically the pages inside the file where we will work, that is your worksheet, so now you understand, workbook is the whole file, workbook is the whole file, and inside the workbook there is a worksheet, inside the workbook there are worksheets, so now if your manager is telling you that Tarun, I have taken a random name like this, Taran, you send your worksheet. If you give, then you do not have to send the entire file, you have to send the sheet where the particular work has been done, they want the sheet and if they say send the entire file, that means if you have done let’s say five-seven tasks in it, then they have to see all the work of yours, so that is the main difference of workbook and worksheet, its use will be that now you will understand when there is a conversation, there is a conversation about Excel, now you know. What is workbook and what is worksheet and this example was just taken from me so that you can relate it to it. Now your topic has been completed here. If we talk about the interface, we have covered the maximum things, we have completed the interface. Now I am going to teach you the next thing. See the save file. When you work, it is obvious that you would like to save that work. Suppose my This is the file on which I am explaining different things to you. Obviously, I would like to provide you this file, so to provide this file, I have to save it, so we save it by going to the file here. After going to the file, you get the option of Save and Save As. So now let’s understand it a little bit. What is Save S and what is Save. Let me just zoom it on my screen first, so I have this here. I have zoomed in and here I have taken the pen, see there is an option save as and add a save. Save as means in which way do you want to save it. When you save for the first time, it gives you the option of save as, that is, it asks you at the initial level, in which way do you want to save it, do you want to save it in Excel file or want to save it in some other form, where do you want to save it, where in your laptop. Do you want to save it, under what name do you want to save it, he asks all these things at the initial level. Now suppose we will take today’s date, that is, today you have saved it on any date, now tomorrow you will open that file again, if you work beyond that, then you will not have to give it name and location again and again, you have done it on the first day, after that you have to save what you say in the subsequent subsequent times, now after that for the first time. After this, every time you save, you will save the same thing. If you have to change something, then you will do the save as again. You will go and save in the other wise. The shortcut key for both of them is Control A. If you are pressing Control A, then if it is a file for the first time, then automatic save as will come and if that file is already created, then it will automatically get saved. By saving this, you will get the idea that OK, fine now, save as. There is no option, it means that this file is already running and already saved. Okay, so in this way we would have two options. The first one is save as, the other one is save. For the first time, when you save, the save as comes. By pressing control s, we are able to save it. Now I have to press control s, control s, then this pass option comes. If suppose I do not press control s, then what kind of option would I have, it comes in this way. If I do save as, then basically I have to browse here. I have to tell me where I can save it. If you want to find a place in your laptop where you can save it, then you take the option of browse, you click on it, here you can check any location, where do I have to do it, I have to do it in my volume D, I have to do it in Accounts Expert and from here in Advanced Excel course, going to Sheets, what we are doing right now is that we are doing the basics of Excel, inside this we have to save it here and that too in what name to save it Part One Over Part One Interface Overview I want to search by its name, so I saved it here. If suppose you want to change any format, then here you get many formats, you can save it in that format, you can even save it in PDF, you can save it in CSA, you can do it in whatever you want, but now in which we will do it, we will do it in Excel workbook, so we clicked on it and here we saved it. After saving, now we have saved it, right? Now suppose I cross it out, I have crossed it out, okay, we have crossed it out, now we go to that folder of ours, go to the new volume D, go to Accounts Expert, go to Classes, sorry, no classes, this is your file youtube0, you click on it and it will open and you will get all the work that was yours as it is. Okay, now whenever I have to do some more work, I will not save it. Now suppose I write something else here that this is how we Save the files, then I write something else here, here I write what is the shortcut key or what is this, I write this is the shortcut key, I have written this, now suppose I want to write the shortcut key in my new file because earlier I had not saved it, now I have not saved it, I pressed control S, then see this is what happened back then, now I cross it out and after that go back to the folder and open it by double clicking from here. After opening, see this is automatic in my Now suppose I have written the shortcut key here, let me tell you here, suppose I have written the shortcut key , okay now I am not saving it directly, I am crossing it out and why am I asking this again because it is saying that you have not made any changes in it, have you made any changes in the previously saved one, now do you want to save it or not, now if I want to do it, I will have to tell him. Save because I was going to cross directly, if I wanted to do control s, then it would have been saved as it is. Now after this, whatever I keep doing any work, that is why if you are working in a big data, then you can do control less again and again so that it keeps getting saved. Okay, so here we learned how we save our file. Let us move a little further. How can we do movement inside Excel. What is movement, let’s say this. This is my cell and after that I have to go left, I have to go right, so whenever we learn anything here, where we have to learn shortcut keys and other things too, we will always work in two expectations. What are those two expectations going to be? The first expectation will be yours. Here, if we have to do any thing directly with the mouse, then how can we do it? The next one is the keyboard that I am telling you how to do anything with the keyboard. When we talk about the keyboard, then obviously our short tricks come to us that how can we use the short tricks and make it work directly. There are many such short tricks for many things, but I will tell you the main things, which if you think, this is my repetitive work, remember its shortcut keys, there is no need to remember them all, because if you remember so many, you will get loaded. End After that, you will not be able to remember everything, you cannot even remember everything, it is not practically possible to remember everything, that is why whatever repetitive work you do, those things are your shortcut keys. You can remember all that in that, so see, now we are going to start now the shortcut keys that we will do or the things that we will do that we will learn about what are we learning about the movement means to move here and there in Excel, so how can we go, if I talk about moving here and there in this cell, then wherever you click with the mouse, you can go there, second thing, if I want to go to other sheets, I can go to other sheets by clicking anywhere. The third thing is, if I want to go to another workbook, then suppose I open another workbook and this is I have opened one workbook and I have opened another workbook, this is one workbook, so in such a situation, if I want to go to another workbook, then I go here, I do not click, it will come automatically. In this way, I can go to each one, so it was like going with the mouse, but if it comes to the keyboard, then what do you have in the keyboard, first of all, your The only thing you need to go anywhere are your arrows. What are the arrows? What do you get in the arrows? You get to go to the right side, you get to go to the left side, you get to go up, you get to go down. You can go in any direction here through the arrows. Look, I am moving through the arrows, okay, this is what we are moving through the arrows, I understand, okay after that. The thing that you get, the arrows are also for now, what do you do later, as soon as you start working, you start practicing, your work starts increasing, then there you have more keys also, if I talk about going to the right side, where to go to the right side, then you can go to the right side, you can go to the right side by pressing tab, by pressing what, by pressing tab, now my cursor is near D, which means it is in the cell, now we are pressing tab, so we are going to the right side, if I have to go to the left side right there. If we have to go down then I will tell you what to do. For now we will understand what we will do if we have to go down and after that if we have to go up then what will we do. Basically when we have to go down then we press enter, then see it is taking us down by entering, then press enter. See, you have learned about right side and learned about down. As soon as we start doing its opposite, meaning the opposite of right is left and opposite of down is up, then our keys remain the same. Tab is just put shift in front of them then it will come shift shift tab and it comes shift enter what comes shift enter ok now suppose I want to go right side then obviously I will press tab ok now I want to go left side then I will hold shift and go while pressing tab then it will come here automatically. If suppose I want to go down then I will keep pressing enter and if I want to go up then I will keep holding shift and If I keep pressing enter, it will go up, so this was your move from one place to another cell within the sheet, then you can use it in this way. Now it comes to the point that suppose I have to go from one sheet to another. See, no matter when we read, in which direction do we read? In which direction do we move? In this direction means in the direction from left to right, we go right, so whatever we will read now. You read it in the same way, if you have to do movement inside the sheet, if you have to do movement inside the sheet, that means you have to go left to right, if you want to go left to right, that means you want to go in the forward direction, then what will you press: Control Page Up, Page Up, Page Up, Sorry, Page Down, that means you are going downwards, no, you are going downwards, so what will you press here, Control Page Down, down and right there, you are coming right to left, that means going upward. Well, it starts from here, I am going towards this side, so I am going page down. The beginning is here, so I have to go upwards. Basically, I have to go here. From left right, I am moving towards left left. So what we will do here is control the page up. Okay, this was the point when in the sheet, if I have to move within the workbook, that means I have to move from one workbook to another. If I want to move from one workbook to another workbook, then I press the control tab and automatically jump from one workbook to another. What did I do? You hold the control tab control, it is okay and go while pressing the tab, then you see, I have gone to another sheet also, so it is fine here like this. I understood that if anyone does not understand anything, then I keep saying this again and again that you You can tell in the comment section, I will reply to it directly and whatever doubts you have, keep writing along with them. Either keep telling together or make a note together. Lastly, you can tell it in the comment section. So here we have learned our movement. This is what I am doing with the scroll bar with the mouse. If you want to go up, which one can you go? Either you can use the arrows or you can press shift and enter. You can go up by Shift Enter, you will go down by Enter, you will go down by Shift, Tab, you will go left, Tab, you will go right. Okay, from Control Page Up, you will go to the interface overview workbook, from Down, you will come back here, so this is the way you work. Now suppose you have a very big data and you have to scroll down and go down, then it will take a lot of time to scroll down, so in such a situation, if we page up, then of course you will reach the top, just page up and page down. If we do this, then we can do fast movement down below. For fast movement, within the sheet, you can use page up and page down, so I write here. If you want to do fast movement within the sheet, you have to do fast movement with in the sheet, just because you are going to get this sheet, that is why I am giving you everything hand written, so that whenever you open it later and see, if you do not get everything, then write it for fast movement. So what have we done, when we have to go up, what do we use? Page Up, just press Page Up, OK, don’t press anything else, and if we have to go down, what do we press, Page Down, let’s go for a second, okay, till now we have done all the keys for our movement. Now what we are going to do next is to do data entry. So far, we have learned all the things, that is, how to move, what is anything, what can we say, now the work that has to be done has to be started. So now we will start our data entry shortcuts. Initially we will learn the shortcuts that how to write things inside a cell. Now see the data entry shortcuts that we are learning. Suppose you go to a cell and you obviously have to enter data. So either you go to the cell and start writing anything directly. Like I wrote my name, I started writing directly and pressed enter and what comes from enter comes down, so this came down if I was in the cell. And after writing, if you press tab, it goes to the right, hence these keys are used. Okay, you were here, you started writing anything directly, you wrote it. Now I understood that oh my God, what did I have to do, I had to make T of Tanu bigger and S of Single, now I have to make some changes inside it, so understand how the entry inside the cell is done. Now if I have to enter inside the cell, then either I will double tap, in which position I go. Here I am, I want t, I went here and double tapped, then my cursor came here, after that I put control t here, which means A from here, I will write it in capital, okay fine, one way was this, the other way, what is this, the second way is that suppose now I had to do it in small, I have written it wrong. The second way is, I can go to the formula bar and fix things directly, whatever I want to do, that is why the formula bar is there because of the cell. The same thing is written there, you press enter, then this is yours, okay, the third method and I will tell you because if you do not want to double tap, you do not need the help of mouse, if you want to go directly, then you can go inside the cell directly, you go inside your cell. Now suppose I had to do it in capital only, then you press the function f2 or press f2 directly, then your cursor will come at the very last, now you wanted a single or from the side arrow. You come to the side and make it S and you come to the side with the side arrow and you make it T and after that you enter, then your name will appear in this way, so what are the ways you have to enter any cell, basically what we were talking about here was about entering the cell, how to enter the cell, how to enter the cell, so if I talk with the mouse, then you can enter directly, there is no problem. If I talk about the keyboard, then what all you got in the keyboard, you can do it directly with the mouse and also for the formula bar, you will need a mouse, so I do the formula bar in the keyboard, you can either go to it and double tap or double tap and your cursor is there. It has gone inside or you can press f2 or in some laptops like HP laptops, this thing is also seen that you have to press f2 with the function, then go and enter f, then you will get a key on the side of the control, press f2 with the function, you will go inside that cell, in this way we enter inside the cell, in this way we write our data, now we will enter the complete data in actual. Now we will learn that if we have to write inside a cell, then how to write that also. Now let us move towards our entry. See, now what we are going to do is we are going to do data entry and for data entry, first of all we went to the first cell. Now whatever I want to write, I can start writing directly just because there is nothing inside that cell. So now I wrote the serial number. After that I wrote the party name. After that I came to the side and after that what I wrote here is cells. For now, we are directly creating a small data, so we have created a very small data, after that I wrote one here, here in the party, sorry, party name, I have given the name of some party, I have written my name, after that I come here, I have written any amount here, after that I will write two here and here I will write any other name. Now see how tiring it will be. I write any amount here. It is so tiring that again and again I have to be serialized. If you have to write numbers then what will you do to avoid having to write serial numbers like this again and again, then delete the second one, first write whatever you have written there and then look inside it, look here, now your cursor is like this plus and as soon as you go to it, another plus is formed. A small square is visible, so as soon as you go to it, click on it, hold it and just drag it down, so for now, what it did is it copied it. The same data which is written above has been written below because we had written one, so one has been written, so now click on this drop down on this box and choose fill series from here and after that it will fill the series and give you it, so you could drag as much as you wanted, you could drag it directly. Now if you want, you can write all the names here, you can write any name here, okay, you will keep writing any name and whatever is your data will be created here, I will quickly do something else. I write the name here, you can take the help of your shortcut keys, movement and all these and can use them only. Okay, so we did this and we will write some more names here like and here we write some amounts. Okay, so here you have created your data. Okay, in this way you write your data. Whatever you write in it, inside your sheet, in this way we enter our data. If you want to edit something, then you can double tap that cell. You can go in or you can go with f2 or you can correct it with the formula bar, so this was the way of entering your data, the way you have done it now, let us move ahead towards our selection, see how the selection is done, for this I have already taken a data, here now let me tell you a little bit why I am doing the selection, what is the need, what are you going to read, selection means that suppose you select something or something. If you want to apply for Pay then you will have to select it first. Let’s understand from an example. Suppose you are using your phone, okay, you are using your phone, you are using your phone, okay inside the phone, you will go to WhatsApp2 inbox and go there and paste it and whatever you had to copy there and after pasting it there, you will send it. Correct, you do the same thing, if suppose you are directly forwarding a message, there will be a forward arrow like this. If you are using this too, then this is also selected first, then you understand that no matter what the software is, when will you be able to apply any work, when will you be able to select that work first, the thing you select and the thing you apply will be applied only on the thing which has been selected, the message you select is forwarded, the same message is forwarded, the rest do not get done, to do the rest, you will have to select the rest as well, so here what is We are going to learn that selection, we are going to learn that when we work inside the data, we should know the selection , how can we do the selection, so look at the first expectation, so like I always tell that we study in two aspects, the first one is mouse and the other one is Keyboard, you can select the whole thing with the mouse. In this way, you click once and then hold it, do not leave it and take the selection till the selection you want to make. What can you do apart from this, apart from this you can learn with the help of the keyboard. Now with the help of the keyboard, the thing we are going to learn is the first thing we are going to learn, we will learn complete selection. What will we learn complete selection? Suppose, let me give you my data. If I want to select the data up to where the complete data is written, then I press Control A because I have made complete selection means all data selection, all data selection now all starts with All starts with A, so we have put Control A. Okay, now let’s do this selection, first of all we selected it and then came here and selected it. Click anywhere in the cell. Okay, press Control A there till the data is written. Selection will be done, OK, you click anywhere, after that you will use control A, then as far as the data is written, selection will be done, that is done, if we want to do complete selection, then how can we do it, after that comes single click selection, you can write this, these are some terms, we create them to understand ourselves, it is not that things will work on the basis of these terms, so what will we do now, single click selection, but there is one thing in it, you will be able to go till that point. Selection has to be done as far as the data is written. I give here as far as the data is written. The data is there or is there. Okay, so if you have to make a selection till then, what do you have to do? You have to hold the control shift and then use the arrow. Now the usage of the arrows is up to you whether you have to go up, go to the right, go to the left. It’s all up to you, so right now the data you have, suppose I tell you that you are on the reference number and you have to go till 10. If you want to select up to 15, then if you press control A then the entire data will be selected, but we do not have to select the entire data. We are here and we have to select up to 15, so we will hold the control shift, after that press the down arrow, then the entire selection will be done. In this way, we have to select till the data is written. Suppose I am on this entry and till this data is written . If I want to make a selection, then if I press control A, then the entire data will be selected. I hold the control shift and after that press the right side arrow, it will come till the data is written, suppose I write any values here also, write anything here, dozen matter, we have written this here, okay, after that I come here to five, hold the control shift and press the side arrow, so as far as the data is written, the selection is done, understand. Hey everyone, I hope you all have understood, but if you don’t understand, if you have any doubt for a second, then you can ask me in the comment section. So here we have understood that how we can select a single cell with a single click, how we can select till the data is written. Now comes the third thing. The third thing comes to you is that suppose you have to select a single cell, that means you have selected the entire cell in one go, right? If you want to select a single cell, then till now you were doing it by holding both control and shift. Now you have to hold only shift and then use arrows. Okay, then use arrows. So let’s do this and see what I am telling you. Look at the reference number. Suppose you are on the reference number and you have to select up to 10. Now if you assume that if you hold control and shift, the entire data will be selected, then this is also not required. After that, if you assume that you are on the reference number. If you go and use control shift down arrow then selection will be done up to 15. If you don’t want this then what will you do. Don’t even touch the control. You have to hold the shift and just tap it tap tap tap tap tap. You keep doing it. Down arrow will come to you and you will select one cell. What did you do by selecting one cell each? Okay, it is all up to you as to how you want to make the selection, so it was your selection that if you want to select a single cell. So you press shift and after that all your selection will be done. So the thing you learned here was that whenever we have to do any work in the data, how do we do the selection? You must remember that if you want to select the complete data, then control A will be used single. If you want to click selection then these controls will be used shift and arrows and single cell selection sorry in single click selection and if there is single self selection then we will use arrows by holding shift. Now let’s do our basic formatting just because we have data entry. Selection has come so let’s understand a few more things. Now let me explain to you. For adjustment adjustment, let ‘s take another sheet for once. We are on the selection, after the selection, we tapped and after that see rename it here. If the sheets do not have a name then we will not be able to do so, so we will right click and rename it. What will we do with the adjustment? So let’s move on to the next thing that we will learn. We will learn what to do with adjustment. Now let’s see what adjustment is to be done. Suppose I write my name here Tanu Singhal. Now you see what I have done here. The name is written, it is written in b2, but the name I can see is also visible inside c2. You are able to see, I can see it inside this cell too, so have I written something inside this cell c2 also? Look inside b2, Tanu Singer has been written. Nothing is written inside c2. Your formula bar can tell you this, so what is happening here, what is happening here is that all the cells of ours have a particular width. If you You write some data inside it which is bigger and we will have to do its width adjustment ourselves. Now its width will remain the same but now we can adjust it. Now how is the adjustment done. You pay attention to my cursor. For now, which way is the plus? This is the plus of this way. As soon as you know where you have to make the adjustment, where is the extra coming inside C? Is it coming inside C, right? If the space between B and C increases then your work will be done. You will go to the middle of C and see your plus has changed. You are seeing that your plus is changing. Correct, your cursor is changing. Cursor is changing. What does it mean? Now you can make a selection. You click on it, hold it and just drag it as much as you want to drag. You can do this much, you have to do this much, you have to do this much, you have to do this much or you have to do this much, it is your choice, I have dragged this much, so look at your cell. The width must have been increased. It is in between these two that you will have to select the complete column. You can do it in this way. Similarly, if you have to increase the height also, as you are going to this, your plus is getting changed. You can do it like this. Okay, you can do it in this way, but I was just telling you about the width, but what happens is that if we assume that I have done this with the mouse, we will not do everything with the mouse, we will also learn from the keyboard. For now, for the time being, you can do this directly with the mouse, but the thing is that right now Tanu single could have come in so many cells but I have done so much by dragging, so look, it is possible that I could have done this much by dragging by mistake or it would have remained like this again and again, doing it like this, like this, this looks right, this looks right, this seems right, doing this can be very tiring, so what would you do in such a situation, suppose you have selected the cell like this. So you will go between B and C, this plus has come, right, after this plus comes, you do not have to hold anything, do nothing, just double tap, this will automatically adjust it. Yes, yes, if suppose your cell was like this, it was not like this, nor was yours, you go between B and C, go here, just double tap it, so it has corrected it here, so this is the way you make this adjustment, so I have explained to you in a single cell, here in which way you have done it. You have made an adjustment by double tapping. Let’s take a data from here. Just give me a minute. Control A did control C did. I went to the cell with my adjustment and did the control here and after that we saw this data. Now look at this data, you are able to see this party name. This party name has been reduced because what I have brought is to keep the width of everyone’s cell correct. Now in the process of keeping the width of everyone’s cell equal, the rest of the things are not coming properly. Now what will we do? We will fix it, but first of all, let us tell you about what we learned from the mouse. What we learned from the mouse. From the mouse, we learned that either you take the cursor there, hold and drag, learned this one method, learned the second method, take the cursor there and just double tap it, we learned these two methods. Now we will come to the keyboard related things, that if we have to fix something from the keyboard, that is, with the help of shortcut keys, then see how to do it. So here

you have it, if you want, you can go here and fix it one by one, but do you have to do it like this, is it a very time consuming process, you don’t know how much to fix, how much to do, if not, then what will we do, we will use shortcut keys, we have to use it on the whole, it is not so, if we have to fix one thing, then how do we select the entire data in one go, you click anywhere and use Control A, if you press Control A, then you have pressed Control A. After this, you have to use shortcut keys which is Alt AO I, then by pressing Alt AO I, it automatically got whatever width it should have had. Now suppose your data was in this manner, at some places its length would also have been going on. In this manner, the data would have been there. Now you have learned how to correct the width. You have selected the data. You have selected the data, by pressing Alt AO A, its length will also be corrected. Correct, this length will also be correct, so you have two. Just learned the thing from me here, if I have to correct the width, there are two keys to correct the width, if I want to correct the width, then there is Alt H O, Alt H O I and one more is Alt O C A, this will work in some people, OK, what is it for height or what will be Alt AO A for length, so basically this is the difference between I and A. Last, the rest is the same, now you do not remember the keys, now you just listen to the keys. How to remember, I will teach you the whole memory technique so that you will say oh my God, it was so easy and I was so nervous, okay so don’t memorize the keys right now, you just learned the adjustment, the main adjustment was that we will double tap from here and adjust things, okay now we have entered the data, made the selection, made the adjustment, now we will move into our basic formatting that when we enter the data. If we do this, the data is created. What we are going to do is do our basic formatting, but before doing this, we should know a little theory. Whenever we talk about Excel at the initial level, we talk about two things, one is data and one is formatting. Now what is data, what is formatting, let us understand a little bit what is the meaning of data. Look at what you will be working on, that is, if you are working in Excel, then what is Excel for? You can do calculations, you can present it in a good way, you can make reports from it, you can make dashboards from it, then you can take decisions for yourself from it, you can take decisions for your business, so basically whatever work we do, we do it on data, but data means when you have seen the data, you have seen the data even in the past, there are many things like this inside that data, there are colors, there are borders, your figures may be different, their size may be different. Basically, when you present it, you do it in a slightly different way, don’t do it like this, see what I have written above, this is the entire data written, you will see the data in this way, what will you see in it, what will you not understand, you will not be able to understand, right, you will not understand in this, why will it not come because it is given in this format because only data is written here, there is no formatting done, if I speak in these lemon language. Decorating is basically when you decorate your data, you make it presentable. I have presented my data in such a way that now the person in front can understand it, that is your formatting. So the thing we had learned till now was that data entry was just taking a data and going into the cell and entering it, but now we have learned to make that data beautiful and also to make it presentable, now we have learned it inside it. You are going to learn to make a presentation. Like see, in this also I will make you remember many shortcut keys. Cut keys will be remembered by you. Trust. Now I will make you remember all the shortcut keys. It is clear that we will use only what we have learned till now. Now initially we know that we have to correct something or apply something, so first of all we have to select it and if we have to do this within the entire data, then what do we have to press to select the entire data? Just tell. I will have to click anywhere and press control e. We will have to press control e. By doing this, our entire data will be selected because whatever work we have to do, we have to do it on the entire page. Now we have to fix its width because you can see that some are bigger and some are smaller, so to fix the width we can press Alt OCA. Otherwise, if you press Alt AO, it will also be done. Now it looks a little better to me. Does it look worth seeing? Does it look worth seeing or not? It looks absolutely fine. Now let us correct our data. The first thing we have to correct inside the data is to correct the alignment. Now we will carefully see that all the text written here is written on the right side of the cell. Look, this is also written on the right side, this is also right. They are written on the side and only there you will notice the text, all of them are written on the left side, so suppose I select the entire data and look at the options here, either I do everything on the right side, it will look a bit strange in reading but it still looks better than the first one, but if I turn it to the left, then it looks right on the left, why is it looking right? Psychologically, you can apply a small logic in this, that is, we If I am reading Tanu Single, then I am going like this. Tanu Single Right, then we read anything like this. So to our eyes, if something is in left alignment, then it looks fine. It does not look a bit strange to our eyes, it does not look strange, that is why the left still looks fine to us, but which one is best for us? Which one is the best in the middle? Which one is this in the middle? Is this one in the middle okay? So, we have done the middle. Are you understanding everything right now? Is the text right? What is all the things? So this is what happens in our Alignment. What is Alignment? That means whatever we select, we can move it to the left or right or in the middle. Now I have made it in the middle. Now, what are these top three portions? You will see carefully, this is at the very top, this is in the middle and this is at the bottom. You will not understand the difference now, but now you will understand. Suppose right now it is celled in this manner, now I have selected it, or I can put it at the bottom. Do you want to keep it at the top or want to keep it at the top? See, for now, when your data is absolutely accurate, when the width of your data is absolutely accurate, then there is no difference between the top and bottom. It seems that you select the entire data and look at it from top to bottom. Not much difference will be visible. When does this difference become visible? Suppose at that time your data is shifted here and there, if your alignment is down or up, then it will be visible in this way. So, since you have done this in the middle of your data. If yes, then make it in the middle from here also. Now suppose even if your length increases, it will still remain in the middle. Okay, now you fix it by double tapping from here. You have fixed it, so you always have to keep the align ment, what is the align ment to keep, if you want to keep the center center, then what is the align ment to keep, if you want to keep the center, then I keep writing the points below that what have we done, so that we can remember that later, okay, this will be fine, we write the pay points here. What are we going to do? So first of all, what we are going to do is that we have done the right alignment. And what we have done right in the alignment is that we have done it in the center. Okay, we have done it in the center. Basically, we have done middle middle, so we can say that we have definitely brought it to the center. Even if I talk like this, I talk like this in the center. If I talk like this in the center, then also in the center, we have brought him to the center. Second thing, let us try and see. Second thing, what will we do? We have gone to our data now. Now what we will talk about is the heading, what can we do on the heading, so in general our heading which is the heading you will see, now we are seeing in the adjustment one, you are seeing that there is a color on the heading, it is slightly raised, then the data is looking good because it is emerging, it is understood that what is written above is the heading, the data below is written as normal data, so in the same way we will have to create this heading, now I will have to create my data from here till here. If we have to select from reference number to amount, then what do we have to select, what shortcut do we have to press ? As soon as we press control shift side arrow, control shift side arrow, we will have all this data selected and that too within a single click. Now it has been selected. Now if we want, look, go inside the home tab and here you will see the rest of the things which you have to do, so do them one by one. Let’s say you want to make it appear a little raised, you want to make it appear a little thick. Yes, right now the words are written thinly, so you can bold from here, so see it has come in this way, I will close it, see if you can see the difference, then you can see the difference that you have bolded. Given italic, it becomes a little tight. We do not want italics. Underline brings the underline below them. We do not want underline. If you want to change their font, you can do that too. Generally, we professionally use Caliber and Arial. Okay, so you can use them also. You have to use this, you have to use this, you have to use this, you have to use Arial black, whatever you want to use, you can do it normally. Used this and it looks very thin, so we use the normal caliber. Okay, after that you get the cell color and that means first we see the size. For once, here you get the size. You can write the size yourself and can also select from here. As you keep increasing the size, its size is increasing. As you keep decreasing, its size will decrease. 12 I think okay, what will we do after that? Just because you are seeing, now because of this heading again, it is not coming complete, so we will do control A, we will do control A anywhere in the data, we will do Alt OCA, then it has adjusted itself, now we have to color in it, so we will select it, now understand one thing, which is this, what you are seeing is this box, let me just take the pain fast, what you are seeing is this box, which means what we call a cell, inside the cell, if I have this If I filled it like this, then what color is there inside the cell? Red and on top of that, if I write something with white color, then what will we call that white colored thing or what is written as font? So what we write inside is our font and this is our cell, so the color shown here, this bucket, this bucket colors that cell, so suppose I color it yellow, then what to do, yellow bucket means I have colored the inside of every cell and there is a font inside it. Meaning, for now, suppose I make it red, then look, it has become red, but I don’t like red, I make it white, so it has become white, now I take this one, I color it green or I color it blue, this one is blue, then look, it has become of this color, so basically this bucket colors your cell and this is what is written, it colors your box, whatever you write and keep something inside the cell, it colors it, okay , I understood. Now we write everything here, what other things have we done, what things have we done? Pay attention, we will write some things here, we have bolded it, after that we have italicized it here, then what else we have done here, we have underlined it. Okay , after that, what have we done right now, we have not done anything else, just colored the colors and the font, no problem, now you will see that the data is visible fine but there is no error anywhere inside it. Oops oops, there is no border anywhere inside it, so now we will put a border on it, what will we do, we have to put a border on the entire data, we will select the entire data, after that we will go to the home tab, inside the font group in the home tab, here you see an option which we call border, if you go to this, then look, after writing here, thick outside border will also appear, you click on this drop down, after clicking on the drop down, you will have so many options. Are there options, ma’am, do you have to remember so many options? The answer is no, all these are for drawing a single line, you do not need to remember this, you have All Borders, so you take all these borders, if you click on All Borders, then a thin border will appear on everything. Now with All Borders, you have seen it in this way, but do you remember in your school, when you used to make drawings, you used to make sketches, You have made a sketch, filled the color inside, after that you are busy in darkening it, brother, we will make an outline on the outside, we will make all the thick outlines so that the sketch of yours can emerge, in the same way, we have to make our data beautiful, so what will happen by making it beautiful, you selected the entire data, after that you selected it and after that you used thick outside border, then you see, it has become thick on the outside, it has become normal on the inside, do you want it or not, ma’am? I have to put different types of borders, so don’t look anything else, I will tell you three to four, you see exactly that, after that you look straight and don’t look for anything in between. Come here, Thick More Borders, More Borders, Here you get the option, suppose you want to apply this thick, right now it is this thick, it would have been this thick or suppose you want to apply dotted, then I took this one. After you see where you have to put it, there is no need to put it one by one, here you can put it whether you want to put it on the outline or you want to put it on the inside or if you want to put it on both sides, then turn on both, here you can see the preview. I only wanted to put it on the outside, not on the inside, so I did nun here and then took the outline and did OK. So now see, it is on the outside and the rest have been removed. Okay, so in this way we put our borders, so what did we learn today? Meaning, for now what we learned is, look at what we put inside the borders, first of all we put all the borders, okay, all the borders, then what we put thick outside border, so we put thick outside border, we are writing this because later we are going to remember the shortcut keys of all of them, ma’am, so many shortcut keys, yes exactly so many shortcut keys, more borders and after that what we are going to do is what we are going to do, tell me one thing about all the ways. You have put a border but what can you say in English to remove the border, no border, we don’t need any border, so you have no border. Now, if I ask you to do all the work that you have done, but if I say this, you will have to do all this work with shortcut keys , then will you be able to do it? Let’s make this data exactly the same as before. See, what is the first thing you have to do. If you want to remember any key, then in your laptop, in your computer, press Alt. Press Alt. After doing this, look upwards, H is visible everywhere, all this is visible, no, whatever work we are doing, what kind of work we are doing, for once, I go here, now I press Alt, the work we are doing, what are we working in, in which tab we are working, we are working in home tab, no, home tab starts with what does it start with, read the spelling of home, H O M E, home starts with H, so here. Your H will appear. Look, H is written here, what does it mean? If I press H, then a key will appear on top of all the functions inside the home. Now we are going to talk further. Okay, first of all, I will scape it that I do not want this. Here you have understood the activation. If I talk about activation, what is it? Alt is activated. What is the key of home? What is the key of home? Whatever function we are working on, where is it present inside the formatting, all that is present in the home tab. Right, to reach the home tab home tab, we will have to press all touch. Now the thing is that how to do the align ment, then the align ment starts with a and we have to center it, so we will press a. So this is its shortcut key, understood. Let’s understand one or two more, then you will understand that all the borders are there, how to do all the borders. Suppose your What are the keys starting from Alt, then after that you are going to home, then after that you are applying border and which border are you applying. If you are applying alt border then your key will become Alt H BA. Remember one thing that the key is activated from Alt, from home to home we are doing all the work so h will go and after that b will come. If there is a thick outside border then from alt we activated it. From h we went to border home. From B we went to border and If there is a thick outside border, then thick starts with T, then it will come here. Okay, more borders. From old, we activated it. From H, we went to home. From B, we went to border and from here we applied more borders. So, in the same way, what will happen to no border? Alt HBA has nine borders. So see how easy it was. It is very easy to remember these shortcut keys. You just need to know your work and the system, how you are doing any work. Wherever you get that work, pick up its initials and you will easily remember it. Well, for bold, there is control one. If you try this, Alt H and here it comes by writing 1 2 3, so if you want, you can do Alt h1 23, that will also work in the other wise. Control and Bolt starts with B, then Control B. Italic starts with I, then Control I and Underline starts with Y, so this is your Control Ya, in this way we remember all the keys. One thing, I will tell you the bonus here, just give me a minute. Here we will take the red color. After taking the red color, I will tell you here, did you see the one with width and length , ma’am, width and length? Yes, you were doing it right now, no, what were you doing right, what were we pressing, I did not remember at that time, right? Alt AO I and Alt ho A Now I understand why these two things are taken because inside the home tab, you will get this feature, then press Alt H, look at O, where is the format, we take it here, okay, inside it, as you click, I have clicked that by mistake, Alt H O, and inside this, there is auto fit height and auto fit width, so I and A, so these keys of ours are made here, these are the keys, it is okay, so this is Alt AO I and Alt AO is A and in this way we do all the things. Okay, I hope you have remembered all the keys well. If you have any doubt anywhere then please ask me. Now let me try and tell you for once. Suppose we do the border, then first select the entire data with Control A. With Alt HB A, I have removed the borders from the entire data. I did Control A, did Alt ABA, then did border on everything Alt. If we have done HBT, then there is a border on the outside, in this way we can do whatever work we have to do quickly and very easily, so what we learned here was our basic formatting and we have done the entire basic formatting very well with all the shortcut keys. Okay, if you want to note down, you can note down other wise, so you will definitely remember it, still you are going to get this sheet as it is, so don’t worry about this. Now we have done the basic formatting, now we will understand a little bit about one more topic, which is insert and delete and after that we will move to the advanced topic, what is the meaning of insert, if we look at it in general sense, insert is insert any thing, that means they are adding any thing. Now suppose I saw this data and after seeing the data, I understood, oh no , I have not added any heading inside it, so now in such a case. What will we do, do I erase the entire data and after that go and see that oh my God, now I will go and write the heading and only after that I will make the entries, then it means that there is no problem at all, no, we will not do this at all, what will we do, we will add one more row for ourselves right here, if I add one row for myself right here, then how easy it will be for me, so what will I do, I selected it, look after selecting it, any. If you add something, then what is the plus sign? If you delete something, or if you delete anything, then what is the sign of minus? If you do a minus, then you have to press the plus sign with control, then it will automatically add a row. Now you can write a heading for yourself here, in the same way you had to add it somewhere else. Suppose you have to add here, you do control plus. Now, if I don’t want this thing, then what will I do, I will make the same selection and make it control minus. So, in the same way, now I have told you how to add a row or add and delete a column. Similarly, with Control Plus, you can add a column and delete a column. Now you have learned this thing that when you have to add a row and a column, now if you want to add a cell , you can do that too, but why do you have to add a cell? When we are adding a row column, then look, suppose you have a data written in such a way that a data is written above it. There is a data written below also, now what do you have to do or not to make any changes, that is, do you need another column in the above data, before the name of the party account, you had to write something else, okay, now suppose you select C and do control plus, then this is added below also because it adds the entire column whereas it is required in the data below, otherwise we cannot do this. This is what we have done wrong, so what will we do, as much portion as we want to add, we have added our portion. After selection, I did control plus, now it asks, okay, I have understood the selection you have made, you have to add so many cells, but tell me, what will I do with the remaining data, then what can you do in such a case, you will give command to it, Antays has nothing to do because if I had to antays, then why would I select the cells, if I could have directly selected the entire row and column and done control plus, then these two options would have been useful. Don’t even look, look at the two options above, it is asking where should I shift the remaining data. If I shift down and do OK, then for him it means that I have to make space for you. What are you telling him, I have given it by doing control plus, make space for me, I need space and after that he is asking OK fine, I will make space but tell me what should I do with the earlier data, then you say shift it down to me. I don’t know, make space for me, so he shifted that data down, but did we have to do this? No, we did not have to do this, so what did we have to do? Control Plus, now what am I saying, okay fine, do one thing, shift the earlier data a little to the side and then shift it to me, then the data that is shifted here will be shifted to the right and you do OK, then your data has been shifted to the right and as many sales as you wanted have come here for you and Even if your data below is not corrupted, then in this way we add our data to any row, column and cells inside the data, then here we write it, for one time, use the shortcut key so that you remember later that we have to add any thing, we have to add or insert, then what do we do and if we have to delete any thing or write substack, then what do we do, basically these two things are happening. In which sense it is happening whether it is row or column and whether your cells are dozen matter, you will do control plus to add or insert and control minus to remove it. Okay, so in this way we insert and delete any row column cells. Let’s move the cells inside our excel. Now let us move towards advanced formatting. See, what we are going to do now is to do advanced formatting. Those are the features of that as well as separately. There is no feature but we take it a little advance. See, now suppose we suddenly remember that the heading has not been written, then how can we do the heading? For now, let us keep from deleting the entire data. What we have learned now is that we will select it and do control plus, then we have one row, it will be inserted. We do not have to do that. Right click here, insert option comes, so it will be inserted in this way also. Now I want to write here in the middle, ABC Limited, I want to write the heading, ABC. Limited, so what should I do, tell me quickly, should I do it like this, okay fine, there are three here, there are three here, so I write in D, it will come in the middle, we can do it like this, no, what do we have to do, we write here A B C Limited Limited, okay, we have written this, now what do we want in the middle, neither where in the middle, so first of all, select which one we want in the middle, we want it in the middle, after that you go to the home tab, in the home tab, you are inside the Alignment group. You get only one option of Merge N Center, you click on the drop down of this Merge Center or click on the Merge Center, after clicking it will appear in this manner. Okay, our ribbon is now removed, so now what we will do from here is that if we click on it, it will come in this manner, so see it came in the middle, what did you do in it, merge all the cells we have selected and after that, align them, what do you do with them, center. If you do this then Merge and Center has come here. What did Merge and Center do? After that you can give any color. I give black color that would be better. You can make it bold, you can show it in some other color, you can do some font. In this way, now suppose you had to write this also just because this is a sales report, so you selected this also, Control Plus, Control Plus is not happening, it’s okay, you have inserted it from here, here is another one. You are still able to see that there are separate cells, it has become one cell because you have done the margin center. Now you will write the sales report here, okay and after that you will select this also and then you will click on the merge center and then you will give it a dark color too. In this way, now think about it that you have to do separate work for both of them, so this is not making the work a little easier, it is making it difficult, so when you have to If you have to do more work like this, if you select it and make it merge center, then it will tell you that the top most value which is written will come, if you do OK then only this will come, then don’t do this, what we will do is click on the drop down here and merge means merge in this way, click on merge across, then automatically it will come in this way, okay, this was your merge across, apart from this, suppose you want to unmerge them, you click on this. Click on unmerge cell, it will come like this, now I will do the merge across, so what have you learned here, what have you learned here, two things, what have you learned, three things, you have learned, the first one is merge and the center, you have learned this, the second one, what have you learned, you have learned, merge across, you learned this. And third, you have learned unmerge, okay now you know where all the three things are, we are working in the Alignment group of the home tab, so basically how to activate the home tab, that is, with the activation key, we go to the alt home tab, from H, what have you done after that, after that, you have merged and centered, then your shortcut key will come, merge and center, what have you done, you will activate it from old, go to home from H and here. Merge Across, Merge Across, you should not know the feature, what keys have to be used, the keys are created automatically , Alt H, Sorry, Alt H, now unmerge will happen only when merge is done, first if something is merged then only then it will be unmerged, then M and then you will use U, then in this way, these three shortcut keys of yours have also been prepared, you see, you have to memorize so many shortcut keys in such a short time and trust me, you will not forget once you have memorized it in this manner. Once you start practicing, you will not forget at all. Okay, so in this way, we have done a little more formatting here. One more part of the formatting is left, which is wrap text and one small thing which increases it, I will tell you in the next topic, which is wrap and shrink. See, when we did the interface, inside the interface, I had forgotten to tell you one thing. I am so sorry for that inside the interface, when you will see let me just. Zoom at my screen, you have zoomed this and after that you have come here, you will see here, look here, this is this mark, what is this mark for, see, you can also see here, what is this mark for, I write this mark here, we call it extension, what do we call extension, now what is this mark for, what is that, let’s go to our place and understand, there is no problem in that, okay, we will come to our place, what were we understanding? Wrap End I was thinking, let’s zoom it a little, okay, now it’s okay, so let’s see what it is for. Suppose you have a lot of features. I am saying that Excel has many, many, many, many features, so are there many more features related to fun, and there can be many more features related to alignment, and there can be more, so in such a case, is it possible to show all the features on the screen? Is the answer is no, is it not possible to show them all? So what do we do? There is a symbol of extension in the corner near the group. Look, this extension is not in every group. Look , it is not in Styles, it is not in Sales, it is not in Editing, it is not in Done, it is inside this one. Why is it there because wherever you have it in this way, you have some other options too, but here if they are not visible then the extension comes there. If you click on this extension, a window opens inside, then you have more options to explore here. You get to do another No, to fix the cell, I do not want the width of my cell to increase, I want to keep everyone equal, I do not want to increase it too much, so I want to increase the width of my cell, there is no problem if the length increases, but I do not want to increase the width at all, so what will I do in such a situation, I will click on this and I will wrap my name in the text here, wrap my data in such a way that it will be its width. Its width is neither increased nor increased, then in such a case I will click on the wrap text. Now it is here, now it does not mean that it has become like this forever, as if you are clicking on it, then you are seeing here that it is written ‘Tanu Single’, it means that it is written ‘Tanu Single’ and it is written like this, this is just because you have clicked on the wrap text and now the width of this cell cannot be increased, so this happened, now increase the width of the cell, this is fine. It will come, okay, so where you do not have to increase your width, you can increase your length, there you will use it in this way, in this comes the next one, suppose I write the stems single again and they are going out, now I am saying that I am imposing a restriction but now I am saying I am saying that the width is not increasing, it is fine, but the length should not increase, if the length also increases, then it will not work, so what can we do in such a case, it is obvious that the length should not be increased and if the width is not increased, then the obvious thing is that I will have to shorten the font, now if I try to shorten this function manually, then I will not be able to understand, okay, it looks fine in the ate, maybe in the ate ? If he is going out in the nines, then I will keep doing the same thing, otherwise what do I do in such a situation, I go to this extension and here it says shrink to fit, shrink my data to such an extent that it fits inside this cell, then you click on it and do OK, then it fits inside it, okay, it fits inside it very well, we call it shrink text, you can see it here in both the cases above. In both the cases, Tanu is written as single, but I actually want that no matter how much the width increases, how much length increases, but our data is that Tanu comes down by writing single, so what can you do in such a situation, if you write Tanu, if you move your cursor down, after pressing enter, the cursor will not come down, the cell comes down, your cursor is missing, you have come out of the cell, then how will it be written, see what you will do Tan and when you have to bring the cursor down, now you Do not press enter but press alt enter, your cursor will come down, now write, you enter single, then see here also in your formula bar, it has come written in this way. The formula bar shows the same thing which you write in the cell and the way you write correct, so now it has shown it tan single in this way. Look here, it was showing together, here I reduce the width, see it has come in this way, still it is showing it like this because We have written as it is here, we have written it as it is, so it is being displayed in this manner, so here we have completed our wrap and shrink text. This comes within the advanced formatting itself, so within this we have covered it, we have chunked a lot of the basic, so miscellaneous things also come inside it and along with it, the group with clipboard is also included, which means we are going to add some features in the group, so let’s do the work first. Let’s look at the Clipboard feature. Basically, what do we get inside the Clipboard? You can see that we get features like cut copy paste and so what is the meaning of copy? Here you data. Whenever you have read Excel, you have come reading two things inside Excel. I had initially talked about what are the things we are reading in Excel initially. We are reading the data and we are reading the formatting. Right, so when you copy any data completely, the copy is done. What does it mean, we do Control C or you can copy from there by right clicking, then when you copy, there is data in it, whether there is any formatting, no matter what kind of formula is there, all of them come up in that cell, that is your copy and wherever you have copied it, after that what do you have to press to paste, you have to press control v. Now let’s assume that this is where I bring this data, so first of all I am in advanced formatting. What will I do, I will select the entire data from Control A. After selecting Control A, after that I will do Control C. After Control C, you are seeing these dashes running on the side, that means its selection has been done, after selection, Control C has been done. Now I will go to Sheet Two here because I have not named it yet, it is right in front of you here. Let’s pay here. If I do Control V, then as it is data has come. Alt OCA. Do it as it is, the data has come, let me do it a little like this, as it is, your data has come, if you do this, copy this data and paste it on the side, it will come, that means there will be data here and here too, the data will be right, but if suppose you select the data and do not copy it, cut it, do that means control Basically, what is meant by cutting, data goes from there, what is your shortcut key to cut ? Control You should have selected the data, Alt OCA, done the data, okay, now suppose I want to copy the construction company from it, then I want to copy this, let’s do one way, so let me do this control C and keep controlling v here, control c control v control c control v, so how much tiering process is there, how much tiering process is there, no, I have to do it one by one, so we will not do this, so I deleted it, okay, but now what we will do is let’s see what else we do. You can do this for multiple selection, what can you do, hold the control where you are selecting, then wherever you are clicking, you see that it is being selected, it is being selected, okay, now you control it, it will not take, then it means that for multiple copies, this control one which does the selection method is also not working, then what does it do, what does it do, you open the clipboard in your home tab, keep clear all from here, it should become clear here. Select Control C, go on selecting anywhere, go on doing Control C, Control C, Control C, Control C, I am doing this but I am not holding anything, I am going there with Control C and wherever I feel like, you go to that cell and paste it wherever you feel like. You go to that cell and here there is an option of Paste All. If you click on it, then all these things are there, it has pasted here, all the things are pasted here and after that, clear all from here, then all your things are there. If you want to paste multiple copies here, then this is a shortcut method that if you want to paste multiple copies, then you can do it from here. I hope you have understood, I had to tell you only these things in the Clipboard group for now, there is one more thing I need to tell you. Suppose you want the same formatting for another table, then what will you do. Suppose you will copy from here, paste it and then delete the data. There is no need to do so much fuss, you select this data and here there is an option like brush. If you go to this, then its name comes Format Painter Painter, meaning are we the one who is going to paint, who should do the formatting, then if you want the same formatting, then click on it, see the selection is done here, wherever you leave it, this same bean will come after your formatting, so in this way, we use Format Pinter, now I should name this sheet, so I name it, I give it a name, Clipboard Clipboard Group, we have Here we have completed it, now let us move towards our miscellaneous topic. In the miscellaneous topic, the first thing I have taken is the clear sheet. What does the clear sheet tell you? The meaning of clear sheet is that if I want to delete the data then how can I do it? What can you do to delete it? Let me show you a data. Here we can see this data in the clipboard itself. Do you have this data? You selected this data and after that you deleted it. If you press the option of , then the data is gone but your formatting is not gone. If this problem arises, then here we are going to solve the same problem. You get this feature inside the home tab. Now we will remember its shortcut keys. Now we will remember what happens here for deletion. Firstly, we have called the content data here as content or you want to delete the formatting or you want to delete everything. Which is all, then this is fine. Three things come to you, now let me tell you just because it is in the home tab, so from old you will activate all the keys, you will go to home, from old you will activate all the keys, from old you will activate all the keys and you will go to home, what will come for content, clear, what are we doing, we are clearing all these things, we are clearing right, so for clear, the key it has taken is E, E is taken E. Now you don’t need to do anything, if you are clearing the content, then put ‘C’ to clear the formatting. Just put ‘f’. If you want to delete everything, then put ‘A’. Now let’s see it on our own. I would personally suggest you to delete the content, don’t do anything. After making the selection, you can directly press the delete option, that too will be easy for you, but for formatting and other things, you can do this like you can do with clipboard. Now you have this data and you have to delete it, so I directly pressed delete and it got deleted. Now suppose you have to delete the formatting, then suppose you selected this in the formatting and if you delete it, it will not get deleted. Because there is formatting, then you came to Alt H home, see from E, this is the option of clear, E is for clear and F for formatting, so see, it is completely cleared, if suppose the data and both of these have to be removed, you select the data, activated Alt H, E was for clear and if you have to do everything, then do A, then the entire data will be gone. Okay, in this way we do it, after that you have two more shortcut keys. What is Undo and Redo? What is the shortcut of undo and redo? Suppose you have done some work. Undo means suppose you have done some work but that work was not to be done, then you do undo and for any work that has to be brought back, you read it. For the work that has been done, you press control root that I want it back, meaning I have done it. After that, if I want to bring it back, then I press control w. Now suppose I have to delete what I am writing because I have done it. If I have written wrong, then I will keep pressing control, then by controlling j, all these steps which were mine have been removed. Now if I control yy, then look, all the things which were mine have come back. So this is how it works. Which is your undo and redo? Let’s go. Now let’s see what else comes to us next. Insert and Delete. What is there in insert and delete? Suppose, if you want to add any sheet, then from here you can insert from plus. You can do this and if you want to delete any sheet right there, then you click on it and if you delete it, this sheet will be deleted, so in this way we insert or delete, I right click here and write here that on right click you get these options. Till now I was giving name to the sheet, so to give any name, you have to right click. On right click, you get the option that you can name that sheet like this. If you want to rename, click on Rename then we can give this name. Okay, everyone understood in this way, we check the option for tab color as well. Here we get the option of tab color. If we want to give any color to our tab, then look, I want to give red color, so look, this red color of my clipboard has come. I want to give some other color to Miscellaneous, I took the tab, I want to give green color, so look, my green colored Miscellaneous tab has arrived. Okay, as soon as it is open, it will appear gradient, otherwise it will appear solid color, so in this way you can also give different colors to the tabs, so here we have covered the basic things which are very small things of Excel, now what we are going to do next is to do the basic formula. Further, we are going to start from the very basic. Let’s talk about the formula, so first understand a little theory. See, whenever you are talking about Excel, then Excel is more about the calculation that it makes your calculation part very easy, so whenever we do any calculation, how do we do it, we do the calculation only by taking the help of formula, so formula is a very important aspect of Excel, so all the formulas there are here, they will be taught to you in a very easy way. Now the point comes that ma’am. Formula is maths, I am afraid of maths anyway, so what should I do so that I don’t have to do formulas and it is going to be so typical, so how will I be able to do it, so see here you need a general understanding, a basic understanding, you need a basic understanding, if you have a basic understanding of maths then you will be able to do this work, you do not need many such tricky knots in this, you just need to know that you need to do it. What is your work, what do you need, what is the answer, if you know this then you can definitely apply any formula directly here. If there was a need for typical maths here, then why would we be doing Excel? We would not have done the maths on our own, but this makes our work easier, that is why we use the formula here. When any formula is started inside Excel, then what is the initiative? Equals to It happens that first of all we have to apply equals to and then we have to work. Now you will say ma’am if you don’t understand then you will understand easily. Keep a little patience. You just remember each topic which we have done till now. Name of the cell, what makes up a cell. You just tell me that our cell is made up of one column plus row. If I tell you this is a cell and the name of that cell is a1 then what is the meaning of a1 a is the column one is the row. Just keep this thing in mind, after that I I will explain all the things automatically to you. Let’s take a scenario and after that let’s understand it in a better way. You will understand better here. Here you can see that I have taken a data here. What is the data? Let me tell you, first of all you are given the serial number, after that the student name is given, after that the marks of Hindi, English Maths and Science are given. Now if you want to find the total, then if you want to find the total, then basically what to do is to sum. Now do the sum. In which do you need even, which cell is g3 in it, it is okay, you keep looking carefully, which cell is this, g3, please understand this thing carefully, because if you miss this topic even a little, then there can be problem in the future topics, this is your g3, what answer do you need inside g3, do you need total, whose total do you need, one is needed of c3, one is needed of d3, one is needed of e3 and one is needed of f3, okay then basically you You know g3 = c3 + d3 + e3 + f3 ok now let me say suppose you are here you are here which is your g10 which is your g10 so if you come to g10 then what you need is obviously c10 d10 e10 f10 so you understand one thing as this is your g4 this will be g5 this will be g6 this will be g7 in the same way this will also be c4 this will be c5 c6 will be c7, d4 will be d5, d6 will be d7, so it will keep increasing in this manner, okay, you have understood one thing, we are talking about cells here, now let’s apply formula to it and see, we will learn to do sums in different ways. See, this is a very basic thing, when you do maths, you used to study maths in school too , then the thing that was taught to you at the initial level is when it comes to the calculation part. So that was your even, so here also we are going to even, we will spend full time in even, the rest will not take time, okay let me just remove it, first we remove it and after that we do further work, now what do we have to do, have you understood that the answer we want in g3 g3 is c3 + d3 e3 f3, so what we have to do is we just have to write, when we start any formula, what do we start with? Let’s start from equals two, so equals two, now what did I tell you, what is needed here, c3, so I went to c3, what to do plus, then what is needed, d3, then what to do, plus, then what is needed, e3, then what to do, plus, then what is needed, f3, then what to do, if you don’t want to do anything, then go till f3, you have to do plus, press enter, then this answer will come to you, now you can drag it, so see this is yours. The answer has come, what is the answer, you can check here, this is g4, then yours here is c4 d4 e4 f4, suppose you are here, which is your g9, then here you can give the formula, c9 d9 e9 f9, suppose you are here, which is g12 c12 d12 e12 e f12, so basic, we drag and bring the rest of the formulas ourselves. Initial formula. We have to put it in ourselves, so one way was this, you had another way and take it out, okay, later we will fix its formatting, okay, I will do it like this by going to the home, giving the format to the printer, okay, for now, let me assume that I have told them to sell, if I had done something directly, then equals to 90 + 27 plus 10 PS 47 174. Now should I drag it, what will happen to everyone when I drag it? The answer is 174. Why did this happen? Look, it is a very simple thing. We give three things in the formula. Three things consist inside the formula. I am telling you this very basic idea. There are three things in the formula, one is a cell, one is a number and one is a text cell. It gets changed by dragging, it gets changed by dragging and the main thing is that if you want to fix it then you can do it manually. What can be fixed can be fixed manually, we will have to apply some formula by ourselves, which fixation will also be learned later on. Numbers: If you are writing a direct number, if you are writing a number then it is always fixed, it will never change and in the same way, if you are writing any text, it is always fixed. The second thing is that the number is written directly, the text is written inside the double ted comma, okay now these things are now. You must be feeling that it is very confusing, you have to read it just once to understand, so read it, you have to understand it, understand it, very good, it did not come, there is no need to worry, because now when we will do this with the example, then you will automatically understand something. If you do not understand the theory, then hold on. Because that thing will be understood in practice, not everyone understands everything in theory, not everyone understands everything in practice, so here I have covered both the expectations, okay now we have come here, now tell me one thing, what happened here, just give me a minute, okay, this is not erasing, what happened here, I had given them the value by taking 90 plus 27, plus 10, let me make it 47, now the numbers are If there is no change then here too the formula remains the same. Here also the formula remains the same everywhere. If the formula remains the same everywhere then the answer will be 174 everywhere. What is the second thing? Now suppose I did 20 here then it will change because when we give cell in the formula then we tell them that look, add c3 plus d3, add e3 plus f3, now the formula does not make any difference inside c3. Whether you write 10 or 100, what it means is that he has understood that whatever happens inside c3, I just have to total it and now write 1000 inside c3, even if I come here and here and write 1000, the answer has changed because it does not care what you have written, it just means that he just takes the command in this way in which you told him to add c3 to plus d3. Make a plus on e3, make a plus on f3, then he has just taken the cell. Now whatever you write in the cell, he will do a plus, but what you have done here is that you have told the values yourself, turn 90 into a plus by 27, turn the plus into a 10, turn the plus into a 47. You have already given the values here, so that is why it has not changed it. Okay, and later also when we drag the cells, they drag. If there are any, then they get changed, like here there was c3 + d3 + e3 and f3, here the same thing happened c4 d4 e4 f4, those cells change automatically but here you have given the value, the value never changes, it remains as it is, so this is the problem with us, if we apply the formula in this way, then we will get the wrong answer. Now the next thing comes, I will take one more for once. Okay, I am here and I have selected it and controlled it. Okay, it’s okay, it’s okay. Okay, let’s go. Now we are going to learn another kind of total. Now see how much tiering it will be if I go to each cell and do plus plus plus. So let’s say there were four values. If I have more values, then what will be my benefit? If I do it in the calculator, then in such a case, we will apply the formula to add. What do we call sum? If we say equals to sum then we will put equals to sum and tab and always remember one thing, never listen to any person in the formula, you always have to listen to the formula, you have to do what the formula is saying, what is the formula saying number one comma number two comma number three comma number four comma and so on it has come then we will do number one comma number two comma number three comma number four and turn off the parentheses and hit enter. If you give it, your answer will come. Now drag it to you and see the correct answer will appear. You can check whether you have written Equals to Sum. Pressed Tab. By pressing Tab, the sum will automatically be in capital letters and will open your bracket. Whatever things are written inside your formula, keep writing them. It was written there, number one, comma, number two, comma, number three and so on. So, we gave him this formula, so how easy it was now. Our formula has become automatic. If we change anything, there will be changes inside the formula. Now comes one more thing , control c control v. Now comes the thing that see what it has taken here d3 e3 f3 and along with it g3 because it has understood it as further, so we delete it. Okay cell, when we write neither, they move, that is why our answer keeps getting auto updated. Now tell me one thing, you have applied the formula. Sum is written there too, you have to select each cell and put a comma. Is it easier than this? I will use a calculator, so to make the work easier, look at what we do, when we know that we have to add something continuously, then we write it in a different way, like suppose you have now understood what Equals to Sum is, equals to sum and numbers have to be given inside a1 a2 a3 a4 a5, okay five. The numbers were one way, so this is the second way, if I say now what does it mean, add a1 to a2, then plus th, then plus four, plus fv, I can also write it like this, from a1 to a5, when you have consecutive numbers, there is this colon in between. What does this colon say? What does this colon say? It says from to means this is a range, what is a range, we have You have selected a range that is from a1 to a5, if someday you make it even like this, a1 a5 means what is written in a1 and what is written in a5, add both of them, add both of them, then only two numbers will be added in it and here where you have given the range, it means from a1 to a5, if there are five numbers inside it, then all five of them will be added. Now how does this come, let me tell you first. Funda told you here we will apply the formula of sum, equals to sum tab, after that number one number to number three, don’t do it now. Consecutive numbers are going to come, so you select it, there were consecutive numbers in the same heavy, they were together, then you selected it, now comes c3 colon cf3, sum from c3 to f3, enter and now double tap, it will appear everywhere from d4 to c4 to f4, see this, from c6 to f6 everywhere. Now suppose I will tell you another way, if you had done it like this, I delete it, I would have done it like this, here you would have done equals to sum tab and you would have done c3 f3 and enter, then look, it has given you the wrong answer because it will give wrong answer to all the others because for that you have put a comma, meaning now it is totaling which ones, it is only totaling c3 and f3 and not totaling anything else but us. What was actually needed was that I color all the wrong ones red and here we go red and this one we will give light to this one. All the wrong ones we have colored them in this way and this one is fine. Okay, still I say that I have understood one way how to do it. Well, let me tell you the one which is even. You total it like this. Do it like this. Its total is 184 na ya see below the average count. And all these three come in writing but this is only for reading, that is why we have to learn the formula because we want to write it in actual. Now tell me one thing, now we are doing the sum but how much time is it taking, no, it is not taking time, so now I am going to teach you the best one which is the best. The easiest way is that wherever you want the sum, you go to the cell and keep a condition along with it that there should not be any gap in between and then After that, if you press Alt Equal Two together then the formula appears to be the same. The formula for sum is from c3 to f3, you want the sum, but the thing is that we have not set it, it has become automatic. Now you enter it and obviously you double tap it, now you will get all the answers in the same way. Suppose you wanted the total here, what would you have done if you press Alt Equal Two and enter, then see this sum. It’s ok, we don’t need it right now, so I erased it. I want to fix this formatting, so what can I do? I selected it. Alt HMC Alt HMC. We had just learned this. We have corrected this. I have to fix its width. Do Control A. Do Alt OCA. Use this. Look, my table has been corrected. Here, we have corrected all the formulas. We have shown the total in different ways in which we can sum in different ways. What do cells mean? What do numbers mean? How do they behave ? How do we drag? So here we learned the basics of the formula. In plus we learned the formula for sum. Now let us move on to the formula. Now suppose you have the same, I am giving an example of a basic formula. You have the same data. You have marks and also the total. Now if you want to know or any student can do it by himself. Want to know ma’am, I had total four subjects, how many subjects were there, let us understand a little theory that what we want to find out, then the total subjects we have are four subjects, here there are four subjects, each subject is of your 100 marks, so your total marks become yours, your total marks become 400, your total marks become your 400, now the marks of any student are 300 is the first student, the marks he has got are 300 marks, so obviously how much is the remaining, it is 400 – 300, if I say, he has got 100 marks less, then this is the thing we have to find out, we have to substack there, now the thing is understood here, I have done this calculation for the first student, that means marks for the second student, let’s say 200. So how should I calculate the remaining portion for him? I will calculate the remaining portion for him in the same way – 400 – 200 and after that my answer will be 200. Now suppose a There is another student, now suppose we have another student, the third student, his marks are only 100. Now I have to calculate his remaining marks, so how do I calculate his remaining marks? His remaining marks will also be calculated in the same way. 400 – 100 = 300. So, you must have found one thing common in all the three scenarios and that common is that when you are applying the formula. Minus will always have to be done from 400, 400 or 400. No matter how many marks you have got, whatever marks you have got are secondary, you are putting them here right but right now what is fixed is 400, so just here we have this funda. I wanted to make it clear to you that here, when we apply the formula, 400 is our fix, so 400, we will write something in the number when we have to fix it. The number is always fixed, so we can write that number directly, the cell keeps changing, we fix the cell in a different way, we fix it manually, but if we write the number, it always remains fixed, so we will write the number here, what to do is to subtract it from 400. Now see – 174 has to be subtracted here, then 150 has to be reduced to 108. This is a thing that keeps changing, that is why we are here. But instead of taking the number, we will take the sale of the sale lane because the marks are written here itself, who knows, if any number is changed later, the total will be changed here, it will be automatically reflected here, so you can enter it and after that you will draw it. Look here, out of your 400, g23 should have been laced, g23 is laced. Suppose you are here, which is your h27, then it is in 400. Cess g27 should have been minus, the same thing is happening, so it means that you have found the correct answer, everyone has understood it, if you feel that you have any doubt or are not understanding any formula, then you can tell me in the comment section. I was telling you earlier also that write all the doubts together so that you can convey me and at the same time, I would definitely like to tell you that look very much now, generally we have 40 50 There is time as much as hours or there is a minimum time of 40 hours. One is that time and one is this time within which we have to cover all the things in a limited time, so there is definitely a little time constant which is not there in live. In live, no matter how much we stretch, in how much detail we read our things, there is a slight difference, but I will try my best to make you understand all the things that I teach. Okay, here we are on Substack. Learned to do, now let’s move on to our next formula. Now our next formula that comes is this, we are going with the basic fundamentals. I also did plus, minus, if we multiply, then it is basic. Here, just like a sheet of sales is made, it is just like there are party names, there is quantity, there is rate, so you need the amount. How is the quantity and rate amount arrived at, that is, we multiply the quantity. Obviously we get the amount from the rate, so we will equalize to that we need the quantity , basically we will give it, we cannot fix it here, you cannot write this, 442 * 985, if it changes later and you have to put it for everyone too, then you will not write this, what will you do, you will give a cell, then you have given c46, you have to multiply it, for multiplying, you will get a star above the eight, you can use that star. Do this and after that give this cell that this d is to be multiplied by 46, enter it and in this way your answer will come. Double tap it and you will get all the answers. Now suppose you are on e48, then on e48 what do you want that is c48 * d48 then you can see your answer that it is c48 to d48 so in this way we multiply. I have also taken the divide in the same way. This is a little bit of its opposite, suppose you have the amount given, the rate given and now you have to know the quantity, how much has been sold, this is the normal way in which we used to do maths, this is not normal maths, okay, there is not much hard and fast rule, so what will we do inside this, see, let me explain to you a little math inside this so that you do not face any difficulty, so here is what we did initially, what we did initially and what we are going to do now, I will tell you that. Let me tell you both the scenarios . In the beginning, we have multiplied the quantity with the rate and the amount has come. Now what is the amount? We have given quantity, our quantity is x, for example rate is given to us, 10 is given to us, amount is given to us 100 and quantity is given to us, that is, it is not given yet, so what do we do to find out x. 100 / 10 because This is in multiplication, so what will it become in division, then we come to know that our answer is 10 because we cut it from this, so the value of Basically you will go to your place, if you want to calculate the quantity, then what was equal to the amount? You will take the cell with the amount, for divide you will use slash and after that you will enter the rate and after that you double tap, your answer has come correct, okay in this way you can get this c67, in up, this is d67, this is c70, then d70, this is c75, then d75, that means your correct. I hope you have understood all these things, we have done the arithmetic formulas here, we had to do these basic formulas at the initial level, now I will move ahead where I will tell you about the features, when it comes to statistics, Average Maximum Minimum Count Count, this is the thing, we do one feature, after that we will continue or we are going to explore another new feature. Which is a number group, then inside this we will number. Formatters are going to do format work with a very basic understanding. Let’s go through the theory. Okay, so I do one thing, I turn off the grade

lines. So, I turned off the grade lines. All the lines that you see, we call them grid lines. Now, what I am going to tell you is what formats are actually available to us, what do we write inside Excel, so what do we write if we look inside Excel. Normally, if we talk in normal language, if we talk in a normal scenario, then either we write numbers as you have seen, we are writing our cell, we are writing marks, if there is anything, we are writing numbers or what are we writing, we are writing text that means we have written the name of a party, we have written the name of a student, till now we had understood only these two things, now many things come inside these numbers like That number one is also 23 and number one is also 23 and number one is also 23 and if seen then number one is also on 23, okay so all these are numbers but in a different way this is a normal number, we can say that in accounting we take care of points points also, we take care of so many money too, so in that way it is written in decimal, we can say that currency is attached with it, this is for accounting. Inside we also put money, so here we have put currency, it is written in percentage, so in this way we have only numbers, but we can also show the numbers in different ways, so in the same way, we are going to read about many number formats here, now here comes another thing, whenever I explain anything to you, I also explain even formatting, so I have always said one thing that first you have to select something and then after the selection, you Do you apply anything beyond that? For example, I have given you WhatsApp2, so first we will select somewhere, after that we will apply this thing on that thing, so now let us see by formatting the number in actual, like first I will come to you here, after that we are also going to read the theory of number format here, okay, I did this by mistake in the third portion, no problem, in the third portion, we do it here and here we have drawn our grid lines. Suppose I write one of my numbers here : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9. So we have written a number. Now when you click on this number and go to the home tab and see here, journal is written. So the way we write the journal number, it has become your journal. If I change the format of this thing and put it in number format, then it has brought it in decimal. The thing which I explained to you here is that 23 can also be written like this and can also be written like this. It’s totally up to you as to how to show it. If you think that later on in my data, things can come in points, things can come in decimal and I want to show it in decimal, then you can go for this format. After that, if I take, let’s say, another number, let’s say I have taken the same number down here and if I want to put currency on it, then what can I do? I am doing this by clicking on this drop down and when I click on currency, then ready currency is also shown on it. Currency comes, if suppose you want to put something else on it, like ₹ 5 is 45, you want to put currency on it but want to put Indian Rupee, then you click here, you will get English India here, for now we do not have it here, it is added, we will learn this later, we have to change this thing from the setting of the computer, but for now, we have dollars, so we will click on dollar here and in this way we will add our currency, now suppose. In any other way, you write a number here, write 45 6 9, and you want that decimals should also be included in it. If all the things like currency come automatically, then you can directly choose accounting. Because accounting is like this, see, comma has also been placed here, along with it, other things have also come along with it. Okay, accounting has been written here too, this is also in the format of accounting, this is also in accounting, comma has been placed, decimal has also been placed along with it. At the same time, if you put dollars then this is the format of your accounting. See, there is no need to open it again and again, you can do it directly from here. Suppose I wrote a number here and you want to put comma in it directly, then you click on the comma, then it will come. If you click on currency, then it will come. So, it is totally up to you whether you want to do it directly in accounting or you can do it from here. Next comes suppose I am writing something here. 10 20 And right now I have to write 30 but if I have to write the percentage then I have to do it manually like this 40 but if I have to do it in this way then now you do not need to achieve so much, you select it, click on the percentage here, now whenever you write something in this area, the percentage will appear automatically so that is your a custom format like you would have seen at many places, for example, do you have a steel business and In that you have to write the quantity, you have to put ton behind each quantity, so what you did was to set the format in it in such a way that as soon as you write the numbers, turn will be written automatically. You do not need to write ton again and again. If you are writing turn again and again, then where is our work easy? It is hard, isn’t it? It is done in this way. Suppose now I write a value, this is the value I have written, then if I want this and that in that. To show it, I have zoomed it and dragged it like this, otherwise if I keep reducing it, it will show me less decimals. For now, I have shown all the decimals. If I want to increase or decrease my decimals, then I have both these options available. Either I can decrease or I can do more. As soon as you leave it, like this is three three, then it will remain three. As soon as you press it, it gets automatically rounded off. Okay, you can do this by clicking here. See 5 6 9 OK and I take this and I reduce it, then see it automatically reduced it to 65, which was 65, yours was 6596, so it automatically reduced it to 66, that is, it rounded off, so it automatically rounds off yours, so these were your number formats. If you click on the extension of number format, then you get a lot of options. I will make you explore more options. There is also a text inside it, if the value is Take any date you have written, like I have written this date and which is in slash, this short date is written, how 2 24 25 is written like this, then it is short date, you can do short date like this, if you want to do this same date in long format, go to this drop down, click on long format, this hashtag error comes when your width is less, then in this way your long date will come fine. And in that you get the percentage. If you want to do something in the fraction, you did it like this and by selecting here you did the fraction. Now you write here 2/3 and 2 s 3, that is, write 2.5 like this, then it will come by writing 2 1 a 1/2. If you write 5.3, then it will come by writing 5 2 and 7. So in this way you can also bring in your fraction whatever you want, any scientific number. I need it, if you write too many numbers then it gets converted into scientific number but it is a small number and you have to change it to scientific, then you can go and click on scientific from here, then it gets converted into scientific number, in this way you get the option of text in the last, if suppose you have written any number which is more than 15 digits, then I teach you a third step here which tells you that if any number is 15 Dialog if it is more than 15 digits The last digit will not come in the box, Excel will convert it to zero, so what can you do in such a case, when you have a scenario like this in which it says 15 digits and if yours is more than 15 digits, then it converts it to zero, so in such a situation, what will you do, you will convert your number into text, what will you do, you will convert its format into text, then with this it will take the number fine. Let’s remove the ink for once and go there and see this thing. Let’s go here and suppose I write a number. Just give me a minute. Here I wrote 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16. So see, it did it in this way in the end. If suppose I go to home and go here and convert it into text right now 11 11 Digits 15 Digits Yes, so now look, it has taken the text, now it is in the text format, it has taken it, above 15, it comes in scientific, above 11, you can convert it into text, in this way it will be converted into text, now no, what I have to explain, you have to explain less because of the custom format, this is the most important, the rest of the things can also be applied directly, so let’s go now. Let’s move towards our custom format. If we are going to do custom formatting, then in custom formatting, the things that I will teach you are according to the date format. What is the date format? First of all, let me tell you a little bit about how we are going to read about the date format. You have any date, let’s take any date like today is 2402 2025. Okay, this is the date and for now, for once, I will move the cell to the side. Okay, now what is the date consisted of, first of all you have day, what is today’s day, then after that comes month, generally what we write is month and after that comes year, what comes year, so now look at their initials, to write day, d is needed, to write month, m is needed and to write year, y is the same thing. If suppose, in what other way can you write them, I just want to explain that to you now. In what other way can you write these? Can you write in this way that NN is Sunday, February and 2025, so instead of writing 2025 like this, I can write 25, it is 25, can I write this date like this? Yes, and what kind of date is written on this date, will it be in short form, we can say that it is in short form, it is a short date or can I write like this, Sunday February 2025, so can I? I can call this date a long format date. Yes, of course I can call it a long format date. Okay, so now I have told you the result of how the general result is done, how your short date is written and how your long date is written, but now let’s convert it into the format. Whenever you are seeing this format, if you have to write this, then we define the day with D, then D will be written, then there is a slash, month. If we define Ko with M then it will be written as m and year we define it with Va and this year is written in full 20 25 So when we have to write anything in complete then we write four times so it will come like this Look, if you want to write any thing in short then write it twice then here DD because Sunday is in short MM because Fab is in short but 25 is also in short so YY Now look here Sunday is written in full so D D D D D February is completely written as M M M M and Yer is completely written as y Wa Wa Wa. So remember the basic. If you want it in short then you have to write it single time. If you want it in short and in text then you have to write it two times and in other wise it has to be written four times. This is a fact because you will check. You can check your month even in the month. You can write June, write April. Everything is in three letters. You can check your days whether it is Sunday, Monday or Tuesday. Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday, Sunday, check anything, all of them are of three letters only, so it is pre-defined that if you write two times, that means you want this type of answer, if you write four times, then you want this type of answer. Now let’s proof it a little and see, let’s say I write a date here, what is the control, I wrote this date with semi colon here. There is a slash, now I don’t want a slash, I want semicalculus, I will go to home, click on this extension, then click on custom and you can see here, why is there MGM, so the short is two. It means m is given a month ago just because m is here, if I had written d here first and then did DM and then OK, then look this date has changed, 24th February, now it has come like this, I have understood what is the meaning of this format, I have gone to custom, now d is also written single time, m is also written single time, hence single single date has come and y is 2025, that means complete, so it is written like this, neither is it four times, if I If you would have made it two times and I would have given it OK, then look, it is written as 20, 25, it is okay, it will always be written as two times or four times, it cannot be written as single time, OK, if now I have to write the same date in dash, then how will it be? I clicked on this, clicked on extension here, went to custom and as soon as there is a dash here, there is a slash, here we will put a hyphen, say hyphen, say dash, put a hyphen, then we will do OK. It will be converted into hyphen. It’s all up to us as to how we want this thing. It is very important to know the formatting. If these date formats are not available, then you will not be able to know many other formulas too. So, it is very important to have these formulas. Let’s take one more date. Let’s take one more date. Let ‘s say I want a little more of this in the anchor version. So I clicked here, went to custom and here now we will write as per our wish DD D AM D. Wawa y wa four times it was written that 2025 is written in full, so look, in this way your complete date has come. Whereas if suppose we want it in the langar version, then we clicked on it. Come here, we will go to the customs. After going to the customs, D D D D D M is kept small. Let’s keep M M W A Y Y Y OK. So see, Monday has come in full writing, just because I had kept the month short, I had kept it in MA only. Two came and 20 25 I had kept complete, so it came complete, let’s take another date, you will understand that this date was taken, after that went to extension, after going to extension, went to custom and here we write D D D D D M M M M WA Y Y Y and we did OK, so look, it has come to us with complete date written, so this is your custom format of one date, I have explained to you very well which In many ways, you can format your dates yourself. Whenever you make a sheet, you need dates in many ways. So now you do not have to worry about making dates. You can make dates as per your wish. We do this in our life just because they are not used that much right now. This marathon is based on usage, the number of things you use are taught in great detail, here is a For the bar, you can go through the theory that let’s say T is the rate, what does it do for you? It is a place holder. You wrote some text, you wrote it forever and after that you put T the rate, then if you write any text later, this thing will keep coming in front of it. Now what is this ma’am, let’s try it, let’s say okay, we take it here. Let’s say I took this space and I went to the custom, after going to the custom, I took it here and first of all I took the T in the journal. We put the rate, then we opened the double inverted comma, gave a space, wrote tons and then closed it in the double inverted comma and we wrote OK. Now I write 20 here, 30 here, 40 here, 50 here, then the automatic has come with turns in front of it. Why, because what is T the rate tells you that where you are writing T the rate, you can write anything as per your wish. You can, but you have fixed what has to be written behind it. What have you fixed that you told him because I always tell you that whenever we talk about any text, the text is always written inside double inverted commas, so you gave space first, that is why there is space in it too. If suppose you do not give space here, you deleted the space here and you did OK, then see, the space will be gone from here also and see, I had not selected the one here, so in this. If there is space then we can do our format in this way. Now if you want then just ignore the error and your data will come like normal data. There is no problem then in this way you can find your sum. Okay, after that if you want, you can read the star from here that it pats the character, other things are not so important, the date one is the most important, so we covered it in detail, so here we have explained our number format. complete it Now let’s move towards our conditional formatting. They will do conditional formatting. Now what is conditional formatting? Let’s take a small third portion for once and understand what is the meaning of conditional formatting. As is its name, so is its work. What is the name of conditional formatting? Whenever we talked about formatting, when we did the initial formatting, what all did we talk about whether we We talked about the alignment, then we talked about the font, then the font color, the font became the color, after that we saw the fill option, then we saw any kind of color, border, we had done these types of things in the formatting, so now we have to format our data, so it was understood that we are going to decorate it in this way, but there is a condition in decorating too, we will give it a condition that if anything like this happens then this Do it otherwise don’t do it. For example, you made a list of students in which there were marks of the students. Now inside that marks you wrote that if any student has got more than 33 marks, if he has got more than 33 marks, then you make him in red color, otherwise you make him in green color or put the opposite, then wherever there is red, you will understand how many marks he has and wherever there is green, you will understand how many marks he has, so basically. You gave him a condition, let’s take another example, suppose there is a report of sales and you are writing that whoever has sales more than ₹ 10 lakh, we have sold to whomever has entry above ₹ 10 lakh, make it in green color, then wherever the amount is more than ₹ 10 lakh in the entire sheet, there will be green color automatically and by doing this, you will directly know to which party you have sold more than ₹ 10 lakh. This is the condition for matting that there will be a color, there will be a border, whatever you want to do, everything will happen but with one condition. If we talk about the condition, here it was at 33. If we talk about the condition here, it was 10 lakhs or should be above 10 lakhs. So that is your conditional formatting. Now let’s explore their options. Conditional formatting is available to you inside the home tab. You will go to the home tab called conditional. You will get the option of formatting here. Now it comes to the matter, as I always say, if you want to apply anything, first its selection is very important, so here is the selection I am taking. First of all, I want to know the maximum rate to whom I have sold. If I want to know the maximum rate to whom I have sold, then I select this data. I go to conditional formatting. I have clicked here, I have not clicked, I am just coming, so the option has opened automatically, after this you will go to Greater Dan and write here, I want to know, all those above 650 or 700, color them or those above 750, you color them, I have to do it in red color, different colors are available here, I have to do it in red, I want to do it in yellow, I have to do it in green, let’s say I want to do it in green and I did OK. So, whoever was above 700, you will be able to see the color here, whether the color has come automatically here, what we have applied on one data, can we apply something again on that data, the answer is yes, just do not over rule, if you over rule, then the next one which you apply now will take it and will make the first one null and void, so basically now suppose you want to do the same in this only by going to the highlight cell role. Less than means now you have to know more, now you have to know less than 600, if you want then color it red, you did ok, then you realized that Less than 600 have come to you in red color and More than 750 have come to you in green color, so now you will understand just by looking at which color defines what, okay, after that let us assume that we want to see in quantity, we have selected a range. We will go to the condition formatting and we said between, we want to check the quantity between 300 and 400, I want to check who I have sold between 400 and 500, let me know that and all that mine comes in yellow color, then I did ok and it told me, to whom I have sold the quantity between 300 to 400, then I came to know, now I am also able to know from here that the load should be seen twice, urban. I have sold these in medium quantity to Binds and Ekta Creation but at low prices and here I have sold both of them at high prices, so in this way you can get a lot for yourself by applying different colors. You can take all the decisions, you can check the decisions of many, you can check all the things, now this was that normally you have got greater than, less than, you have got between, like we do in our maths too, now comes the next option, what do you get, equals to, suppose you know the exact amount and that exact amount, you want to capture where that exact amount is. It is written for example, I have selected everything and I want to capture the exact amount 376. Where is it written, so I selected it, went to Highlight Cell, went to Equals 2 where I have to go, where 376 is written and after that I want to give a different color of my own which is already pre-defined, if she does not want to give it, then come here to Custom Format, see, the same dialog box opens inside Custom Format, First of all, by opening the extension of Alignment font, it opens and the same key appears, so with more options, you will not feel that oh my God, I don’t know this option, you know, okay, we give purple color here, go to the font, we make the font white, bold and bold, do OK and then OK, then it told me that in the entire data, the amount of data I had selected, if seen inside it, there are 376 here. If it is written, then in this way we can check where something is written, if you know the exact amount, whereas till now all the things we were doing were related to the number, now whatever comes, comes related to your text, like your next comes the text that content, suppose look at the text, if you want to check the text, then there should be data of the text only. I checked this, now I just did not remember much or the name of the party, I just remembered that. Behind that party, it comes with no solutions, so I clicked on the solutions here and said, brother, color the solution written there, so that I can see it and then I will know it, fine, I had talked about it, so now I did OK, then it told me OK, these two entries come to me in the name of solutions, okay, so if you have a chunk of some text and remember the same and you want to find the complete text from it. You can also do this by highlighting the text with that content. Next comes the date ring. Suppose you have selected the date just because. If you want to do the formatting of a number then the number should be selected. If your selection is correct then you will get the answer also correct. If you select the number then you will get the number. If you get the selection of text then you will have to apply conditional formatting related to the text. Now Next. The option which is going to be related to our date, so we have chosen the date, you go to the condition formatting, go to the highlight cell rule and after that you go to the date array, after going to the date array, you get the options here that you say yesterday just because today is 24th of February, so here is yesterday, if I do it today, then today is coming, tomorrow is coming. I have to highlight yesterday, I have to do it with green, so I made it green and I did OK, so you can see this here, you can also check the date, our date today is 24 Feb 2025, so the date we see here which has been highlighted is 2025, sorry, 25 Feb 2025. Okay, if you want, you can highlight yesterday also in the same way and inside this you will get more information. You get a lot of options, which is like last week and this week, next week, last month, this month, next month, you get a lot of options, you can explore it here, the main thing is that you should know what are you going to do in conditional formatting, what is our use case, what do we want to know, whatever you want to know, you can explore it here and different different. You can see by applying options in it, here then you are left with the duplicate values, that is, if there are duplicate values anywhere in the entire data, then remove them, but before doing this, look, we have made it so colorful, so first of all, find out that if I want to remove all this, then how can I do it? So, when you go to the very bottom in Kandi formatting, you get clear rules, then here you get two options, one is clear rule. From the selected cells that I select a cell and remove the condition formatting from it or I call it clear rule from the end there might be chances right now it is very small data It has been taken that there is huge data, there is a lot of condition formatting, you are not even able to understand where it is included and where it is not included, then what will you do in such a case. In such a case, you will clear the roles from the entire sheet, but before clearing it, I will teach you the management once, after that, clear because I have just cleared it, then how will you learn the management? So let’s see the management now, maybe you have some I did the conditional formatting and later suddenly it came to my mind that this purple looks a bit strange, it has become too dark, all the other light colors are there, so we have to change this color, so what you have to do is go to the conditional formatting, you will come down here, in Manage Rules, after coming to Manage Rules, you are not able to see anything because you have not made any selection, you have directly reached the conditional formatting that I So if you want to change then look above, you are seeing the show formatting rules for whom, then you show this worksheet from here, then all the conditional formatting done on this worksheet will be shown to you here. Okay, you have to change this one, you select it and look above here, there are options like this: New Rule, Edit Rule, Delete Rule. What you have to do is you have to edit, you go to edit and after that you Obviously you want to change the formatting, then you go to the format, from here you choose any other color, I take blue from here, okay and we have done okay, now we can apply it, you can also do okay, so look at this, it has been applied in this way, I like it much better than before, so in this way you can make changes. Now suppose I select this cell and after that go to condition formatting and clear rules. If I go to the selected cells and from here, I go from here only , I go from here but I don’t go anywhere there and I go to Clear Rules and want to remove it from the entire sheet, then your conditional formatting will be removed from the entire sheet. Now let’s do what we wanted to explore. Next, let’s explore the one with duplicate values. Suppose I want to know whether there are any duplicate values in the entire data. Not checking in dates, so I selected this and it is talking about values, so text will not work, so we took this, let’s consider text also, so we took this, after that we went here, came to duplicate values and whether to take duplicate or take unique, it is totally up to you that you have to color the unique or whatever is not repeating, so obviously it is the complete data which is not repeating. If you want to duplicate it, then how to color it, you can do it here. Now suppose I make it 521 here too, then it will also be colored. Now suppose I make it 314, then it will also be colored because it is a duplicate. Suppose I make it a color, then it will also be colored. It also works on text, so because it is a duplicate, okay, so in this way all your things work if there are duplicates everywhere. If you want to check, then you can check in this way. Okay, next you get this. What does Top Bottom Rules do? First of all, we have to select the item in which we want to check. Suppose I have selected this and after that I want to know what are my top 10 items. Only two items are 13, so knowing the top 10 is a bit weird, but you see, top 10. If you want to know less, you have to know the top five. So you can also do the top five and from here you can color them, I gave yellow and gave OK, then it measured all of them and colored the top five out of them. Similarly, if you want to know the bottom 10 also, then you select it. Go to the conditional formatting and take the bottom 10 items from here and if let’s say you want to get the red color in it, then you did OK, then the remaining ones are in the bottom 10. Oops, we have 10 should not have been taken because in bottom 10, obviously it will take the rest of the data also, we come to the bottom 3. Okay and did OK, then it told me that your data comes from bottom 3. Now it was normal and directly wrote to you that bottom 10 is needed, bottom 3 is needed, top 2 is needed, top 3 is needed, top 5 is needed and color has come. Now more options come in it, on top 10, on top 5, on bottom 10. But what is it at the bottom 5? Basically if you suppose the whole is summed up and how much comes out at 10, off the total output at 10 will tell you. If you have conditioner formatting then go to the top bottom rules and if you want to color the top 10 para in red color then it will appear on your top 10, there can be more than two values at the bottom, there may be more than one value, your top 10 para is falling on it, there might be chances that it is falling on it too much. Well, you can also change the percentages from here. If you want, then you can make the bottom at 20. But you have to know about 20 and you have to fill green color in it. Look, in this way you can fill more than one value can fall, even one value can fall, so in this way you will get the values, so this is what you have learned now, learned the highlight cell rule, learned the top bottom rule, after that you are going to learn the data base color scales and icon set which is very simple but for that, first I clear this data, so I have just selected. And now I can also do selected cells. Now suppose you want here that the one which has higher rate means the color should be filled inside our cell in such a way that the higher date can be understood. If the one with higher rate can be understood, then you will go to the data bars. Here you get two options. The first one is gradient and the other one is solid. What is gradient? It is the one which keeps the shadow like shadow. Look, whatever color you are doing. If yes, then see the shadow is coming in the last, it is becoming a little light in the last and what is the gradient? What is the gradient? What is solid, sorry, solid is not a solid color, it will look exactly like this, okay, if you want, the gradient is solid, you get the same result, you can click on it, which is more, then that cell will be filled. Now what is it, I can tell by looking at this cell completely, 932 is the highest because the whole cell is After that I can tell that this is 9907 which is the second highest because it is just a little bit left after that, it seems to be 855 or you can say it is 876 or you can say this. In this way you can judge by looking at these colors which one is more and which one is less. It is totally up to you whether you want to show it or not, whether you want to show it with gradient color or with solid color. It is totally up to you. To you, you can show as you want, okay , let’s go next, let’s say I want to show something in quantity, then what do the color sets also do? What is there now? In the data bars, there was only one and it was showing you in the form of bars. What is there in this? Shade shading is like, you will get different shades like middle, so it means the one which is least is dark, then it will be less than that, then in this way you will get less than that. It will be visible in the form also and just like this shading is happening, you can also put the icon in the same way. If you want to put any icon, it works exactly the same way, the lowest number is red, the normal number is yellow and the best number is green, like our traffic light thing, so look, if you put this icon, it came in the icon in this manner, then it was 932 highest, so see green is visible, after that 856 green is visible. After that 855 green is visible, okay, so in this way you get these highlighted and this was your conditional formatting. In conditional formatting, let me tell you one more thing, these are the clear rules, we talked about manage rules, let’s talk about the new rule. Inside the new rule, you get to explore all the same options which you have explored on the outside. If you want to read it in detail like Format All Cells. Based on the values, we just did the format cells that cells that content, so we did the values that contain , format only top and bottom ranked values, we did the top 10, take a look, it is also written in this, you can turn on top 10 or percentage or format and only values that are above and below average, so above and below average, you get it here, let me show it to you. Click below you get to know the average 2499 28 And if you want to color then you can go to this and you can color the above average in one color, if you want to color the above average in red color, if you want to color the below average also, then from here you can give a yellow color to the below average and in this way you can color the below average also, you can get this directly here too, it is ok format only. Unique and Duplicate Values We have tried this now, this is one option which you do not get directly, whenever you want to explore, you will have to come here, that is Use a Formula to Determine Which Cells to Format, meaning formatting has to be done here using a formula. Now till you have Unless you learn the formula, you cannot do it here and even after learning the formula, you do not have to do anything here, just like you write a formula somewhere outside, you just have to come here and write it and after that, if you are satisfied with the formula, then you can get that color done here. We can look into it further, but here we have covered all the other things which were there in the conditional formatting and that too very good. If you have any doubt anywhere, please let me know in the comment section, I will definitely help you and I am constantly saying that you go while writing your doubts and if you feel that I want to learn better in this thing and want to do it, then you can definitely come to the live course also, all the things will be found in the description and what happens is that in live, you can discuss with me which is the best. The most main benefit is and the other thing, now you will get this sheet also, so daily when you get the sheet, do you practice something daily, either you do it in one sitting, then there are more chances of forgetting it, or slowly and gradually, if you start absorbing it in your habit, then we start getting comfortable, so that is the main purpose of life that there are many people who have already excelled and are still doing it. There is only one major area, no, it is that normally, what do you do, what do you learn and then the end of that, yes, we have learned this, the certificate has come and when you do it live, you practice it, now somewhere when you listen to something daily, you understand more, so that’s all, so here we have completed the condition formatting, now we move ahead, see inside the home tab, we People have done the number condition formatting. Now we complete the table cells style and the rest of the things. The remaining chunks are completed and after that we will move towards our remaining basic formulas. Data entry and the other thing is table creation. In normal data entry, you do not have to do things manually, whereas in table creation, you do not have to do things manually and it keeps running automatically. Your data is basically a dynamic one. This is done in the form which is updated automatically, that is why table creation is a better option. In comparison to the data entry and when it comes to the formula, neither is the formula. The bigger the formula, then obviously ranges are given in it. Initially, when I had explained the formula of sum to you, I had explained that brother, we will give the range, then your formula is applied on the same range, so what is a range here? Suppose you have given a range somewhere from a1 to a1, but later you have written the data in a101 and now your data is written in a200, then later when you have written normal data, what will you have to do? You will have to update your formula there. You will have to give the range from a1 to a200 because now your range has increased, now you have entered more data in it because of daily new. The data is being entered but when it comes to the table, initially when you give a range in it, it does not take even a 200 or 100 and will write it like this. The table will write the range in such a way that later whether you enter 200 or even 2000, it will automatically give their sum, it will automatically update your answers, so this is the biggest and most effective use of our table. Mainly, this is very useful in the formula. Now if we have to talk so much then it is important to see how the table will be made. So look, first of all we have to make the table. Let me tell you one thing, whatever heading is there on the table, we call it a header. What do you call header? You select your data. Oops, I am so sorry. You took this, you select your data. Now you have two options, either you go to the Insert tab and here you select the table. There is an option, click on it or what you can do is you can press control t. Table starts with t tab. So if you press t with control, then you will have this type of OK, my keys are not working. It’s okay. If you go here and click on the table, then you will have an option like this. Now what is it saying, My table has headers. If you turn it off then it thinks that the data that you have It is given in the first row in the first column that dates are written party name quantity rate amount is this also your data is it your data no which is at the top It is written that it is a header, it is possible that sometimes you have data in such a way that there is no heading above it, then you should not turn it on. Now it is necessary to turn it on. My table has headers and if you do OK then now your table has been converted into a table with a header. Always remember one thing in Excel. When we insert something separately in Excel, then if we have to make any changes in that inserted thing, then a separate tab is automatically created. Otherwise, you have as many tabs as you have , but it comes as a separate tab. Now like I have inserted this table, in a way, I have converted my data into it, in a way, I have inserted the table, so whenever I click here, I get the above format of a table design. Look, click somewhere outside, it will go, click on this, it will come, isn’t it coming because it thinks that I have inserted a table, now whatever. If you have inserted, then whatever changes we want to make in it, we will do it through a new tab. First of all, whatever work you should do, what work should you do? Even if you are doing any work in your real life, you are creating a lot of tables inside it, if you are doing a lot of work, then I would call it mandatory, so that you can make the work easier and make it better. What should you do for that? After creating the table, you should name the table here on the very left side of the table design. And here you don’t have to give space. If you give space then the name will not be taken. Okay, so don’t give it space. Name it anything. I have given the name of Sales to Sales, so what will happen in the future, whenever you have many tables, suppose you have a lot of tables, some are Purchase tables, some are Sales tables, some are tables of employees’ details, there are many tables and you have to go somewhere and apply a collective formula. If you have formulas somewhere, then this is yours. There is no table one, table two, table three, what did I just explain to you? Look, normally, what happens is that a1a 200 is done in this way, but in the table, he takes the range of the table and writes the table range, so now table one range would be written there, then you will go around wondering what is this table one, now go and check whose table one was, table two whose it was, table three, so if you name it that is the sales table or the purchases table, then now. Even when you apply the formula, it will come by writing ‘Sale’ or ‘Purchase’, it will not come by writing ‘Table 1, Table 2’. Table 1, Table 2 was coming only when you had given that name to it. Along with this, you can see above that these filters come. We will learn later how to use the filters. This comes by default in it. You can go to the table design and change any color from here. If you want any color and type of table, then you can convert it into that. It is totally up to you that how do you want your table, I want it in this way, I want it in this way, I can keep it like that and inside the table design, what are the options you get? Header, we want total, we want total in this row, below is the total. If you don’t want, then you can turn it off and in this way you get other things. If you want to remove duplicates from it, then you can remove them directly. Have you removed the duplicates? Yes, check among these. Is and after that you can check in it, if nothing happens then it will not be deleted. Now we have learned about the normal things about the table. Now it is very important to understand the difference between main data and table. It is okay to have made the table but it is also very important to know what is the difference. So, let’s do one thing, take one data and after that we will know easily. So, I copy only this from here and enter control alt vv. Now why did I do this, I will tell you this slowly later on. I will explain it to you there, you will get better clarity. Now if I sit to explain, you will not be able to understand and I will not be able to explain because you have not got that understanding yet. Let me format this data for once. As you can see, these are numbers whereas they should come in dates. So what will I do? Now, I had explained to you the number format, I will go to the number format and convert it into short dates. If I want to select this data, then control a. I can select this data with Alt AB A, I put borders inside it, with Alt ABT I put borders outside it, and just because for now, I have converted it to normal values, so this is not our formula, so we will apply a formula, quickly equals to this multiply by this enter, so like this Now double tap on it, you will have these formulas. Now we will start understanding the difference. How can the difference be understood? Suppose, now I have to make a new entry here. Let’s enter from today’s date. So I entered today’s date. Here I name anything. Stella Stella Rojo. I named something like this and look here, automatic zero has come, that means it has automatically updated your formula here, do not wait. Here it is 2000, here I have given 100, so see, it has updated automatically, so does it do the same thing here, it will do the same here too, but why does it do it, I will definitely tell you the difference, here I write Stella Roger and then here also I write 2000 ok here also I write 100 and here also we are getting the answer, so ma’am you were saying that all the things in the table get updated automatically. But it is not happening here, it is happening here, look why this is happening now, let me tell you the reason. Now as you can see, here it has automatically applied the thick border that I had applied here, it has taken it automatically in the correct manner, so you can see that here it is not in the correct manner, one thing, so you see this, the second thing, I had shown you here already zero, it has automatically updated your formula, that is not the thing here. I was waiting to see if any value came. Is this happening? Why is this happening? Due to a setting in your Ekal, there is a setting inside Ekal that if you make three-four entries in the same pattern and after that you keep writing something, then it automatically considers it as a pattern and starts answering. Now where is that setting, like you will go to the file, you will go to Options and from here you will go to Advanced, then you are seeing that you are allowed editing directly in the cells. Extend data range from the formats and formula, you do one thing, turn it all off for once, turn it off, after that you do OK, now I will make an entry here and after that you will see, now we are going to make an entry again with today’s date and now I would have written here robot robot robot chucks, after doing this I have written anything, I have seen random 500, this zero comes already, this is a great thing. Okay, so I have come to this, now I do the same thing with robot text and now look, it did not even take this, it did not even correct the alignment, earlier it was correcting the alignment, 500 150, and no answer, why because you have turned off a setting of your Excel, then there is a setting due to which your data keeps getting auto updated, otherwise it does not get auto updated in the normal data, now suppose I turn it on and go to the options. After going to the options, I go to the advanced and turn them on. We turned on all the settings that were there and from here also turn on the automatic search. Now when you do it, it will take it automatically, then we delete it, do it again. Here we will take robotics. There may be chances that he may or may not take it because we have already entered once, now he has taken it because now he has followed the pattern and we have turned on that setting. That the pattern which is written above should be extended below also and take it in that way. Okay, so this is what we have, how to make entries inside our data, what difference do we see in the table . Now one more main chunk, I am going to tell you about the table creation, I am going to tell you one advantage, which is the slicer. Let us now look at the slicers of the table. See, we get the slicer inside the table. Now what is the function of this slicer? It allows us to easily access our data. For example, suppose one, these are filters so that if I want to see anything, just want to see something of Aqua Pure Solution, then it has shown me the data, so in this way we can see from the filter, but how big is the process of filter, you will go to this filter, select it, after that, you will check, it seems quite time consuming, it seems to be a big process, so what can you do in such a case, you can insert a slicer, now you can insert something. If you want to do this and that too is related to the table, then you will have to go inside the table, then click somewhere on the table and go to table design and here you will see the option of insert slicer. It is asking you whose slicer you want to insert, meaning for which thing do you want a date slicer, whether you want to filter your data according to the date, whether you want to filter it according to your party names or according to the quantity, rate and amount. So I take the party names, I do OK, now I adjust it here, anywhere else, for once, I adjust it here, clicked on Aqua Pure, Bharat Craft has come, Ekta Kapoor, Sorry, Ekta Creations, what has come on Green Leaf, Organics, what has come on Innovative Solutions, if you want to do multiple things, then if you want one, then turn off the filter, this crossing means filter. Only off, if you want multiple, then you turn it on, it is on, Aqua Pure Ekta Heritage Mastek, now everything is selected, no, remove it, I want these, so this has given me the answer to these, in this way you can do this, you have also inserted this slicer, if you click on it, there is a separate tap for the slicer also, see, I always say that if you insert anything in Excel, then there is nothing in that inserted thing. If you want to make changes, then you get a separate tab for that and you should make changes within the same. Changes can be made from within the same. If you want, you can also keep your slicer related to this, so that is a beautiful one, it will show you that, you cross it, the complete data will come, you can also adjust it, you can make it smaller or bigger in this way, now I delete it, you can show the slicer in this way or else I can control it here. I do plus plus so that we have a little space and I select it and do Alt AE A so that it gets deleted and I place my slicer here. In this way, the slicer is automatically placed. I can make the color a little better, so I take green. It looks a little better on the screen. So, in this way, we create our data. In this way, your table creation is done in this way, all the things are done. I hope you understood it completely. If there is any doubt anywhere then please let me know in the comment section. Let’s move ahead a little. The other thing is cell style. What does cell style do to you ? Like suppose you have taken this data, you have taken this data and copied it. I just create another sheet, rename it with cell style, do end ok and here I enter control alt vv so that my data comes in. Okay, exactly the same way as I had fixed its formatting earlier . Similarly, if its formatting needs to be corrected, then I will quickly correct its formatting. When you do this work again and again and you see it being done again and again, give it all. I also had the option that I can prepare everything in advance, but this thing is known to you, what happens, we will not show you the process right now and will tell you all the things directly, then how will you be able to relate because in your life, you will also have to correct similar things, so that is why we do it in this way. So see what the cell style does to you or does it help you directly ? Now I do one thing to do any kind of formatting. Now I do one thing to make it normal. Now what I do is select the entire data, take control A and after that I go to the cell style and select anything. Here, I can directly do the formatting of the table in the way I want, it will give it to me directly, after that if I want to make any changes then you can do like That now it seems a little light to me, so I made it dark, I want to make it black, I want to make all this black, so it has come in black, I like it better, now I want to give it any color, so I can color it, so in this way you can change it later, it seemed beautiful to me, so I made it in this way, so this was your cell style. Colors are pre-defined inside the cell style. If you want, you can change the themes of these colors as well. Right now you are seeing one set of colors here. If you want that this set of colors should not be visible , if you want to see some other set of colors, then you will go to the page layout. Here you will go to the theme. Inside the theme, here inside the colors, you get many different types of palettes. Suppose you have taken this palette, now you will see in the cell style according to that palette, then the color has changed here. Now you are seeing the colors. Look in this way, I have seen this cell. Selected and went to sell style and I took this color, it looks so beautiful. One of my favorite color. Okay, so this looks so perfect. If you wanted any other palette, then you can take another palette in the same color from here. See, whenever you change the palette anywhere, overall because you have done this work using a single palette, then overall the entire theme of the system gets changed. Now you will go to the home and look here, you will see that the theme of colors has changed, there will be some other colors first, you are not able to understand. Once you remember these colors well, what kind of colors are there, okay now I go to the page layout, go to colors and here. So now you go to your home and see the colors here, the theme of the colors has changed, earlier it was in a slightly reddish reddish color, now look, it has come in this way, so with this, the colors can be changed not only in the cell style, but also in the cell style, which seemed to me one of the beautiful, one of my favorite seemed to be not here because I changed the theme from there, so it does not change only here, it also changes there in our home font. If it is changed then it is a cell style so that you can do any formatting directly, you do not have to do much hard work, this was one thing, the second thing is that I would like to tell you about a shortcut, let’s say do Control C and enter Control Alt v v here, now you just change its format and nothing else to do, you did the short date, did Control A, did Alt and C A, did your data, now suppose you want to do any formatting directly, you should do it in this. If you don’t want to do any hard work, then what you have to do is, you have to select this data, after selecting the data, you have to press Alt O A, then after this a window like this will open in front of you. What can you do from this window, whichever way you want to format, you can do a lot of formatting inside it. Suppose I like it, I have given OK, then this formatting has been automatically converted into it. If you want to do any formatting directly then this is the direct formatting. You can also do this in this way, what have I pressed, I write the shortcut key here, which is Alt OA, okay, your shortcut key, I have written here Alt OA, so in this way we work in our A cell style, now let’s move ahead, so look, till now we have completed our cell style, after that if you see any feature, then those features are visible here for insert, so we have already made you know where you know how to insert the cell. How you have to insert a row, how you have to insert a column, we have learned its shortcut keys, after that comes the delete key, we have also learned how to delete something, after that comes the format. Inside the format, we have learned the row height, the column height, it has to be auto-fit, all this, now comes the turn of hide and unhide, if suppose you want to hide something, suppose till now. You have done this work and now you have to hide this cell, if you want to hide this column, then you can hide it from here also by right clicking or you have this option inside the format also, so why do you have to go so far, you have to right click from here and then click on the hide option . Here something is hidden, if you right click and unhide it, it will be unhided, so in this way we hide or unhide something, in the same way, if we want, we can hide or unhide any sheet too, like I have hidden it and if suppose later I want to unhide it, then I will click here only and unhide it here and it will tell me that I need to unhide this file. If there is more than one file, then you will see it here. If you do OK, then your file will come back here, that is, your sheet will come back. So in this way, if we want, we can hide or unhide our daily columns or our sheet. You get this option here also, but there is no need to go there and do such a long process. You can get this option by directly right clicking. This option is there in almost all the formats. If you get it by right clicking, then I like the right click option better like now you have the next option, take rename, take tab color, take protect sheet or take mover copy, take hide and unhide, then here you can check hide and unhide rename sheet. Move Copy Sheet Tab Color Protect Sheet Lock Cell So almost all the options we get by right clicking, you get the same options here too. Now let us move a little further in this Rename Sheet You know this thing how it is done, you click on any cell, any sheet and rename it here and you can rename it, okay, we have given that cell, after that suppose you want to color, then you right click and tab. Press on the color and you can do whatever color you want. I had made it purple, so we will keep it purple. When you are on that sheet, then that gradient fill will be visible on the sheet. As soon as you come out of that sheet, if you are on any other sheet, then you will see that solid color. Okay, after that, the most important thing is that there are two things here, the first one is mover copy sheet and the other one is protect sheet, so I am giving you both of these. Here, I am going to teach you, first of all, what we will learn is mover copy sheet. Suppose now you need another sheet which is exactly the same as whatever work has been done on this sheet . In this workbook, I am explaining to you by taking three scenarios. For now, I want a copy but in this workbook. Now either, what is the first method I have that I select the entire data and do control C and then create another sheet and do control V in it, then it is a time consuming process. How can we do this work directly? What do you do to make it exactly the same? You are on this sheet of yours, after that go to the format, click on move and copy sheet here, understand a little what it is asking you, first of all, the names of all your sheets are coming here like number format is theory, number format is theory, so in all the sheets, whatever number of sheets you have, that is, whatever number of sheets are created in the workbook, that name is coming here, The Other. The thing is that what do you need, whom do you want to copy, now suppose I have to get the cell style done, so I clicked on the cell style, OK fine, after that what do you have to do, create a copy or not, yes, you will have to create a copy, okay, I did it, the cell style has come here, look, the cell style is the same, you will not even be able to tell the difference, it will come in the name of Tatu, but you say no, we don’t want, we need it in some other file. Meaning, this file should remain here and should also be moved to another file. Okay fine, if we do this then what will we do, we will send it to cell style two, we will do the work, then we will go to format, move and go to copy, select cell style two. Now we are saying that the copy of the sheet that we will send there should also remain here, meaning that sheet should remain here and in the one in which we will send it to the new one, so here we will turn on create copy, now you have to send it somewhere else, that’s it, right? If you want to send it somewhere else then now you will have to choose another file, first you have to select the place where your file is, then as soon as you click on the place where you want to send it, you will see all the files which are open in your Excel, you have to keep them open in whichever workbook you want to send it or the other way is that if you want to create a new workbook, then New Book is also written here, so suppose I want to send it in Book One and OK. So here I had another Book One open and Cell Style Two has arrived here in exactly the same way. Okay, in exactly the same way your Cell Two has arrived here. Okay, suppose we come to this only and Cell Style Two. Now we will send it again but will send it in a new book and now we want it to go from here, it should go from here, it should not be here because what will we do with two sheets of paper here, then we will go to Cell Style. Now we will not click on create a copy because in such a situation it copies it. Now we will directly click on the new book that we want in the new book and do OK. So see, a new book has been created. Look, now you will say that it is not the same as Book One. Look somewhere in Book One, there are Sheet One, Sheet Two and other things. This is a sheet in itself and another sheet has been created with the name of Book Two and has come to you, so in this way you can get it very easy in Excel. You can move your data here and there, you do not have to select the entire data again and again by using Control C Control v. For example, suppose you are seeing the data till here, now here below, there is some data written at the very bottom, it will not be copied but it will remain because you have not seen that data, so when we copy and paste manually. So there might be chances that we make a mistake or leave some data but in this way your sheet is exactly moved there and also copied, whatever you want to do is done directly, so this was the way we have to move and copy, now it comes to you that you want to protect your sheet, meaning if suppose you have done some work, now you have to go for a break or an important call has come and now you Do you want to say, hey, I will go, if someone does something in this time, my work will get ruined, so we have to protect our work, we basically want to protect our work, we want to keep some kind of protection in it inside our system, then what can you do, you will go to format control, that is, you will go to format A, from here, click on protect sheet, make sure that these three arrows are selected, basically let them be locked and unlocked. The type of cells can be either locked cell or unlocked cell. Now if you select both then it means that all the cells will be locked. Okay and after that you can give any password here. For now I am giving 1 2 3 password and it will ask us to reenter 1 2 3. We gave it and we will do OK, so in this way now this password has been protected. Now how will you know whether the password is protected anywhere, you can do anything. If you try to write, it will not let you write. The cell and chart you are trying to change is on a protected sheet. To make a change, unprotect the sheet, you might be requested to enter a password. OK, so what will you do? You can do it from here again, you can do it on the sheet as well, it is the same thing, you will go to the unprotected sheet and enter your password here. 1 2 3 And OK, if you do it, look here, now you can enter your password. If you want to write anything, you are able to write, it is allowing you to enter. Okay, if you want to do this temporarily or not, I have to do this thing, put the password again and we are going out, you can go for a break, no one can write anything, we are trying to write something, it is not allowing us to write. Okay, so in this way you can protect your sheet. This option is also available here in the format. Look at the home tab, which is a summary. Most of the features are inside the Home tab of the entire Excel and there are some features in the Home tab which are for the overview, you will get those features later too, like here I unprotect it for once, like you saw the Protect here in the Review tab, when you go inside the Review tab, you get the option of Protect Sheet and Protect Workbook here, but if you do not remember there, then you will get it here under the Format too, if it is not there then also. If you right click, here also you get the option of Protect Sheet. Basically, you are protecting the particular sheet. Okay, so in this way you can put the password here. Now we have completed this which is our format, after that what comes to you is Autos. You have already done the rest of the things. These are the functions, we will do them only when we do the statistics, after that I want to teach you this series. So, we will start very basic. If we start from basic, then first of all I will give it a name. Okay, here we have

different different things. For once, I will also give it some color. Now, when we are giving color to all the things, then it is not this, which color should we give? Give us blue, what about blue, okay, see what it does basically. The first thing I will tell you is that you have to fill any thing, see what is this option, this is the option that you will get. It is visible that this is the option of fill, and what is the spelling of fill, it is FI, so remember that what is this option, it is the option of fill, what will be the spelling inside it, it will be FI, so now if you have to do anything inside the option of fill, then see how its shortcut key will be made. Let’s draw once for the shortcut key and just give me a minute, we will adjust it and We have come to the draw page and see what our activation is, what does it mean from alt to home page, where do we go from alt to home page, what is the spelling of fill better than H, F I, so remember now, whatever work we will do in this entire sheet, it will remain as Alt H F I, next to this, that thing will keep changing, after this, whatever you have to fill, the name will keep coming according to that. Everyone must have understood very well that what is Alt, what is H, what is F a. What is ok, now let us work in actual, see what is the first option that comes, suppose I write here Tanu Single, I have written this name, ok, I auto adjust it with double tap, fill some color inside it, like I wanted to fill a good color, this color is good and we have filled this color, given a border in it, in a way it looks quite good, ok, if I want the same content at the bottom, that means exactly. We want that thing in the cell below, so basically what we want is that the shortcut key to fill down fill down is Control D. I am telling you exactly the shortcut key. If you want to go directly from here, you can go from here too, but I will also tell you the way to go from here, but remember this one, Control D and if you want it on the right side, then Control r. Now let me tell you one thing, what does it do? Basically exactly the same if there is any other color here. If there was a different color font here, then it would also have chosen a different color font. If there was a different size font here, then a different size font would have come here too. Exactly copy paste does exactly copy paste. So to know us about fill down, I write here, what we did for fill down, what is our shortcut key for fill down, fill down and fill down, control D and this is what we did, fill right and What is the shortcut key we have for fill right? Control R is fine and at the same time if I want to go according to the home keys because you get this option in the home tab then Alt HFI and it is found D and right is called R. So if you want, now you have two shortcut keys meaning one more thing, meaning the easy one, if you do not remember this then what shortcut key can you use because now you have generated the shortcut keys from the home tab also . Alt H means Home F I Fill and after that it is D, it is D, neither is it D, and here Alt A A I D D will not come, what will come, this is right, otherwise r will come, okay, this thing which I have just told you has been done for down and right, if I talk about the same thing for once, I copy it and paste it here, if I have to do this thing in the upward direction or if I want to do it in the left direction, then I have There is no shortcut key. We don’t reverse anything anyway, we don’t go up, so that’s why the main thing is used only. If you have to do something on the left, then you will go to the left cell and after that you will click on the left, then it will be filled in the left. If you have to go to the up position, then go to the up position and then go up. Okay, we can do this directly, they do not have any shortcut key. Okay, I understood, generally we either We move towards this or move like this, that is why their shortcut keys are available with us. Okay, everyone understood, so what did we learn here? We learned these four types of fill: Down, Right, Up, Left. After this, what we are going to fill is a series of fills. Which is the most important thing, so let’s listen to how the serious feel is. First of all, let me look at you in the serious feel, first I will give you the complete feature, and then one last one. I will also write a formula, okay, let’s write a series, first of all, let me tell you the normal series. If I want to write a normal series, then I wrote one and I can drag, one way, I have this and I can do the fill series, one way, I have this, I take it a little to 10, it is okay, the second way, what do you have , the second way, you have this, you write the initial number here, one and go to that initial number and here in the series. Go, after clicking on the series, a window like this comes to you, now what does this window say that what you have to fill, you have to fill it daily, you will come to fill it daily, otherwise it will go like this, it will go like this, I will do it one by one, let me tell you how the daily works, keep it in daily like this, linear means what is linear used for, plus is used for minus, so plus minus means we are adding one number one by one, isn’t it technically you? When you see the series 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9, if you check it technically, then what are you doing? You are doing the same thing, then here you write one in the step value and assume 10 in the stop value, because you have to write till 10, then if you have given OK, then it will write it in this way and give it to you. It is okay, but you did not want to write the column in this way. That’s why we choose columns instead of rows, we have taken columns, we have taken linear, only one plus has to be done and here if it stops at 10 or 10, then till here your value will come directly. Now you will say that ma’am, we can do this by stretching, that is, we can do it by dragging, why should we achieve so much, these were also 10 numbers, so that is why you are feeling that I can do it by dragging, but if this is the same thing I can do to you. Say, if you want to do it for 1 lakh entries, then till 1 lakh you will keep dragging and here you have to write the amount by just one go, so you will write it directly. Okay, so this is what we do, this is our series. Now let me tell you another way. Suppose you have to write some pattern. You have to write the pattern. 2 4 6 8 10 If you have to write the pattern by doing something like this, then what is happening in this pattern. What is happening in this pattern that I have started from 2 . Starting with that, we write the numbers, OK, then what is happening + 2 4 + 2 6 + 28 8 + 2 10, so basically two are being added, so in this way, if we have to write any pattern, then we will go to this, we will go here, meaning we will go to our fill, we will go in series and what do we have to fill in, first of all, why do we have to do it in the column, now you have understood because every day, he will give us all the answers like this . If you want an answer, then this is your column. The second thing is that you have to keep it in linear. Whenever you have to do plus or minus, if you keep it in linear, then you have to do plus or minus. You have to do plus. Well, how much plus has to be done. Step value means, how much has to be done, then you have to do two and when to stop, what answer should come, stop when you reach 100, stop where the last 100 comes, then stop . If you do OK then 2 4 6 8 10 12 14, see, you keep going on till 50 values till 100 is reached. Everyone has understood the guess. If you don’t understand then you can do the same thing. Let me show you in some other pattern. Let me show you in some other pattern too. Let’s say I is 100. Keep subtracting F from it until the answer is zero or till the answer is one. Okay fine 100 is written in the series, now what do you have to do in the column but now you have to do minus F because now you have to do minus and for how long when the answer F does not come, for Apple you have to do it till the answer F comes OK then 100 95 90 will keep decreasing and it will keep going till the answer F comes in the last, okay so it is up to you how you can implement any feature. When you use your features, you get to do it in this way, whatever is linear is for plus minus, just remember this, I will write these things to you, what we have done first and what we have done for linear, what we have done first and what we have done for linear and use for plus minus. Okay, so those who use linear, they use for plus minus. If you have a basic understanding of how the pattern is being filled, then you will understand these things. Now let me do one thing here and delete it so that we can talk about the second series below. Second, what do you see here, if you go to the series, then next comes to you, growth growth, which is growth, which deals in multiply and divide. Second, the one that comes to you, comes to you, growth and growth deals in what , deals in both of these, in multiply and divide, you will say that this See what kind of pattern it is, suppose you have written two, till now what was there was that you wrote 2 + 2 4 4 + 2 6 6 + 2 8 8 + 2 10, it was going on like this but now when you use growth, it will be 2 * 2, then it will be 4, but 4 * 2 will be 8, 8 * 2 will be 16, 16 * 2 will be 32, 32 2 * 2 will be 64, that is this. If it will grow in the same way then you go to the series and select the column. Now to take growth, what do you do here? Write 2 here and stop value 100. Then stop till 100 is reached. Do OK then 2 * 2 4 * 2 8 8 * 2 16 16 * 2 32 32 * 2 64. Now 64 * 2 becomes 128. 128 is greater than 100 and you had given the stop value as 100, so beyond that it did not give the answer. Okay, in the same way, if you want, you can divide it. Now like you have written 100 and after 100, you have gone to the filter, that is, you have gone to the fill, gone to the series, gone to the column, gone to growth and now you have to change the step value to 0.5, keep deleting by half the number and till the answer. If you don’t get five then ok let’s try 100 Did Ba 2 50 / Ba 2 25 25 / Ba 2 12.5 12 Did Ba 2 A 6.25 makes half of that, it has come, you just have to be a little careful that what values should I put in it so that I get exactly the answer I want, then putting those values is your main here. The work is going to be done, if you have put those values properly, then all these things will come to you in the correct manner, so that is your growth and linear, you have also done the growth, now the main one comes, the end date of the day comes, this part of the date is used the most. Within the date, I have already told you in number format but still let me tell you what does date date mean today? You can see the date of 25th Feb 25, this is today’s date, so what is inside it, day, month, year, okay, so one way can be that I keep increasing every day from today, one way can be, I can show month wise and one way can be, I can show year wise, right now I am not able to understand it, it’s okay, now we will understand, okay if you see the example, you will understand, suppose I have taken today’s date. I took the date and after that I want to drag it, then it will get dragged, either I can drag directly, we do it when we have small data, we have to drag for some time, like for a second or two seconds, within three seconds we can do that thing by dragging, so we obviously do the drag thing but when it is taking more time than this, then do not drag, after that what do you do this Take the date and suppose you want to write from 25th to 26th, then you will go by dragging for a time, then you will have to pay attention that when 26th 25th February 2026 comes and then you will have to stop and there is one way – go to home page, go to the series, go to the column, why are you going to the column. You know this thing, go to the date and there are two things in a day, one day comes that is a normal day, the way other things are coming and so on. If a week day comes, it will automatically remove your Saturday Sunday, that is, you don’t need Saturday Sunday at all, if your days come without that, then this is also a liberty in it and the good thing is that if suppose you have to write only working days in this way and want to remove Saturday Sunday, then it will write it to you. Now suppose you want to write it only till the third March, then three three just because will remain till here, so okay, look here. Now suppose it has come, now you have seen that the step value is also written there. Now if you wanted to write a date in which if two days are lost, then you will go to the column, here you will write two in the step value and after that you will write 03 03 2025. Okay, so look, 25 has come, 26 has been left, 27 has arrived, 28 has been left, 20 first of match has arrived, second has been left, third. It has come because you have given two values so that by adding two plus it comes in it, then in this way, if you want to fill any pattern, then you can fill the pattern, you check your step value, it will come only by adding or minus to the step value. If you want to reverse it, then put a minus, like suppose if I write 03 03 2025 here and then go to fill, go to series, go to column, go to date. I do -2 and I say keep writing till 25th January or 25th February comes, then see 3 1 27 25 You can also do this in reverse, what have you written this time, if you have written -2 there, then it happens in this way, now I will tell you the week day thing about the same thing, if you have to write the week day, then on the week day, first of all we will do this thing, then we will do this, then we will do this, so that you understand the difference, okay for the week day, you will do the same thing. First take today’s date, after that you go in the series from here, leave one in the column and from here take the week day and take it as 03 03 20 25 and ok so this came to you 25 26 27 28 and one and two he has removed it May be one and two Your Saturday is falling so one and two he has removed it Directly three has come Now the same work if we have someone in it If we want to do addition then we can do that too. We have this value. After the value, what are we doing? What should we do in the gap of two days? After that, we went to the series. After going to the series, we took the column, here we put two and this time we took the week day and the stop value, we took the same 3 3 20 25 and did OK, so see 25 26 is gone, 26 is gone because we called it two step value. If it was then it will give according to two values and after that 28 is also gone because 28 will not come, the next one was supposed to come from that, why did the next one not come because it was within the week day, two did not come, so these three dates are left, like this we can do the reverse also 03 03 2025 And here we went to the fill series, after going to the series, went to the column and after that we went to the week day and here is the pay step value which we have Given -2 and the value that should be stopped here is 25 2 2025 and Okay, so we have these three dates. Okay, last thing, what is left with you for the month? Suppose, if you do this three times and you want only the month to be dragged, then what will you do? After going to the series, we will go to the date in the left column and will do the month. Now till how much do you have to write, suppose you have to write till 25 12 2025, then see 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 These middle ones are increasing. Which is your month? Okay, if you want to do the same thing for the year, then write down today’s date and after that you go to the series. After going to the series, you take the date from here and go to the year. Whether to increase by one year or by two years, it is your choice. I am trying to increase it by two years. I have shown this and after that, I am trying to reach where I have written 25 to end, okay two dashes. It took 20 15 ok then 25 27 29 see the date in between is not changing, only the year is changing and it has come to 49. In this way you can write the date of whatever pattern you want, you can write series which is fill series, it is mostly used for date, it is mostly used for date, now it complements the series itself, if you believe that then this is the feature. If you do not want to use this, then you can use a formula. Which is equal to sequence? What does the sequence do? Tap on it, write as many numbers as you want, directly want up to 1000 or only up to 10, you write this, enter it, see, a series up to 10 will appear, this is your formula, ok, date is needed, something has to be done for the date, Equals to sequence tab, sorry search, the tab has come, right? How many are required daily, let’s say 10 days are required and 10 dates are to be written, how many columns do you need, that is, how many columns are to be written, suppose I have to be written in two columns, then two OK, where to start, if it starts from today’s date, then you can write today’s date or you can apply today’s formula, let’s do this thing further, just because right now you will not know the today formula because we have not made those formulas, so normally you can understand. That we can do this even by applying the sequence formula, but it is better if we do not apply the formula because the references come from the formula, we can mess it up later, if you remove anything in between, it will create a mess, so that is why we should do it in this way by using this option, rather than you use any formula, we will learn the complete formula for this later, but for now, we have learned this much. If you have any doubt then you can tell me in the comment section. I say this again and again that all of you either tell me your doubts one by one or keep writing those doubts as you are reading because it is difficult to cover the whole thing in one go, so your doubts will come continuously. Slowly, slowly, slowly, you will get the answer and solve it and if you think, I will see everything in one go and After that, if I ask all the doubts in one go, then it is totally up to you. If you want to ask like this, you can ask like this. Okay, here we have completed the series. After the series, we get a clear all which we have done. After that, we get the filter. Filtering is very important. Filter and Sorting is one of the most important topics of Excel. The best feature is the single which helps us in many things, which also helps us in a lot of reporting, it helps us a lot in understanding something after seeing it, especially with the data, so now we will do sort and filter filter and sorting. What is if I talk about filters, then let us understand a little bit three times and after that we will get a little better clarity about it. So just give me a minute, so see us here, I will make a filter, just ignore my drawing. Okay, so we made a filter, okay, how does a filter generally work, for example, if you put 200 liters of water inside it, okay, 200 liters, you put water inside it and what is coming out is 185 liters, that means, what are the impurities in 15 liters, the 15 liters of water that was impure has been removed and 150-185 pure water has come, okay, so what is the effect of applying a filter? It happens that you separate the things, whatever you had to separate into pure and pure, the filter has done it, so in the same way, suppose there are many things written inside a data, like you can see the data, here date is written, name is written, category is written, product is written, state is written, there are many things if you want in your mind. It came like this, okay fine, many states are written here, I want to know how many sales we have done within Assam, do you want to know how many sales have we done within Assam, you just want to know, now if you sit down to search on your own, how much time will it take, it is a very time consuming process, so in such a situation, you will filter out, what will you do to filter it out, okay, let me tell you how the filters are applied, whenever you have to apply filters, you will go to the heading of your data. You will go to any heading. There is no mandatory whether it should be the first heading or the last heading. You go to any heading and click on it. What will you do after clicking? In the home tab, I will tell you the direct feature once, after that I will tell you about the shortcut key. Okay, so what will be the direct feature you will have. Look here, this filter which I made and told you about, you can see the same shape now, so you will click on it and there is an option of end filter, its shortcut key is also written next to it. Which is Control Shift L, then you click on it, your filters will be applied, drop downs like this will be applied, the way to remove them is also that if you go to this and click on the filters, then they are removed. Now I have to apply filters anywhere, obviously filters will be applied on headings, so if I click on any heading, I will press Control Shift L, then my filters will be applied. Now we were talking about how filters are used for. Example, if I want to see, now I have different categories, electronic, decker, fashion, etc. If I want to know how much electronic I have sold, then it will consume a lot of time to check it myself. I will click on this drop down. Just give me a minute. I will click on this drop down. After clicking on this, I will get a window like this. Whatever data you have, write here all the unique values in that column. Now you have to see only electronic data, so this select all is already selected, remove it and after that select electronic and after that you do OK from here, by doing this only electronic data has come on your screen, rest of the data is gone, you are able to see, you have only electronic data, I will show you from here, see only and only you have electronic data, then in this way you can filter out, now you have filtered but if you want to go back. If you want, then there are two ways, either you directly press control shift L, then the filter is removed, removing the filter means that the entire data as it is will appear in front of you, the second method is that you will click here and it is written here, clear filter from the category, you will do this like this, the filter which was applied from the category will go away. Okay, the next question of yours is that ma’am, can we apply more than one filter inside one data? Yes, absolutely it is. We can take an example and let’s go with the same, suppose I wanted to know how much electronic has sold in the category, then I did how much electronic has sold, how much electronic has been sold, it came, after that you know that electronic is fine but I want to know further that how many laptops I have sold, so we did electronic, inside electronic, we had to know how much we have sold laptop, so we got laptop, then you say, ok, about laptop too, but I want to know how much the females bought and how much the male bought, I said ok. Then we will impose fine on gender, how much did the mails buy, okay, but I want to know how much was sold in Rajasthan, so you will select it and remove it, we will keep checking below, Rajasthan starts with R, so here Rajasthan is and after doing okay, we have only these four entries in Rajasthan and this much has been sold, so it has come to us, so look everywhere, there is a symbol like this above the category, there is a symbol like this on the product name, there is a symbol like this on the state too. There is a symbol like this on the gender too. Having this symbol means that there is a filter on it. Now suppose you suddenly remember that no, I don’t want to remove it on the product name, it means I don’t want to put a filter on the product name, I had to put it on the rest, so now either you will control it, then the whole work will be removed, so in such a situation, what will we do, we will click on whatever has to be removed and here comes Clear from the product name. If you click on it, then look away from here. there is space left You applied the rest later on like state, gender but still they are there. Okay, so in this way you can remove your filter even from an individual and you can automatically filter out your data and see it. So in this way, our filters work for us and help us a lot. Now suppose I want all the data back. So what to delete after going to each one. Directly press control shift l and control shift l and the drop down will come back. Okay, in this way you Let me tell you one more thing, if you click on the filter, you will see some options above here, Sort A & G. If you click here, then the options you see are Small to Largest. If you click here, you will see Oldest and Newest. So what does this mean? Look, one thing is very simple. Let us understand that if you want to filter out anything, then filter it out in the same data. Now let’s talk about the text. If we talk about the text, then if the text has to be arranged, what has to be done, if the text has to be arranged, then how can it be arranged? How can it be arranged? So how obvious is it that for its arrangement you have to do A, either A to 2, I don’t know why it is not working, A to 2, you can do J to A, right, these are the two arrangements that can be made. In what other ways can you arrange the alphabets? You will put it in the same way. If there is any customization, if you want to put it in a different way, then it is a different matter, then we will look at the custom, but the general thing is that whether it will be A to 2 or Z to A. If I talk about numbers, is it possible in the arrangement in numbers ? If we can put smollet, then it is possible for the date in the same way. Is it possible to make the smollet largest or not from A to Z? Will it be oldest to newest or oldest to newest or new to old, should the oldest one be placed first or the newest one should be placed first, then this arrangement will be done in this way, otherwise it is possible in the same way as our arrangement, that is why the features that you see here are those on the text, if there is any filter somewhere. If you are looking here then you see A to two and J to A. If any filter is being applied on some number, then what you see is small to largest and largest to small and if you check on the date, then on the date you see oldest to new and newest to oldest. Okay, there I will make you check one more thing. As soon as you go to any text, you see text filters here. If you go to a number, then you will see number filters here and if you go to a date, you will see date filters here. Okay, now you have understood why something is written there, you have got the answer to the question, okay, there is a green color here, okay , I have to find that, so how do I do that? Suppose, sometimes what happens in the data is that we apply some color to highlight it, then you can sort that too, you click on it here. And here after writing ‘Filter by Color’, the color comes, now I am saying that somewhere it has got green color by mistake, so it has happened here, now I can change it by going to the home, suppose I have done this, I have made it charcoal grey. Now look, it has come in the text filter, it is fine, but I made it white just because it was done by mistake, okay, I had to do it here, I made it white, okay, now for you, I will tell you the data once in this way. How to color Control Shift L Control Shift L No problem, it is not working for us. Okay, let’s color one place at a time. By holding any control, I have selected this data and I am going to color at various places. Okay, and I will color it here. This one is fine, I have colored it at various places. Now I have to sort it, so what can you do. Okay, I will take another color, single color, so you know, so I have colored it here. But I have selected anything from here, you are not even able to see it, I can’t even see it, and we have selected such a small, small, small one , and here we have red, see how many yellows, okay, now I have zoomed it, just for once, I had to do it, now suppose if you have more than one color fill at some place, then you can filter it out, you will go to this, fill by color and here you will see all the colors, you want yellow first. Look, yellow has come, all the yellow ones have come, okay, so this is definitely a way, when you can filter any of your data according to the color, if you removed it , then this data of yours has been removed. Okay, now I tell you, if I ask you, do you know all these text filters etc., text filters and so many filters that are shown to you, you will say, ma’am, I am learning new things and you are asking me whether I know it or not. You don’t know, you know all of them, now how to see that. What you just learned from me was that you had learned conditional formatting, so now let’s move on to it by meditating a little and relating it a little and we will also understand a little what conditional formatting does, see, for once let’s talk about what does conditional formatting do and what does a filter do, okay if I talk about conditional formatting and on one hand what I talk about, I talk about filters. If it is ok, then what is conditional formatting doing? If you give any condition, if you give any condition, then I will do the formatting instead of that. I told you some condition that if it is so, then do this, then only that data is there in it, let’s say this data is of 1000 entries, the data of 1000 entries is okay and inside this you have to highlight the duplicate values and 50 There are duplicate values, for one time, it will color it in 50, it will change the border in 50, it will do something or the other in 50, but here the data that you will see will be of how many entries, only 1000 entries will be visible, only that much is visible, wherever we want to highlight people, there is a color there, then what happens inside the filter, no entries, only 50 will appear, the answer is the same. Will come but the method of representation changes. How does the method change? Now when you apply filters, 1000 entries will not come, only 50 entries will be shown, no color, nothing, only 50 entries will be shown, so it is up to you as to how you want to keep the representation. Features are all the same, you will see that if you go to text from here, if you go to text filters from here, Equals to does not equal to begin with and. With does not contain condition was done in formatting and not written in solution then tell me if anything is written then tell me then all these are the same as if you go to custom also then you have the same, you have the same, greater than equal to whatever you had read, when you go to number format, you will go to number filters, equal does not equal greater than greater than equal to less than top 10 Top 10 Below Average Above Average All these things are the same, isn’t this the same, you can check in the date, when I told you about a date in the date, I did not tell in it, Yesterday, Today, Tomorrow, This Week, Last Week, everything and that is the same, okay, so in this way you can do the same work here in the conditional formatting, here you can do the same work in the filter, what is the difference in the conditional formatting, 1000 If there are entries of 1000 then 1000 remain but what comes in color but what is in the filter comes out after being filtered, the rest of the data goes away, whatever is asked for as it is remains the same. Okay, so you know all these filters, definitely practice. If you have any doubt on any of these, please let me know in the comment section. I will definitely tell you but there is no point in repeating it here. Because we have done that, we know it already, we will not waste time there. Now whatever we can learn, we can learn sorting. So, now we will learn sorting manually. The thing that we know is sorting which I just told you about the arrangement. So the arrangement itself is called sorting. We have to sort. Suppose now you can see that the names are written in different types. There is no such thing as A, A, T, Z, Z to A. If it is written then you can do that thing, you click on it and from here you click on A to Z, then see that in this way your data has been sorted in it. Okay, suppose you want to do something else, you want to do according to the number, then you can go to the number. If you want to do the largest to smallest, you click on it and see, a sorting icon has also appeared on it. Let me just show it to you, then see a sorting icon has appeared on it. And look, the number which will be on the top will be the highest and accordingly the entire data has been changed here. Let me tell you that earlier the data which was there was Harijan Wellness and later when we made it from largest to smallest, now it is Bright Harijan Venture. Okay, earlier we had done the price, so that is something. And it was showing that here we had done the price from largest to smallest, so here it was Radiant Health Club, so in this way we can sort the entire data is about the same thing, if suppose I want to arrange the data according to the date, from newest to oldest, then the new largest data which is written is written according to that, the entire data is arranged here, Zenith has come here. Now okay, one thing is that when you do the sorting, then you can undo the sorting. It doesn’t happen. We have done it hand to hand for now. If you think that sorting is left, then I have left it. Later, I will do the same data again, then that thing does not happen. Now, what I will teach you will make you aware of sorting also. As soon as you have your data here, after that, you can go to Sort and Filter here and click on Custom Sorting. On Custom Sorting, first of all you can see all the headings inside all the data that you have. This means that it is asking you that the custom sorting you have to do should be done according to what. For example, if we have to do it according to the name, then we have done the name. After that it asks you according to what we have to do, according to the cell values. We have to do it according to the cell color. We have to do it according to the font color or there is some condition formatting icon. So let’s say, from here I take the color only. When I took the cell color, I took the cell color and now as soon as I took the cell color, my options have changed here, now it is asking me which sorting to do, for example, I want to take yellow, but there by default yellow was coming, which was yellow by default, it was only bringing and giving yellow, now this is sorting, not a filter, it is sorting, so what will happen in the filter, it will bring and give only the yellow color, the rest of the data will go, sorting is not done like this. It keeps that data as it is, it just arranges whatever arrangement you want to do, now as I want it to come on the bottom, that means all the yellow data should go at the bottom of the data, I have done OK. Now look, go to the very bottom and whatever data you had, see the data is getting finished. Here, that entire yellow part has come down, that portion is fine, so in this way, if you want, you can do custom sorting. Okay, everyone understood, here you will get custom. The option of sorting is available here, it is completely up to you as to what you have to do and what not to do. If you want to delete any level, then you delete it. If you do OK, then your sorting has been deleted from here. Those who will be sorting from here, look from here for a second. All the sorting which you had done is gone and your yellows have again come from scattered places. So the custom sorting which is done from there is done by you. You can also delete from there itself. So here we learned to do normal sorting. If we want to do text then it can be A to 2J to A. If we want to do with numbers then it can be small to largest and largest to small. And if we want to do date then it can be L to newest to oldest. We also learned custom sorting that how we can go there and do our according sorting. Let’s do filters here. And we have completed the topic of sorting, now we move ahead, the next topic comes to you , Go To Special, how to use Go To Special, for what, first of all we have to know that and what is the meaning of Go To, why is Go To Special being used, when we know this, then we will be able to apply it easily. See, Go To means to jump directly over any cell. Now this thing is asked many times in your interviews also, if you agree, then we will be able to apply it easily. Let me say this, we have come here on this side and I tell you that I do not want to go to Rs 1 lakh. If I want to reach Rs 1 lakh, then what will you do by scrolling, will you go scrolling like this or will you go down using your keyboard, use the page down, then how much tiring will it be if you have to reach Rs 1 lakh, then better than this you can use Gotu. Now there are two ways for you to use Gotu, one way is where you directly. You can use the shortcut key and one way is known to you that we will explore the feature directly, so what you have to do is, first of all you will go to Find and Select on the Home tab. After going here, you will click on it, then here you get the first option of Go To. If you click on it, then you will get a window like this. After this type of window comes, here you will have to write the reference where you had to go. a100, you had to go to a1 lakh, after that you press OK, then it has taken you above a1 lakh, you can see that this is our sale, it is above a1 lakh, but I would not personally suggest you to use it, for once, I will definitely tell you its shortcut key, go to starts with the g, so what happened to its shortcut key, what am I saying that go to starts with what is go to. Starts with the G. Hence, its shortcut key is Control G. Okay, now Control G. If you press Control G anywhere inside your sheet, then this window opens to you and you can write directly here, but I say this is also a big way, we will not do it in this way also. If in any case, if you are told that I have to reach K 3965 3, then where will you do what, you go directly to your name box and write here k. 3969 8 You had to reach here, just enter, then see it has taken you to 3969 8 and from here you can see that it has brought you to the place of that sale by jumping directly, so instead of using Go To, use the name box. Go To adds more features in itself. There are many features which are very useful, so we will do that, but here my job is not just to tell you the features, my job is to tell you in this way. Let me tell you the features that should be so effective so that you can do your work better and use the name box to do better. It will give you better results. Well, what is he doing here on the side by jumping directly to the cell? Now suppose your interviewer told you that you have to select the entire area till 1963, so in such a situation, you will do the same work, you will write in the name box : 9 63 5 2. 8 You can write anything till the selection and after that now you will not directly press enter, if you press shift enter then here it has given the entire selection till the point where you have written here 963 U which is your number, not sorry 3969 8 So it has given till here yours is ok so we can do the selection in this way, suppose I am here and from here till how much do I have to select. If you want to reach m10, then I wrote m10, after that I pressed shift enter, then put the first cursor till m10 and after that, write jump on the cell where you want to reach and after that press shift enter, then the entire selection till there will be automatic. Why do we learn selection? I have always told you in Excel that whatever work you do, first you have to make a selection and only after that you can apply something beyond that. Yes, right, that’s why we are doing selection here, so that first we get to know different types of dynamic selections, after that we can do anything. Till now, if I talk about what you had learned in the selection, then you had learned the basic selection. Now what was that basic selection? The basic selection was this. If I told you to do a complete selection, select the entire data in one go, then what would you do ? If you used control A, then the entire data would be selected, then I used to say, brother, do the selection with a single click, how was the selection done with a single click, it was done with control shift, then you used control shift arrows and the entire selection was done, after that it came to you that you have to select a single cell, then the single cell was also selected, you held the shift and after that used the arrows and here a single selection was done, but I am saying . Yes, this is the way to select the data. I gave you the data and said in the data, select all the blank cells. Then brother, how will this happen because neither can you select the entire data. How much pressure have you put in it that select all the blank cells. Well, I tell you to select all the text written inside the entire data. Now look here, there is text written in between the values too, they should also be selected, so you will keep watching like this. For this type of dynamic selection, we use Go to Special. As soon as you press Control G, you get a special option below. Click on it. You will get a window like this in which there are many options. If you do not want to explore it from here, then you can also explore it from the Home tab . Go to the Home tab, go to Find Select, here also you will get Go to Special. Where does it go? Now we have to see what options are available inside it and how can we use it. So see, we will control A so that our data gets selected, after that we will control G so that we have this option, after that we will go to special. I would personally suggest you that whenever you go, control G and then go to special. First of all, let me tell you that it is very small here, so you may not be able to see B, so below each word. There is an underline, there is an alphabet inside every word and there is an underline below the alphabet, then that alphabet is its key. In the same way as home, when we press alt , one key does not come, similarly, there is no key here, the one under which there is an underline, that is its key. Okay, the other thing, the first one is notes. Let’s say I put notes here at different places with shift A2. I put some random notes here at different places with shift f2, okay. And now you want to select wherever these notes are present. Suppose you have a huge data and now you have to highlight wherever there are notes, so that you can see where there are notes in the entire data. So before applying anything, we need a selection, so we will do Control A, Control G, we will go to Special, we will select the notes and we will do OK, so see where the notes are present, that selection. It is done, now I have colored it in this way, so now I will always see in my data that OK fine, there are notes here and there, OK, now suppose you want to remove this color again, then you will do Control A, Control G, after that you will go to Special, after that you will select the notes and you will do OK. Now if you want, you can remove their color, I have made it white and look, all these selections have been removed, so in this way you select the notes, after that you can see. Do Control A, Control G, go to Special and you get the option of Constant and Formula. You will have to understand it in a little detail but before understanding it, let us know one thing. See, when you click on the Constant, these four options are active, the first one is number, the other one is text, the other one is logical and then the error and even when you click on the formula, these four remain active, so are these four for both? Yes, can you explore them together, that is, you can choose which constant and formula together. The answer is no. When you do it for a constant, it will be a constant thing. When you do it for a formula, it will be a formula thing. These are their common options which you can use. Now you need to understand what is a constant and what is a formula. In this entire table, the most useful ones that you will find are these two options. You will get constant and formula, that is why it is very important to understand the difference between these two. If you do not understand the difference between these two, then understanding the whole go to special will be useless, so let us understand it a little carefully. See, here you get two words, the first one is constant , the other one is formula. Suppose from a1 to a1, some 10 10 digits were written like this 10 10 10 10 On one side I wrote I give, this cell is mine and here I write 100 and on one side here is the cell of mine, I write the sum a1 a10 then the answer is this is my formula will be visible in the bar but the answer is mine what will be visible is 100 so here which is only value there is no formula so what has become constant and here the value is there but is this value constant is it just value no check the formula b what? There is some formula attached to it. Yes, so suppose this is your formula. Okay, so the first thing we understood is the constant and formula. Let me give you one more example. Suppose you had written some ‘A’ and ‘Your’ marks here. Okay, now you have written directly inside the cell according to the marks, if someone’s no came at 30-40, then if he passed, then you wrote ‘pass’ after seeing and on one side, what did you do here, if you put the formula that if. If it happens then do this or else do this and then after that means you applied some formula here, you calculated pass from that formula and if you failed then the answer will come here then you will see pass but inside that when you checked in the formula bar, the formula was written there, so this is your constant and this is your formula, so now you have understood this at the initial level, what? Is it a constant and what is the formula? Now see, when you write a value, we call the value a number. Here also the answer is your value. If your answer is 100, then this is also a number. So this number is the number of a constant, meaning that number is the number of a constant. And this number that has come has come after being extracted, what has happened, has it come after being extracted, that is why it is the number of the formula. Now you see here, when I control you and tell you, go to the special, see, a constant also has a number option and a formula also has a number option, but there is a difference between these two, what is the difference, now you understand what is the difference, one will be the number of a constant and one will be the number of your formula, in the same way, if I talk in the way we have talked about numbers, in the same way, if I talk, it is of text. This is about the text, is there any formula written here or did you write the pass directly? If you write the party name, then what are they directly? Some generate it from some formula and do not come up with it. You normally fill the name directly yourself, do some data entry, so that is your text. What kind of text is the text of the constant? And here you have applied some formula to find out whether the student has passed or failed. If you have done anything like that then it is by applying a formula. If you did not understand then that is the text of your formula. If you understood then now you have understood two things – the number of the constant, the number of the formula and the text of the constant and the text of the formula. After that you have two more options. What are the other two options that come to you? Here we will explore both the options which is logical and after that what is an error logical? Anything written as true is false. What will be the logic, either this or that is logical , then what is written is true and false, that is logical and error, you must have seen that in the formula there is such a value error, by putting a hashtag, such an error comes, a name error # a # spill # divide, you have errors in many ways, then you have got these errors, so if we assume that there is an error in a constant, then it means that an error occurs when a formula is applied. If the formula’s error and other wise are written directly, then directly the error is the error of the constant. If you apply any formula and the true false answer comes, then the logical of the formula and not come means it is normal. Directly, we ourselves have written true false as per our own wish. That is your constant. Now even if you did not understand it so well, then it is okay because now we have explained it in great detail here. Let’s see it practically, this is our data, okay, inside this data, let’s say, let me tell you, you will constantly keep looking at the formula bar here, like I zoom it a little here, we clicked on the date, the date is coming, that means there is no formula, clicked on the name, the names are coming, there is no formula and look at the product name, state, gender, quantity, the value is coming in the quantity, there is no formula, cost, price, no, no, this price is coming. The value is directly written in it but when it comes to the purchase cost then look at the formula written here, the value is visible but the formula is there, click here, the formula is visible here, the value is visible here, click here, the formula is visible here, the value is visible, click this, the formula is visible, but the text is visible, click this, the formula is visible, but it is visible. Okay, so here you are given two things. You can select the formula numbers and text and all the things, so now accept that I tell you, tell me the number of the constant, then select the number of the constant and tell me, then I will do control A, I will do control G, after that you will go to the special, from here you will select the constant and here, leave only the numbers selected and OK, so see, the constant date is always counted inside the number. Let me tell you this thing, the date is always counted in the number. So, here, these numbers are there as well as the quantity because there was no formula in it. I just showed you that it was not included in the cost, it was not included in the price also, but when it comes to the purchase cost, sale cost, sorry, sale price profit, so your formulas were included inside it, so it did not select which one , which one was selected which were just constant numbers. Now if you want, you can do anything with it separately. Can you give them some color so that I can color them and highlight something like this? What I have to do is tell you what you can do. My main job is to explain how the selection will be done. Okay, so here we did the go to special thing. Okay, next here we did the constant number. Now the same thing, if we had to do the formula number, then we will control A, we will do control G, we will go to special, we will go to the formula, we will select the numbers and do OK. So see, the numbers have been selected from here, but you see carefully, this is zero, this is a, this is the value, this is this. There must be some digit written directly in B, so it has not selected it , you go down here and check if there are any other errors, see because the value in itself is an error, it is a text in itself, it is a constant text, so here we had told him to select the formula number and then he is so pressed that he has not taken those things from the middle which are not your formula number, which is the formula number, he has taken that, okay let’s go. Next we will see Control A will do Control G will do the same goes with the text, if you want to take the text of a constant then how will you take it, all these names and names written are your text, these are constants, you have written them yourself, not generated from the formula from somewhere, but right there, by doing Control A, Control G, if I go to special and if I take the text of the formula and do OK, then it gives me the text here, now you will say that Ma’am False True False This is also a text, yes text is datchi, so what does he consider as true false? He always considers logical true false, he will not show it as a text here, a thing can be one thing, it can be either text or logical or it can be an error. Now if there is an error then the value is also written. If the value is text in itself, then is it in the text? If he will not count it, he will count it in error and one thing cannot be counted in two things, he will have to count only one thing, Hans, what is written here, the value, is your error, True False, what is written, is your logical, that is why all the texts were there, he has given even, here you will believe it or not, here ok, you will believe it, yes, we had taken the text with formula, neither have you taken this one, now I have taken the one with constant. You had to tell me more in the text, control ji will do special and I wanted to check one more time with the constant one, I wanted to check it once more, you see, from here, he has selected this, so we saw it, you look here, see, for one second, we came to the side that yes, look here, he has written the text here, neither has this also been selected, he has not left that data, if you have told him the constant text, then he has selected this also, I had to show you this, we had gone to the data on the side. By mistake, here we have done two completes, which is the first one is number and the other one is text, after that if we talk about control, we have done it directly, no problem, we have come to special, after that we will go to the constant and we want to check the logicals, will we get the logical in the constant here, tell me from which, the answer is no from my side, if yes from your side, then you are facing some difficulty in understanding and we will explain it well, see, okay. So look here, we had not selected the data anywhere, so it checked here in the blue one, this is the heading, I had to check here in this one, Control A, do Control G, do special, and here, go to the constant, and here I have to take the logical, and do OK, so there is no logical here, saying no cells and found, why because what is logical here, what is true false, is that true false, from whom did this true false come, see from whom did this true false come, look above. The formula is attached, it has come from the formula, so if I do the formula one, control a does control g does special and after taking the formula and then taking logical in it then it comes again see then it has made the selection but here it was not in the constant na look for the constant, I have created a separate data so that you can practice control a did control g did special and here you took the constant so here you can do OK with it so look here this Why did you make the selection? Look at the selection here. Click on it. Check your formula bar at the top. Is there any formula written there? No, all the text is written, so the text is written and true. If false is written, then what happened to you, it became logical, which constant one is it ? Similarly, if I talk about the error, then look at the control a, the errors are written here, the error is written by itself, here the error is not coming from any formula, okay, then you will control a, control g will go to special and from here you will take the constant, from here you will take the error, okay, then look, it has selected all these errors, okay there. If I talk about the formula, then see these are the errors. For the formula with red heading, see this, we have applied the formula and after that, if any error has come, now you control a, control g. If you go to special, go to constants and take an error here, then it will say no cells found yes because all the errors here have actually come by applying the formula, so you have to control g special. We have to go to and select the formula from here and select the error from here and click OK, then it will select all the errors, so here we have completed all the options which are the main options of Gotu Special, in which we have seen all the four options inside the constant and we have seen all the four options very well inside the formula also, now next is our We will see what comes close, we will do control A, we will do control G, after that we will go to the special, the most important comes blank one of the important. Suppose and this is also asked many times in the interview, that is why I am going to create this data in front of you, we had created this data earlier and here we do one thing, why did it happen like this for a few seconds, yes brother, it is okay, I am making a selection by holding the control, because I have to do multiple selection, hey, I used the control. Don’t hold it, I will make the selection from here, okay and here I have made the delete option and now look, you have this data, now there are many blanks inside it, if I tell you that you have to delete all these blanks, then are you going to sit there and delete them one by one? Otherwise, if you start doing it one by one, then it will be a very time consuming process. Now, if I have to delete all these blanks, then to delete them, I have to do the selection first. And what do we use for selection? If we do Control A, then sorry, we do Control G. Now can I select the entire data with Control A? Try it, it will not happen because there is space in between, hence we will have to do the complete selection from here in this way. You have made the selection, I have made the selection with Control Shift Down Arrow, after that I press Control G, I go to Special, select the blanks and do OK, what is it now, right? In these blanks, we can directly do control minus. What happens with control minus, our sales get deleted. We will delete the sales here. We will not delete the entire raw because there may be some data in the surrounding as well on our side, so we do not want to spoil our data. We do not want to spoil the whole sheet, so we will do control minus. We will delete the sales. Do control minus. We do not want to antagonize. Now we will think that we have to do ba sales. I have already explained to you how to delete cells. But understand it a little more carefully , what do you have to do with the assisting data. Do you want to move the assisting data to the left? Do you not move it to the left? You will bring your remaining data upwards only. If the cell in the middle is empty, then delete the cell and shift the remaining data to the top. If this is what you want, then shift the cell up and do OK. So in this way your data will be completely shifted, now there are no blanks inside it, okay in this way there are no blanks, the first thing you learned is this, the second thing I teach you is that suppose what you do is that you have a blank, there are a few blanks at some places, there are a few blanks in the whole data, now here there are a lot of them but there are a few blanks, okay now inside those blacks all the same values are going to go and you in that You do not want to fill one by one, you want me to write something so that it fills all the blanks in one go, then how can you do it in such a case, suppose the first thing you have to do is select the data because you will select the blanks, only then you will be able to do something, so first of all you have to select your data. Select it, OK, after that use control G, after that go to special, after that select the blank from here and do OK, then all the blanks you had will be selected. Now you have to write anything that you want in all the cells together. For example, I write my name here, single for once or write any value or write anything, I write 1000, so I I have written 1000. Okay, now I want it to appear in all of them, so if I press enter, what will happen? What happens after entering? We enter in the next cell and the entire selection will be off, so we did not do this. Now you can do one thing, instead of enter, press control enter, then that 1000 will be written at every place, here if you are thinking that ma’am, you have written 1000. Why did this format come? It is date based, that is why it came in the other wise. You will write the same value everywhere. Okay, I understood what you have to do. You just have to make a selection and start writing directly. It is not like you are clicking in a cell. As soon as you click, the entire selection gets lost. So do not click. Start writing directly. After that, control has to be entered because the selection is already done. If we click once more in the selection, then The selection gets turned off. We don’t have to turn off the selection. You directly enter control and your data will go everywhere. Okay, now I do control Pressed k, pressed enter and you have got this selection, do control minus, we will do shift cell up and do OK, so in this way our data will be fixed, okay, we have learned this here, after that I will tell you one or two more options, before that , first of all, I will cover all the important things which are important and after that I will make you explore them normally. Okay, after that you will have the information which is important. Option comes , that comes, let me tell you first option control g special and inside it there are two options, row difference and column difference and these are very useful, they are very useful, that is why I am telling you this, see how it is, raw difference and column difference, like suppose you have a small scenario and the real life scenario is that you suppose you do data entry, okay, your business is there, 99 invoices are made in it for January March. It is okay that 99 were made in the month, you put 1000 invoices in LI and in your Excel there were 99 or it could be its opposite or there is a difference in some value, that is, you have written all the details here, here you have written in Excel and first of all, when the recount comes, first of all we check the values, suppose there is a difference of 5000 in both your data, then first of all you will see this and not directly I can find this out. Where is the difference in the values, then if suppose you ever want to check the difference in two values, you have two days here and you want to check the difference in them, then you can use this trick. Basically, what you have to do is to select the data, selected the data, did control G, went to special and took the raw difference and did OK, then in this way, wherever the values were different, the rest are the same. Look, this one is different, this one is different, this one is different. This one is different, just color it, you will come to know, yes, it is different, everything else is the same, so in this way you can find out, it also has a shortcut key, now we have gone to Control G, its shortcut key is Control and forward slash, control and here your forward slash will come, so you can do this work by using it too, how did I do it, let me tell you back, why did I take it, why ok fine just give me. Minute OK, I selected it, went to home and made it white from here, OK, what did I do now, control selected it and pressed forward slash with control, did control forward slash OK, that works, sometimes my key of my laptop, the key of my system is not working, but you try using this, your work will be done, you can also do this, control A did OK, control A did control G did and went to special And from here you took the row difference and you did OK, then it will come in this way Control A control data select control G special row difference OK and just color it OK, similarly if suppose your data is in this format then you do the column difference, check the columns, there is not much difference, it is just the same thing, so you selected the entire data with control

shift side arrow, after that control G made it special, after that you did the column difference and then OK. Wherever there were differences, they have come, now you can color them, so here were the differences here and you have these differences, okay, so these were the major two options which are very used, when you recalculate any two values, then you can do it directly in this way, after that if I show you the option in special, then here we will not do the current region and array, right now we will do the object, we will understand the object also but here But before that, we can see President and Dependents, what do we mean by these, so let’s see, we write a simple formula, here I write 10 * 2 = t this multiply by this enter so basically 10 * 2 * 20 if I convert 10 into 20 then 200 this is working, suppose I took this data and controlled g, then went to special and after that If I did presse dents and direct only or all levels then did direct only and ok then it told me after doing 10 * 20 this is 200. What is president basically you have it here just give me a minute look at this way you can see like suppose you are here then what is president where is this particular 200 from where did it come from? Multiplied 10 by 20. If you want to remove 200 aya then you can remove it from here. If you want to see the reverse of it then say let’s say where these 20 are being used. If you want to check on what it is dependent on then it is dependent on this. If let’s say you want to see the same thing for 10 then you can do it from here. So in the same way when you have to make a selection then you can also do the selection by controlling g, you will do special, you will do presidents and end. If you do OK, then it has selected both of them. Now suppose here I write 50 here and here I write yours equals to this cell multiply by this cell. So now tell me once that the dependency it has is here also. If I make it 20 here, then see everything will also change, so we have created a dependency. So if I click on sorry dependents from here, then it is dependent on here, okay. If I remove array this President, I go here and click on it, then it is dependent on these. If you are understanding it, then it is okay because we will do it in detail later also, so here what we have to do is remove the arrow once and after that make this selection, then control G, after that go to special and we took President and did it at all level and did OK, then it told me all the dependents. Similarly, if I want to see its opposite, then I did a special control and here I came to the dependents and if I want to check at another level, then the dependents are there, these two values are dependent on some or the other, then it has come to you, so basically whenever you want to see the formation of the formula, where has this particular value come from, from which values has this value come, then you check this. You can do it, okay or here you can also say that we have covered this topic a little bit, which is Trace President and Trace Dependent, if we explore it further then we will do it but it is not so useful, just whenever you want to check, you can also check directly by going to the formula bar, but if you are not able to understand, you have to check that movement, then you can check that movement from here, okay after that you have. Another option comes which is your special, go to you, last sale comes to you, sometimes you do not know where in this whole sheet something is written last, so what can you do, you will do last sale and ok, then here you have this is your last sale, because you must have some entry here, then it told me, this is my last sale, okay , you can jump directly to the last sale, after that you will get more options . You have just done the conditional formatting and data validation. Conditional formatting has not been done. Suppose you have applied some conditional formatting here. I have this data. Let’s apply conditional formatting for once. Here I do control A, after that I go to home, here I take conditional formatting here, here we take the text that content and here we come inside the decker, where it is written decker, it gets filled in red color, then this is what I do now, control A, I do control G. I go to special and I say, do you want to know the conditional format, do you want to know all or do you want to know only, I have done all, that is, if the same is of the same kind, then it will make the selection, do all, then look, it has selected it and given it, where is it applied conditional formatting, then we have it in the whole, when you have applied the condition formatting, then it is in the whole, now the decor is in the whole, now tell me one thing, I will write the decor here, please write the decor. Okay, I have written this wrong, haven’t you written decker, so it is coloring it too, it is not a big deal because we did it with a little selection, we had selected the entire data, so it has given us the selection of the entire data, after that the option you see is data validation, which we have not done yet, so we will do that. And there is also an option for the objects objects. As soon as we insert, there is also an option for the object. If you tab, the pay will be covered there. Okay , so here we have completed our go to and go to special, that too in full detail. Now let us move towards our pay special. So now the topic that comes to you is what is the pay special of pay special. So what is normal special and normal. What is paste? So basically whenever we have taken any data here, we will select it, after that we will control it and if we go anywhere else, we will control it. v If you want to do this then that will also be done and or if you want to press paste directly then that too is done then normal copy paste all two, you have already learned that I have taught that they pick up all the content and bring it to you as it is ditto but now you do not want as it is, do not want normal work, you have to do something different, you just have to bring the formats, you just have to bring the formulas, you just have to bring the notes, you just have to do some more work. In such a case, you can use Pay Special. Well, here as soon as you click on paste and many icons visible here are all Pay Special ones but it is very difficult to understand directly from the icon, hence if you click on Pay Special here, you will get a window like this. Now look at this window, Pay Special is used a lot, so either you go directly from this window. If you do not remember the shortcut, but if you want to remember the shortcut, then control like you used to paste normally. Inside this, you just have to add Alt, then hold Control Alt and just press V, then this special window will come to you, then after that you can do whatever selection you want, so here for once, I will delete it, I do Alt AE A, it is deleted and after that, now we will explore it one by one, what are the options available inside it, I first took some data here, like this is what I did. I have taken control c of the data, I will come here and do control alt v and after that look, first of all, see the above options, no, we will not explore all the options, we will explore only the most important ones, so that is the rest of the things, we will explore. Like, I will tell you what is happening in this thing, but mainly we will see the examples, as many of your important ones are there. First of all, we will see the above options, which is paste the first one. It is all as it is, it should come as it is, which is also being done by control c and control v. So if I have to do the same then why would I waste my time by coming here, I will not directly control c and control v, so there is no use of all here. Okay, so here you do not have to do anything with it. Next formula. Suppose you have a formula inside the data and you want to take it as it is and take it somewhere. There is no formula here right now. It is already there, but can we apply it here? Can we apply it at all? For once, we apply the formula here. If you enter Equals to this Multiply by this amount, then this formula has been applied. Double tap it. Okay, now let’s say you have applied it. A, let’s take it here, copy it and paste it here, so do n’t you get the amount? You have copied and pasted it. Now here you do p special and try control lt vv, sorry v, I didn’t want to do the formula. Okay, I did it. So here you have the formula n3 * o3 o3 * p3 o3 * p3. So see, look at the formula. Here, he has dragged it like n3 * n3 * o3. Here too, he has dragged it in the same way. Formula has brought only the formula, it has not brought the rest of the content. What did you say in it, just bring me the formula, so it has brought the formula but has not brought the rest of the content. What it does here is it brings all the content, there must be some formatting in it, there must be some color in it, anything can happen, it brings everything. Whatever you want to choose, if you want exactly the same thing, you can bring it from there, okay, I select it here. I remove it from Alt HEA. Let’s see next. Next, what do we get? I copy anything for once. After that I go here and do control alt v. Next tells you the value. What does the value say? Suppose, you will learn the random formula in future and you will learn other types of formulas, then what happens in such a case. You can say, assume this is this thing, this is the amount, as soon as I copied the amount. And when I come here and paste it, obviously all the values have changed but I say no, I have to put this amount somewhere in the report or I need this amount somewhere, so what will you do in such a case, you take it as Control C and go to any place where you want to take these values, put Control LT v, then it will convert it into values. See, the values which are there now are extracted from your formula. If it has been extracted from the formula, then that is the formula, you will see in the formula bar, that is the formula, you can see the answer of the formula, so basically, that is the formula, if you convert it into value, whatever you are pasting here, do it in the form of value, if you do OK, then all your values will come, now will it not change, okay, so in this way, whenever you have any data which You want to see that this data never changes because the formula is based on the reference and the reference can change. If any reference changes, your formula will change. So in any case, if you think that you do not want to change your formula, then what you can do is simply convert all your formulas into values. To convert them into values, you can We will select control C, go anywhere here and do control alt v. Like I told you in Got Special also, the alphabet under which there is underline is its key, so its key is v. Values value starts with the v and you press enter, then your values will come here. It is used a lot, that is why I also remember its shortcut key. Personally, you can also remember its shortcut key. Its usage is very high if you correct. You have learned how to use it, look at the features, the features are the same, it is just that how can you apply it on which situation, it is totally up to you. If you have learned that thing, then the work is sorted, then you must remember this thing because it is very useful. Okay, we learned about values. Next, let’s see what we have. We did control C, we did control alt v here, after that comes the format. Suppose I have this same table somewhere else. I want but only want the format, then you can do it, choose the format from here, do OK, then look, the same table has been created here, now I go to scape here, do Alt AE A and remove them, just I wanted to tell you that in this way you can format, there is another way to take the formatting there, if I had to take the formatting somewhere else, don’t trust me, I do not use pace pressure because we have another one. There is an option which is control a and format printer, I would have taken it and just clicked, then this thing would have happened here, okay, so this is it, look at us, there are many ways to do the same work inside Excel, it is up to you which method you remember at that time and which method seems suitable to you, okay, let’s see next, you selected it, did control c, did control alt v, after that comes you Comments and Notes Comments and Notes I’ll leave a comment or two for this Now suppose you have selected all this data and after that you have done control C and after coming here you have done control alt v and you have selected only comments and notes and OK, so wherever there are comments and notes, that selection has come and exactly your comments have also come. Exactly your comments have also come. Now you Wouldn’t you think that all my data should come because you have selected that comment, it takes up a lot of size, as if only the formula had come in the formula, its formatting had not come. If you have selected the comment and notes here, then only those will come. Okay, here you can delete it. Which is Alt A and A. Okay, now I have to delete both of them, so what do I have to do? Obviously, by selecting it and using control g, we can go to special. From here, we can select the notes and do OK, both will be selected , we can press Alt HEA, both will be deleted, then you can use this method effectively, like I just realized that why am I deleting one by one, I can do it together, so I used it and if I did not remember that, then I too would have been deleting one by one, this is what we call. We can use it effectively. Okay, let’s go next. Let us learn that we selected this data, did control C, went here and did control alt v, after that you have validation validation. You have not learned it yet. When we were talking about control G also, data validation came in it also which is go to special. What is data validation? Let me give you a little overview so that you have clarity so that you do not get confused like this. Data validation is not done there either. Data validation is a type of drop down which we create. It is available to us inside the data tab. We will learn to create it. Okay, we will learn it in detail but for now we leave this option. Later you can see. All using source means same, almost same data comes. All accept border means complete data comes but borders do not come. Column width column width. A. Like once I make you click ‘All Accept Border’, OK, everything is there but the borders are not there, you can check it, ‘A. Control Jd. Suppose, you want to make the column width, then you did control alt v, after that, you made the column width. What is the column width? Suppose, sometimes we have data where we have adjusted the columns by stretching them one by one, so now we want that next whenever we create the data, the width of our column. If the width is the same then you have done OK, then see here the party names extra is coming, here also the party names extra is coming and rest of the space you can see is the same, the rate is coming small, so here also the space is small, so in this way you can control the column width, lt v will do next, you have formula and number format, now only formula was going from there, number format will also come, values of number format all. Merging condition formats, as per your requirement, you can use these combinations. This is completely situational. If your situation is like this then you can use it. Next, let us move towards our operations, which is very very very important which will help you a lot in doing any work effectively. Suppose I have all these digits. Okay, now I am not 500 in these digits. To add, these are old, wrong digits are written. 500 is written less or 1000 is written less. If I want to increase it, should I increase it one by one? Should I not increase it one by one? What do you have to do? You have to write 1000 somewhere, okay, you copy it. You can paste this copy here anywhere, so I want to increase all of them or select the one you want to increase. Suppose you have to increase this, this has to be increased, this has to be increased, this has to be increased, this has to be increased, okay, then you do control alt and now you see in the operation, what you have to do is to add, multiply, subcut, divide, divide, you have to add, okay, you do OK, look, this has been added to your values and this is not a formula, this is also the most sorted thing that this is not a formula, so you can immediately It will be sorted and there will be no change. You can delete it later. Yes, there will be no change. Your data will also be updated. Suppose you have to do the same thing here. I have to do 1000 laces, try doing 1000 laces, try control C, in this I selected the entire data, did control alt v, from here I took the substack and after that I did OK, then look, the value has been substacked, I selected it, put it here with the format printer and delete it, what difference does it make? Similarly, now in the multiply one, I can take another example like suppose you have the complete cells. Like I will draw here and tell you, this is the sheet of the entire sale. Okay , now the empty cell will not be written in the sale. The sales return will also be written. Now here the amount of one sale is written. The amount of one return is written. Now here you have to calculate the net sale. Now tell me one thing about the net sale. There will be cell minus one SR. And your sheet here is the sheet. It may be of first second, third entry sale, fourth entry may be of SR, fifth six. But there is a difference that in front of the sale, something is written as ‘SAIL’ and ‘SR’ is written in front of it, ‘SR’ is written in front of it, so now in such a case, how do you mean that you have calculated the net sale here? In such a case, suppose I leave the pay sale positive here and put a minus in front of every sale return, then it is automatically plus minus minus, it will become minus when the final calculation is done. If you understand what I am saying then that is the last calculation. If you have to convert something into minus, then how do you do it? This is just one scenario. In any scenario, if you suppose you have to convert something into minus, then how to do it. Now let’s see what you have to do. Do you know that plus minus is minus and if you multiply any number by one, then only one will come, that is, sorry, only that number will come. So you write -1 somewhere. Okay, after that you copy the entire data. Select control alt v do v do sorry v don’t do this I have got into a bad habit this is good multiply ok do it then see all these numbers multiply these will be in minus. How did all the numbers become in minus? Now you have this, you can also delete -1. Similarly, if you have to divide something then you can also divide. Suppose you want to divide all these by 10 or by 100 . So what you will do is control C, select control TV and from here select divide and do OK, so in this way these are your numbers, okay I selected it, did Alt H app and selected here, okay why did I do Alt H f p, you should know this, I am not telling you right now, you should know okay, so here we have completed it, even after this we have one or two options left like you have this data. In what format is the data? If you are seeing headings inside each column, then this is the data. I can say that it is in vertical format. In which format, if you wanted to make this same data in horizontal format, then in what way could you have made it. So see what you will do, you will select this data, you will do Control C, you will go anywhere and do Control Alt v. One, if you have to work on all the data, then All and what you have to do is Transpose Pose, which means the data. It will be in a different format than the one in which it is, like if it is vertical, it will become horizontal. If it is horizontal, it will become vertical. So, if you did the transpose ok, then look, now the data is the same, y 269 591 -11 28 is the same, it is 1479, it is the same, it was in the vertical format, it came in the horizontal format, okay, so this was yours, I will get your transpose option . Let us write 1000 and 365 963 853 963 1000. Okay, suppose you have some data which has some blanks inside it and what will come inside those blanks is written in a separate data. Suppose it is written here 635 965 and 523. Now you want that these values should come inside these blanks, then how will you do it, you do not have to do anything. Selection has to be done here because like this then it will take time. If someone starts writing here manually or by applying formula, something will have to be done, then something or the other will have to be done in it to fix it, so in such a situation, what can you do, you do one thing, select this data, whatever data is equal to it, select all the data, select control C, now come here do control alt v and after that do skip balance and do OK, then see 635 has come here. 965 is here, 523 is here, now delete these values if you want. Your data has been completely updated. Blanks of skip balance means that the blanks have been filled as per the data given by you, but remember that your data should be next to those blanks, only then the cell will understand that wherever there are blanks, I have left them and I will fill the rest of the data here. So, suppose you have written 635 here, then it will clash from here, then if it will not be able to do it, then this is a little. There is definitely a bit of a draw back but yes when such a situation comes then you can use it. Now let me tell you one more most effective thing. Okay, I create a little space here, just give me a minute. We have to create space here, so control plus shift right does not work. I take it, do control C and control v below here. Exactly the data has come. Now suppose you want some data where the data at the second place and the data at the first place change. If I do this, if the data gets changed at another place also, then we can do this work directly without any formula, so what will you do, like suppose I have taken this data, I did control C, here now I will do control alt and not, and here below there is an option of paste link, you do it, now not only data comes inside it, formatting is not available, what can you do for formatting, select it, click on format printer and it comes from here now. Suppose I have made it 100, then see it has become 100. Here, suppose I have written Tanu single. Tanu is here. I am writing anything. No, see, changes are happening here. I have deleted them here, so see here, they have become zero. Here I set the control, so the value has come here too. So basically, the changes that are in our first will be in the second. Will the changes that we do in the second be in the first or not? Because this data has come from data one to data two. Data two has come from data one, so the changes that happen inside it will reflect the same changes here but the changes here will not reflect here. Okay, so you have to be a little careful and in this way you can do this thing. So here we have completed, we have completed all the features on the special, now let us move ahead. Next topic comes to you, find. And replace has the same function as its name suggests. First of all, where is it found? Find and replace is found by going to the Home tab or Find and select. Now you can see that there is an underline under F in front of Find, so we can also find with control f. The second thing, let me tell you, first of all, this feature and the next thing is that there is a formula for find and there is also a formula for replace. Okay, so what we are going to do here is that we are going to feature. We are not going to do formulas here. Okay, what is find? Basically, if you want to find something inside the entire worksheet, then he can do it, or if you want to find something inside the entire workbook, then he can do it. The second thing is that you have to decide, see, first of all, what to do, either you do journalize control, then it will be done in everything or if you want to find something inside the particular data, then select that data and after that, like I did, select this data. I have done control f and after that look, this find and replace are together, so if you do not remember the two shortcuts, because the shortcut key for replace is not control r, because with control r, then we fill right, it is control h which is our replace, so if you remember control f also, then it is fine, then you can go to replace here. Okay, what is the find in find, for example, you have to find. Where to write crafts, so where to write crafts, so I have written C is big, craft is written, okay, window is going to remain the same, so we will keep the window as it is, after that see what option do you have now, we will not do any formatting right now, we are trying to do normal work, first thing with in means where to search, do we want to search in this entire sheet or in this workbook, we want to search in the sheet, we took the sheet, search by everyday, go to everyday. Look, go to the column column and see, so we are fine in the daily routine, we have to check in the formula, we have to check in the values, there is nothing like this in the notes, let it be as it is, match case, what is the meaning of match case, the case which I have written means C must be big, r must be small, A must be small, in this way match case has to be done. What does not match the entire cell content like suppose now if I put any color in it then it should be exactly the same as it is? I want to do the normal one for now so I did find all then it told me that in the more basic feature in the sheet with find and replace, Bharat Craft is written inside this cell, so look you can see here, this is the Bharat Craft, it has also brought the cell here, if suppose I write crafts here. Even if I give and then do find all, it is finding because we have not turned on match case here. Now I turn on match case, now I do find all. What is saying is we can’t find what you are looking for because here you can see all the numbers are in small letters but we have made them in capital letters here. Now I remove it and then I do find all. So look, it is fetching me if let’s say I am a workbook. And after that I do Find All, then he told me at different places where this is written, so look, P is also written here, it is also written in the condition formatting section, so wherever this is written, he told me all of them. Okay, if I had done match case and did Find All, then it is saying that it is not there anywhere. Suppose I am here, you understand its meaning, right? I do this and did control A, did control F, and after that now I search. When I do Find All, then look, it has searched and told me because now this graft is in capital letters, okay, so in this way you can find out anything, you can find out anything, it means if you are not able to find something, there is a number, there is a name, you have found out and now you have to find that thing, then what will you do, you can use control F and find any thing inside your data, after that you get the thing that let’s say you have this. Is it Craft? You have to write something else in its place or Creations have to be written instead of Creations. Ok, if you want to change anything then first either find it and then change it or you can directly replace it. You do the same thing, you press Control H and it opens directly to the replaceable one. In the other wise, you can also go to Replace with Control F. The thing is the same, okay, first of all we need to find Craft, that is, Find Vt means in whose place you have to go. I have to make changes. I have to change the logistics solution of the bytes. I have written the solution here. OK, my caps luck was on. The solution is fine. Match case is also fine. I have done that, remove whatever case or match case, remove the match case. If you feel like I do, something is written differently everywhere, then you can turn on the match case, otherwise you can remove it. Now I have to replace it. From the solution, I have done the solution and if I want, look here, find all, where are they, because it was a workbook, I should have done the sheet, and when I came here and find all, then these two solutions are written, and now I want to replace all, then it is saying that two replacements have been done, and look, now these are the solutions here, earlier there were solutions here, okay, so in this way you can also do the replacement. It is very easy, first inside Find What, write what to change, which word to change, and inside replace with, write what you want to change. Okay, ok, let’s do one more thing. Suppose, I take some random data like this and inside it, I gave any color like this, gave it yellow color. Now suppose I am not liking it, I am not liking this yellow color, so I selected this data, did control H and then After I replace, first erase these, erase them because then they will cause problem. Format set means we can also search the formatting. If suppose I will search and tell the formatting first, after that I will replace and tell. Suppose I just want to know where my data is written in yellow. So what will you do? You will go here to format and from here go to fill, choose yellow color and do OK and find. All sorry, sorry, sorry, sorry, find all, so it told me where all my data is in yellow, you can see, it has made a selection here and told about all of them, okay, I accidentally replaced all of them with only the empty one, so I do it again, it got clicked by mistake, after that let’s control A, like suppose I had accidentally replaced it and this replaced one was empty here and here. There was no format on it, so that’s why he left those cells empty. Okay, so you can understand how effectively it works. Now suppose wherever there is yellow color, what have I given in the Find What? Now I have to replace it with something, so I can replace it. I checked the change here. Let’s take the green color and go to the font and make it bold. Make it white. Then the preview will also come and it will look like this. If you do replace all then see that your entire data has been replaced, wherever it was in your yellow color, it has made changes there. You do not have to do anything, you go to control A and see, if you write something, it will appear here that you want to make a change, then do it here, but if you want to change some formatting, then do it here. Now see, whatever is written is also visible first, now it is already visible here, now what do I have to do from here first, in clear format, this is green. If I want to change this too then I took it here fill green font bold and I have to change this thing ok and what to change inside the format I just have to change the fill color to red ok rest is ok so I did replace all, now I am not able to find it out because even I have not understood what is formatting so I chose format from the cell, I took it from inside this cell ok replace all then it did six replacements. Now we know why it has done six replacements because there is date format inside it, we had told it what is this format, it is journal color, not only colors are formatted, your numbers are also formatted, now like here it is, it is a number format in itself, it is a different format, so it did not change, here it was text, here there were formats, it changed it, okay, so here it should have changed these also, we converted them into values. Okay, so in this way you can use Find and Replace very effectively. You can change anything anywhere, whether it is your value text or any kind of formatting. So here we have completed our Find and Replace and Find and Replace. As soon as I complete the Find and Replace, I can say that the major thing which is our home tab, we have almost completed the home tab. Now we We will move towards our basic formula because it is very important to do that. As soon as we get the formula, our grip in Excel will get stronger, so now let us do our formula. We are going to start the formula from the statistic formula. First of all, you get the sum. You have already done it. I told you about its shortcut key, so you will enter Alt equal to two here, then you will see that your sum has come and just double tap. You can drag it from here and just double tap it, then you will see your answers. Now let’s talk about the average. What is the average? First of all, I will tell you another way to calculate the sum. Like we did it like this, here we get the sum, here we also get the average and we also get the count and this is the formula we are going to apply. Secondly, all these formulas are going to be applied in the same way as the sum is calculated, only your calculation will change. What is the average? As you might have heard, now let’s see, RF Sharma has 90 in one. He is very good but in English he has 27, in Maths he has only 10 and in Science he has 47, so on an average, how many marks does A R V Sharma have? It is very normal. Let me give you an example, like if you watch cricket, if you watch this sport, then you know that there are six balls in one over, now it can happen. On some balls he may have hit a six and on some balls he may not have done anything, then after that an average comes that how many runs we have scored in a particular over, so that is the average which we are going to calculate here. If you want to calculate the average, you will apply the formula Equals to Average tab, after that number one, number two is coming in the same way as it comes in the formula of even, that is why now we will give the range here. No, the reason is because we have already done the sum, so why are we giving the range here, you enter it, after that you can double tap from here, you will get all the answers, you can check whether this is the correct answer or not, you take your number here, see how much is its average, see, this is the answer here, after that you get the maximum minimum, maximum minimum means this. Suppose you have these four subjects of RO Sharma There are marks and now you want to know how many maximum marks he got and how many minimum marks he got. The method of applying them is exactly the same, just what you have to do is to write the sum directly, what is there in the average, what is there in the average, you have to write the average directly, but in maximum and minimum you have to remember one small thing that what we call maximum in short is max, then whatever formula is given will be called max and what we call minimum in short. If there is Min, then the formula used here will be Min formula, so here we will tap equals to max, this is also saying the same thing, number one, number two, number one, number two, means we have to give the range, enter it, it will give it, it will tell what is the maximum, see, if you do not give the correct range then no matter how correct the formula is, the formula will be called wrong, if the range itself is wrong then you will get wrong answers too, hence you have to give the range carefully. Ok, let’s set the minimum, tap as per your wish, after that, take all the numbers and enter, then your minimum will also come from here and just double tap it, then you will get the answer from here, you can check, like suppose I check in this only, then which number is your biggest inside this, 74 68 27 32 74, then your answer is 74 and which is the smallest, which is 27, so come here. Gaya Your 27 Okay, so here we have done four formulas, what is the sum average, maximum and minimum, let’s move forward to the count, we will have to learn things inside the count, a little bit, so we take a sheet of three here and call it statistics here, okay, we delete it, here we come with the three, so we bring it here, so that’s what we have with the three, let’s go now, what are we going to understand in the three. We are going to understand the three formulas and how they work, we are also going to understand which formulas are we going to do here, are we going to do the count formula, what is the count basically, we are telling you by counting, we are telling you by counting, so look at the data you have in the count, what are the things you have inside the data entry, either you have numbers or you have text or characters, I can speak text or characters, okay so. What all do you get inside the numbers? Some values come , whatever the values are, or you get the date, or your percentage, or your time, that too is written in the format of numbers or I have already written your date. Okay fine, so we count all these things inside the number. Whatever is left inside the text goes inside the text. Also, I can write this, the non-MT cell which is empty is empty inside it. So if there is nothing, then we can say non MT cell or text or character, it goes, so suppose you have some data here, there is some data, there is a list and inside it, number, text, number, text, some empty text is also given, now you have to check how many numbers are there inside it, then you can apply count formula, if you want to know only the numbers, then what does Count A do? Count A also counts the things with count and also counts the things with text, like I will tell you a small one. Let me tell you this in tabular form. See, if I talk about count, I talk about count a and then I talk about count blank. These are the three formulas that I am going to give you here. Okay, see what count does for you. Count only counts numbers. Date percentage time counts these. Count a counts whom. It counts all the things that count, what count formula does, apart from that and text. Character or I can say non MT cell but at the same time count black like its name is how many blanks are there so call it blank cell or call it force or call it MT cell it counts it okay so now see we will see it according to the formula meaning we will see it by applying a practical formula so that there is better clarity Now I want to know what to know here how many if we assume this is the marksheet of my marks if I have to just count the numbers if I am here I will count the number and here it comes, four is four numbers are written, that means I have done all the entries, right, if I have written three, then that means either there will be some text there or it will be MT, only then it is showing three, it means we need to check, so in this way, you can apply it in any situation, we have tabbed the count, inside it, just did not write the number and wrote the value. The method of applying is exactly the same, you have to give the range, you have to enter, three numbers are written, now double tap it, now where it is two, you have understood that the person in front has given only two papers, that is why all the marks obtained in the exam are written, the rest are not written, whereas when it comes to count A, see here you have understood, we have to check only the numbers, when it comes to count A, now count A will also count the numbers and It will count the text also. Suppose someone is absent, if he has written absent, then if he has written that text, then he will count that too. In such a case, what result did you get? Did you get the result that I will come to know that I have not entered by mistake? If I have entered, whether marks have been written or absent, I have entered but if I have not entered somewhere, then I will know, that is why we have the formula of Count A. We will put it here, we will give range to him and he will enter, then here he told me that there are four entries, so now I know as soon as I see three entries here, that there is no entry here, seeing three entries here, I realize that there is no entry here, as soon as I see three entries, I realize that there is no entry here, why is it not because, either see, I must have written the number, if any student has come, his marks must have been written, if someone has not come, then I must have written absent for him, but in some case, I If nothing is written then that is my default and this count is one which is telling me the numbers as well and is also telling me the text. The count is only telling me the numbers. Now the count is blank, it will tell you the blanks, tab it, hit enter, then here it has told you that wherever there were blanks, it has told you that only these three will be blanks. So looking at this from here, you get a lot of things. See what the count blank means. Zero is blank, four is blank, that is, all the entries are there, out of which three are numbers, one is your text, see, there is no blank here, four entries have been made and all four are numbers, here one of yours is blank, three entries have been made and all three are numbers, here you have one blank , three entries are made and all three are numbers, even after looking at this, I have not even seen it, trust me, I told you just by looking at this, what is here You must have kept the entries because whatever formula you apply, the result comes out in the same way. You can find out all these things from that result, that is why we apply any formula, so here we completed our four formulas, these were Sum Average, Maximum and Minimum and the other one which we completed, which is count, count A and count blank. After this, we move ahead with our cell referencing. Cell Referencing: What is cell referencing? Basically, till now, whenever I had taught you the formulas, I had explained one thing in the formula, what I had explained was that the formulas which start with equal to two, how do we write them, so for once, let us repeat that thing once so that you can remember the thing and understand why we learn cell referencing. Here we are basically looking at the answer to why we are doing this. We are going to talk about the topic, why are we doing cell referencing? Okay, so see, whenever we write a formula, we write three things inside the formula. We will write three things inside the formula. One is where we write the cells, one is where we write the numbers and one is when we write the text. The cells which are there are always keep changing. Now what is the meaning of keep changing? It will keep changing as we drag, as if something like a1 is written above and When I drag, it will be a2 a3 a4 a5. What are the numbers? What are the numbers? They are fixed. If you write a number, like we learned in Total, if you write a number, then that number remains as it is and the text also remains fixed. Whatever you have written manually, how will you write the number and text manually? If you write by giving a cell, then it will go into keep changing, that is the cell. If you manually write any number and text, then they are always fixed. Okay, one more thing is added to the text. Whenever you write in a formula, you write it inside a double inverted comma. You do not write it directly. Whenever you write a text inside a formula, you write it in a double inverted comma. Now tell me one thing, the number is fixed, the text is fixed, it is keep changing, so suppose I have any such reports etc. She has to make a place If I have applied the formula, will I keep applying the formula everywhere because sales are ever changing and suppose I ever have to fix it, if there is such a situation, then we have to fix it, then we can fix it, but we can fix it manually, we will have to fix it separately, when to fix it, when not to fix it, what is the need to fix it, this is the learning we call sale referencing that we do in this way. We will learn when we have to fix our cell, when not to do it, why we have to do it and how to do it. We learn all these things inside cell referencing. So now you have understood that we will learn in cell referencing. In cell referencing we are learning that when we have to fix our cell and when we have to keep it in keep changing. Okay, now let us take the topic of referencing a little further. Cell referencing. Okay, let’s talk about cell referencing. How many types of cell referencing do you have? There is no need to remember it but as a la for general knowledge or if you understand these few topics then you will understand things in a little detail. Just for that there are three types of reference. The first one is relative reference, the second one is absolute reference and the third one is mixed reference. Okay now what is relative reference ? What you are talking about till now in reference is relative reference, meaning keep changing. Whatever I will talk about here, I will talk about sales, I will not talk about numbers and taxes about anything else, I will talk about sales because whatever work we are doing, we are doing it for sales, so what comes under relative reference, keep changing, it will keep changing. What is there in absolute, fix everything, fix everything. This is what we were going to talk about in referencing, what to fix and when to keep changing, then in relative, always keep changing, in absolute, everything has to be fixed, now what is mixed, what is mixed and mixed means it does relative plus absolute, now both are fighting among themselves, change everything, no, fix everything, no, change everything, fix everything, so now me. Tell me the solution to this. If there is a fight between these two, then what will be the solution? Tell me, if one person is saying everything, I just want to explain, one person is saying change everything and another person is saying fix everything, then in such a situation, if you have to give a solution, what will you give? Fix half of the solution and keep half of it changing, otherwise what, do 50 50 brother, half of you agreed. Half of yours, assuming the work of both is done, then we call such a reference a mixed reference. Lad, this is a part of the theory. You may be wondering why we are reading all this but it is very important. Now, as soon as we do the practical, you will say that it has come out so lightly and it is very important to learn it. You will understand why it is so important now. Let’s do one more topic. After that, we will move towards the practical. What is the small topic and what is the topic? It comes that you just have to remember one thing, this is a cell, this is a sieve cell, so C is the column and one is the raw and what does a cell get? It is formed by R in the column plus and when we give a cell inside a formula, we give a cell inside the formula, then the names of the complete cells come, you will see that if you apply the formula of sum, then a1 to a10, then those are the names of the complete cells, you just had to keep this in mind, now let’s move towards the formula. After that, you will understand all these things. We come inside the cell reference. The first thing that comes to us is the relative reference. What does the relative reference say? Look, I have to put the sum here. Tell me the way to put the sum. Here, how can I put the sum? I can put it by doing Alt equal to two, I can enter and double tap it. The answer will come. Till now we have not put so much mind into it, now we will put a little bit of mind into it so that we can understand what is happening and what should we do. Have understood this thing, what had to be done till now has been done, but the thing has been understood, which cell is your h3, what is your h3, what is the even you want inside h3, what is the even you want, what is the even, you want from d3 till g3 here, okay what is this h4, what is the even inside h4, what is the need from d4 to g4, then what will come, h5 will come, then what will be the even, from d5 to g5 and so on. Suppose I reach h100, then what will I want, what will be the even, what will be the d. 100 to g100, tell me one thing, the h3 here is also changing, h3 h4 h5 h and along with that, the simal new, along with that, you are seeing that d3 d4 means along with that, these are also increasing, so what is this whole scenario? So when the whole scenario is changing, we have to change, so we don’t need to fix anything, that’s why what we were doing here was taking the formula and double tapping and my formula was being applied all over the place, you see d3 to g3, if suppose you are on h9, then this is d9 g9, if you suppose you are on h16, then d16 and g16, so there was no need here, now we will do one more. Let’s take an example, which is going to be our absolute reference, so see, we are going to calculate the percentage of these marks within the absolute reference, so here you learn two things at the same time and also calculating the percentage, but my main focus will be to teach you cell referencing, along with that, learning the percentage will become automatic, okay, so let’s first understand how to calculate the percentage, okay and then Later we will understand this scenario a little with the study of A. Suppose there are students here, let me make five students, this is your A student, this is your B student, this is your C student, this is your D student and this is your E student, okay now here the marks of A student are 200, marks of B student are 300 marks of C student are Marks of 350 students came to 250 and end marks came to 275. Okay, these marks have come. Now suppose you have to find out the percentage of all these students and how many subjects they study. If they study four subjects, then how do you have to find out the marks. What is the formula of percentage? What does Total Marks Obtain mean? The number of marks obtained, so let us put the number on the right and upon. There is an exam of total marks, we will keep it below, now tell me one thing, how many are going to be below the total marks A, 400 because there are four subjects, one subject is of 100 marks, then you will have to see the marks above 400. If suppose I calculate this percentage of A for A, then how will I calculate it, then how do I calculate the percentage for A, 200 / 400 * 100, so here is my Now here we are in Excel, so even if we do not put 100, it will be fine because we have applied the format of percentage. If I calculate the total percentage for b then how will it be 300 / 400. If I calculate for c then how will it be 350 / 400. If I calculate for d then how will it be 250 / 400 and if we calculate here for e then what will come out is 275. / 400 So tell me one thing for everyone, we have calculated the percentage in this way and you have come to know how to calculate this percentage, now we will travel a little, whatever we do, we should do a little traveling in it, we will understand the things, let’s travel, let’s travel for a second, so first of all, what did you take, first of all, what do you have to take, the number of any individual, then it means you took the marks, okay and the marks were taken for a, tell me one thing. So there is a different mark for B. There is a different mark for C. There is a different mark for D. There is a different mark for E. So what are the marks? Keep changing and keep changing is happening again and again. What is the keep changing thing? Cell number text. You can write these three things in your formula. What is the keep changing? If it is in the cell, then it means to choose the cell. Here, OK for divide divide. We have put slash below we need total marks total marks how many are there 400 here how many are 400 here how many are 400 here how many are 400 here and how many are 400 here so that means is a fixed thing now tell me one thing we can write three things in the formula we can write cell we can write number and we can write text 400 text is there otherwise this one gets cut off now let’s talk about these two The number is always fixed. The number is always fixed, so either we write the number directly or we write a cell which we have to fix manually. In both the scenarios, our answers will come because what we need is to fix that number below, that’s why we can write the number below or we can also give a cell. Okay, so now we will apply our formula in both these scenarios and find out our answer. Let’s do it here. First of all, I take the total, Alt equal to enter and after that I double tap here, so here our totals are here, now it comes to the percentage, first of all we will do it, which is the easy way, whatever we know is fixed, we will write the number, it is always fixed, so we do the same, so equals to, first of all, we will have to take the marks because we knew the thing. The marks are being changed, we have taken the comma, sorry slash, after that what will we write, we will write our 400 and enter, then see you have got the percentage, just double tap it, see, double tap, we are able to do h32, for here obviously we need h33, so we will do h33 because it is in the keep changing, now you know but suppose I say that we have this cell, marks are written inside it and now we We are going to calculate this percentage through cell, that is, I put equals to total here and slash it and after that I give this cell and hit enter, still my percentage is correct, now I double tap, so do we have all the percentage here? No, why is it not there because if I double tap the number g30 in the divide, then it will go to the key changing. Now after g30. Is it g31 ? Is it science? If you divide it by science then only the value will come. Do you divide it by 34? Will you divide it by 37 47 93? See, the values will come in the same way because it is keep changing. Look, after g31, it becomes g31, g32 becomes 33, then tell us one thing that you should not do this. Even if your answer is here, whatever you have to write, take it as h. You have to write h32 diva ba g30, you are here, suppose this is your h36, still divided by g30 is required, you assume this here, suppose your h is 42, still divided by g30 is required, then g30 is g30 g30, below everyone else is g30, you know this thing, everyone needs 400 below, so what will you do in such a situation, you will fix g30, now let’s learn how to fix it, this small thing. The concept is that we will learn how to fix any thing, here we come to our third part and from here we will learn how we fix. Suppose you have to fix any thing, any thing has to be fixed, we are learning to fix the cell. Inside the cell, let me assume there is a cell, then I will tell you how to fix these two. Look, the symbol used for fixing is dollar, now dollar is also above the fourth key, so Do not put dollar manually with shift, you have to press press f4 and there are some systems in which f4 will not work. If f4 is not working in your system, then hold the function, press and hold the function and then press f4, then it will be okay. a is also fixed and one is also fixed that means column is also fixed raw is also fixed the thing which has dollar in front of it is fixed like suppose if I write dollar a1 then here what you fixed fixed this column now when you drag it what will come # a2 is sorry # I am saying dollar a3 dollar a4 a will remain fixed if suppose I write a one then now when this would happen when now this What would have come if we had dragged? If we had dragged, what would have come? If suppose I am dragging it from this side, then it would have come ‘Bud 1 S Dove D Dove’. Why because I have not fixed ‘A’ then ‘A’ will keep changing but if I have fixed ‘One’ then it will remain ‘One As It Is’ so basically the thing which has a dollar in front of it becomes that thing. Okay, so here you don’t memorize it. What do people do, they memorize it so many times? If you press f4 then just dollars should come here. Hey why should they come and why should it be fixed? We have to learn this. Now we will apply the formula again inside the cell reference. See equals two, we will take our marks and divide. Now we need g30. Tell me one thing in g30 whether I have to fix g or fix 30 or fix both. Let’s see, you press f4, you tell me one thing, g30 was required completely no matter which cell. Go in, you wanted divided by g30, then g has to be fixed and 30 also has to be fixed, so I took the cell, pressed F4, dollars appeared in front of both, that means both are fixed, just double tap it and in this way your answer will come, okay, in this way we can fix our cells, it is very important not to memorize at all , if there is any data doubt anywhere, please let me know in the comment section, it is okay Let us now move towards the third reference, now you have come to relative, absolute has come, then mix has come, okay, there is no need to panic, but still we will do it a little more carefully. Okay, if you have understood this one, then after this you will be able to make any kind of formula for yourself. Here too, if we have to find out the percentage, then percentage. You already know the method of calculation, so here we will calculate the percentage, take equals to marks, divide by 400, write whatever you want, take this, take this and fix it with f4, you know I want the whole cell, so you have fixed g61 here, now enter, after that you double tap, you will get the correct answer, now you have the next thing, this is a case study in the way. We divide our marks by the total number of marks, in the same way I say that what is my percentage of Hindi within this 189, what is my percentage of English within this 189, so if you want to find out something like this, then you will have to apply the formula here, now like what we were doing there, we keep as many marks as we got, above, so that means, if I have 41 marks in Hindi, then I will put above in And Upon. The total marks here is how much is the total marks 189 so I will keep 189 ok next this is your Hindi, after that you have to find out English then 39 diva is 189 after that 75 / 189 then find out like this now look what is 41 41 is your d3 so basically what are you doing d3 divided by what is your h63d was 63 this and upon In h 63 if we talk about next then d63 / 63 divide by h 63 that means your h 63 is fixed h 63 is coming in everyone everyone needs it otherwise if you drag then it should remain fixed that h 63 is coming in everyone so let’s now apply the formula so we will apply the formula here How many marks are there in Equals to Hindi this is the comma because d63 Then e63 then f63 so it is changing but the one below is h63d 63 / h 63 should have been this e63 / so look here also here also h is 63 if I assume that I am going here then here also h is 63 tell me one thing if you have to do this for 27 75 68 79 then will you check according to 189 then you will make it for 249 According will check the meaning, understand the meaning of this , it means that suppose you were doing this one here or this one here, f e your 73 so what you wanted here is 73 divided by h 73 if I talk about this then what do you want here d69 upon h 69 if I talk about this then what do you want d65 h65 and now yes ya to hindi ka nikala ka karenge then f65 / h65 so In this way it will keep increasing, so now I understood one thing that it is true that here we need h 63 but here again we need h 64, here we need h65, here we need h66, that means this h is remaining fixed 63 64 65, these are changing, so do not fix the thing which is changing, right now you have fixed both of them in the formula, that is why the problem is coming, don’t fix them at all. We do not fix the things which are in keep changing, that is why now we will apply the formula here again, so see, you remove this and after that apply the formula, take equals to marks, divide, now we will take 189, h will take 63, we will press f4 so many times that we get the desired desired result. Now what is our desired result that we have to fix h. But do not fix 63 because it will become 64, 65 will become 66 , then keep pressing f4, keep doing this until the dollar appears in front of h. No one will remember whether to press two times or three times. If you are remembering this, then you will not be able to make any formula by yourself, that is why this is being done in such detail so that you can make the formula by yourself, so here you are wondering why h. Why is 63 not being fixed and if h has to be fixed then dollar should come in front of h then just keep pressing F4 as many times as the dollar comes in front, I see, I press it again, I am gone, it is coming on both, it is coming in front of 63, that means 63 is fixed once more, it is done, no memorization, it has to be done like this, enter it, now you drag it, drag it. After check below this 63 63 h 6363 correct and now drag it for a second now look I am here I this is your g70 so h70 is coming below d70 it is not so h 63 is here h70 is coming here so h is 74 is coming that means now your answers are absolutely accurate so what did you do here you fixed half of it and left half of it so it is the same It was when I explained to you in the mixed section that half should be fixed. What is the solution? Fix half of it and leave the other half for keep changing. Okay, so this is what we have done here, so this is where our cell referencing ends. If there is any doubt anywhere, please let me know in the comment section. In the live class, we do it in a lot of detail, but we know that here we have a little restriction of time, so here we have done it in as much detail as we wanted. Still, if there is any doubt, please let me know in the comment. Section and let us move ahead towards our next formula, so now the formulas that come to you are tax formula, how are tax formulas which are related to tax and let me tell you one thing about these formulas, all the formulas that you will see are very easy to apply, without doing anything, we have just told the text that if we want to make any change then in which text we have to make it but then what is the difficulty in it . So there is nothing but you have to keep in mind that whenever you have a situation, you should remember that this formula will be applied in this situation, the challenge is only that we have to remember that oh we have this situation, now we have to apply this formula, there is no problem in applying, it is very easy to apply, okay, first of all we will directly take the three formulas together and talk about the three formulas. Okay ma’am three yes yes three suppose you have some data like this a one let’s take some data here ok suppose you have some data here I write abc 1 2 3 xyz this is your ID some code is written now suppose you take this abc from inside it each meaning here there are 100 entries from inside that you want to extract the initial three words you understand this we can extract any text How to read, we read from left to right. Okay, now let me quickly explain from the left side. Now from which side you have to do this extraction. If you have to do it from the left side, then what formula will you apply? Will you apply the left formula? What do you think in the left formula? You will tell from where to extract from. From here, we have to extract from this text. Suppose a1a, so you have written a1, after that how much has to be extracted. A, B, C, three letters. If you want to extract, then you write three here and your answer will come, in the same way, suppose you have to do 11 will come at number 9 10 11, that’s fine, so you will not be able to extract it, how will you not be able to extract it, because it will go from left to there, you cannot write this, extract the number nine, if you write nine numbers, it will extract all the numbers and give it, then you cannot apply the left formula from here, you cannot go from the left side, now from which side will you go, you will go from the right side,

that is why what formula will you use? You will put right, now when you go from the right side, what will you get , which number is it on? One, first tell me which text you want to change, you have to change it in a1 and on the right side, how many texts do you want, if you want three, then you have done three, then your answer will come to you, third comes to you, what does mid say in the middle? It says in the middle and if there is a middle, then we will not decide the middle, that means it will not decide the middle itself, we will tell you which middle has to be decided. middle you left right if you don’t remember both then middle can also work ok what do you do in middle first of all tell which text you have to change a1 has to be changed then tell where will be the start from where will be your middle start from suppose I am starting from 1 2 3 4 four so I have made four after that how many extractions do you have to do let’s say 1 2 3 three If I want to extract, I made it three, then my answer will be 1 2 3. Okay, so the middle works in this way. It’s totally up to you, what you have to extract, depends on your situation, what you have to extract and according to that, you will apply your formula, so let’s apply the formula. See, here we will go to the formula. We will apply the left formula for ourselves. To apply the left formula. We will write equals to left, tab ups, we will tap equals to left, we will give text, we have come here, comma number charge, which is written Na C H A R S, its meaning is How many characters will you go here, how many characters will you have to take from there, you have to take a, you have to take r, and you have to take that dot, I told you that here the spaces are counted, so you have to take m, you have to take r, you have to take that dot, then how many numbers have become, they have become three numbers, you will enter three, so here it is, now you double tap all the initial numbers that you have, they are there in keep changing. You already understand that, but you have got all of them, okay, just like that, now suppose I have to extract all this from the right side, M A O K L M So look, it has come with a dash, I said no, it counts, okay, you read it, Oops, Oops, Oops, I’m so sorry, I’m so sorry, you double tap it, you will get all the answers. Let’s talk about the middle, what do we call the middle in short, when we say mid, then the formula you think is the mid formula. Equals to mid tab. After that, the text will come. What will the text come? Here is your text, okay, this is your text, this is what it means in which. We have to make changes. If we have to make changes inside this text , then this text came. Comma start number, start number, what does it mean, where to start that middle, then a One second, how many characters do you need, comma four, okay, enter 5678 and just tap it, okay, then it would have come to you in this way, if you had done four here, then it would have counted the dashes and given the answer from 5 to 6, because it counts the dashes also, and it starts giving you numbers from whatever you start the middle stew, so you just have to pay attention to this small thing. We have to keep that in the middle, the rest of the things are directly in the left and right, so here we have completed three formulas: The first one is left, the second one is right and the third one is mid. Okay, let’s move next towards our length. If we have to apply the length formula, suppose you have an ID. The ID is written in this way. Okay, you have made 1000 entries and you have the data. Now you want to check whether all the IDs are written correctly or not. Look, if there is any problem in writing, we cannot tell right now how we will check or what we will do. But we know that our ID is only of 12 numbers or 13 numbers only. Just like you know that there will be only 10 digits in the contact details, you know that there will be only 10 digits in the contact details. So suppose somewhere I tell you that here 11 digits are written, here A is written, nine digits are written, then you will not even check what is written, you will tell me straight on the face that it is wrongly written, so this is how you came to know, you checked the length because its length is fixed, the length of the number is fixed, that is, it is of 10 digits, so whatever. If it is of 10 digits, whether it is more or less, then obviously it is wrong, otherwise we check the length in this way. Now we call the length in short. What do we say in our formula? If we say AA lane, then we will put the lane formula here. The suffix was not supposed to come here, we will put the lane formula. Equals to Length tab and what to do in it. Always listen to the formula, do not listen to anyone else, what does the formula say? If you want to take the text, then you take the text, you have taken the text and after that you enter, it will come here and just double tap it, then your complete length will come. Okay, let’s move ahead with this, here we have completed the length, after that comes to you. Trim formula. What does the trim formula tell you? The trim formula tells you that suppose you have some data which has a lot of unwanted spaces inside it. What are the unwanted spaces? I am writing here that there are unwanted spaces, so if you have to remove those unwanted spaces, then now you will sit down and start doing it one by one, then how time consuming is the process, one by one. What will we do in such a case, in such a case, we will apply trim formula here so that all the unwanted spaces will be removed, so you apply equal trim here, tab, after that give that text and hit enter, then in this way all your unwanted spaces will be removed from here. After that, double tap, then all the unwanted spaces there will be removed. Okay, so in this way, when Whenever you get any data, like any data comes from a client, in which data cleaning has to be done, then trim formula is used a lot in data cleaning, because no matter how the data comes out there, suppose sometimes you copy something from the website and bring it from anywhere, then this mistake happens there too, then how can you correct that entire data? You can correct that entire data in such a way that you apply a trim formula and then After this, all your unwanted spaces will be automatically removed. Okay, now let us move towards our next formula, which is not the text formula, we will do the text formula later, after that we will do lower upper and proper. Now what is this lower upper proper? Basically, let me tell you a little because we are going to do three formulas together, let us do a small overview. See here what we are going to do in lower. We will do upper and one we will do what is lower upper and proper one second prop what is lower like your alphabets A B C D this is lower what is upper what is your A B C D this is your upper and what is proper if I have to write tanu then T A N N U S I N G H A L So see the first letter first letter what came first letter capital came and all the other smalls came that is your proper which is your sentence Case, what do we call this? We call it sentence case. If you want lower case, you want all the letters in small letters , then use lower formula. If you want all the letters in capital, then use upper formula. But if you want everything, that is, you can use proper formula. If you want it in sentence case, then you will go here to the text formula. And after that, for a second, look here, all the things are now in sentence case, then you will use small letters. You can do this for small letters, don’t write small, you have to write lower, tap will give the text, meaning what changes are to be made inside it, enter it, then your formula will come and just double tap it, all your formulas have come, in the same way, if suppose you have to do all the things in capital letters , then equals to upper tab, after that you will give the text and enter, then here you have all the things. If it has come in capital letters, then you can convert it to capital letters in this way. When it comes to the proper means sentence case, then already you can see that it is in all the capital letters, so now we have to convert it to sentence case, so to convert it to sentence case, we will apply the formula of equals to proper, tap, after that give the text and enter, then here in this way you will Look, all these things have come in the sentence case, easily the data has come automatically in this manner, so this is what we have completed here, three formulas, the first one is lower formula, the other one is upper formula and the third one is proper formula. Now let us move a little further and let’s see what other things are there. You get tex join flash fill is also of the same. There is an alternative which is not available in every version. It will be available in the versions after 2019. It is very easy and first of all, let us move towards our formula. Suppose you have two types of text and here we will read one more topic, so read it a little carefully. Just give me a minute. Suppose you have two texts here, you have to join both of them, then you can apply the formula like text join. As its name says, its function is also text join, text join, text join, tub came, now read it because I will explain something in it and after that we will apply the formula, first comes the delimiter, then comes the ignore f mt and then comes the text one text two text thi, it goes on. Okay, you have read this, now we will understand it, first after that we will do something, so see, what is a delimiter, it is very important to understand, okay daily pea, this will come in more formulas later on. While going on, understand this very carefully. It is easy to understand. Okay, look, what is a daily pea? It is a thing that joins two things, just like we read in English. Not a conjunction that joins two things. So, in the same way, it is a daily pea. Suppose I write like this Tanu Singhal. Now, there is a space here, a small so t space, what is a daily meter? Suppose I write here tan single, so this is the underscore, what is this daily meter, I write tanu comma single, so this is the comma. What is this delimiter, I write Tanu Sl single, so what is this slash which is there, what is this daily meter, what is daily pea, then what is daily meter, which is connecting any two things, even if there is no space, then space is also your daily meter, okay, you just have to pay more attention to the space thing, that if you put anything because of space, whenever you apply the formula, then you can get confused in the space thing. If yes, then do not get confused in the thing with space, space is also your daily pea. If you want to join two things and there is a space between them, then that space will also be called your delimiter. Okay, now let’s apply the formula here. Equals to takes join tab. After that, we need daily pea. What is daily pea? What have we given daily pea? Suppose R Sharma, how do we want to join it, we want to join it with a space. Okay, now look, I had explained to you that you can either give cell or Then you can give number or text or character along with text, I have said character along with text and character. Right, so the space in text and character is like a character, so whenever we write something in text character, in what thing we write, we write in double inverted comma. Right, then we will turn on double inverted comma. Now for space, we will tell him that if I want a space, then I will give one space, how much space is needed, I will also give one space. Look, sir, I went ahead of him. After this, I will turn off the double inverted commas, I will put commas. Now what are you asking next? True False is never to be memorized. It always happens like this. Whatever formula you are applying, True False is coming in it. Suppose now this data is very small, if later on the data becomes very big and there is an MT cell in between, then do you want it to be ignored or do you want that MT cell to also be included, then there will be a lot of space in between, then what kind of answer do you want? Obviously if it is included, if the MT cell is included then it will become empty, nothing will be shown, then you will make true, false, okay. Now there is comma, text one, text two, then text one, what to add, OK, text two, what to add, enter it, so look here, Aarav Sharma, one is connected to it, if let’s say , I will show this thing by doing it one more time here, text join, don’t get confused, tap delimiter, now I have to add comma, so I put a comma in the double inverted comma, after that I closed the double inverted comma, then put a comma, after that I made true, now you know that this is done twice. Why is the comma coming once again? The comma is to move ahead from that formula and the comma in the middle is for the delimiter. This is called the true sense of the formula that you are able to understand its true sense. Now you are not memorizing the comma and after that you have taken the comma and then the text. If you enter then Rohan comma, okay, it is done in this way. Let us double tap the same formula and come here. Now we have to do a lot of processing inside it too. We had to look at all the things and came up with an easy version of the same, but the easy version works on a little pattern, so we will talk about that also, let us move ahead, we do the same work with flash fruit also. See, any particular work can be done in more than one way in Excel. It is totally up to us that which thing we are remembering at that time, which one we understand better in doing, which one we think is easy and which one we can do in the best way. In that way, we do this work, okay, now where do you get this feature, it is found here in the flash fill inside the data tab, okay, but we will do it with the shortcut key and its shortcut key is control e, what is control e, I write it along with it so that we always remember control e, okay, the flash result works by using control e. Now a little talk about how the flash fill works. And after that we will use flash fill as I told you that the flash fruit works on a pattern like flash f. Okay, now see what is the function of this pattern. It works in two ways, one is input and as soon as we need an output, now we can call input output as question and then we need answer. The thing is the same that you give a question, that means you give an input and from that you get the output, that means you give a question, from that you get If the answer is found, then there should be a pattern in giving the question. There should be similar questions because you need an answer by dragging and there should be a pattern in taking the answer. If there is no pattern then you will not be able to get the answer. The only thing is that if I tell you that after looking at this data then the flash result will definitely work in it. It is possible that the flash result may not work on it, then there is no such guarantee of the flash result but if it If you have understood the pattern then it will give you the answer. If you have not understood the pattern then you will not get the answer. Now let us give you an example of this. Let us assume that you will understand the pattern of the question. Then you will understand the pattern of the answer. What is the pattern of the question that on one side all the first names are there and on the other side are the last names. So are they written pattern wise? Yes, the same work has to be done in all of them, not first name last name first name last name first name last name first name last. Name is something different, something is changing, not changing, neither the pattern means the same, what is the answer to the question, what is the answer, we need Aarav Space Sharma, Rohan Space, Aditya Space, Mehta, Vikram Space, Malhotra, Rajat Space, Bansal, Arjun Space, Thakur, same is required for all, pattern is being formed in the question, and from the same, when we have to extract the answer, a pattern is being formed in it too, so when the pattern is being formed, Will the flash fruit work here? Yes, of course. Now how does the flash fruit work? How does the flash fruit work? You have to give him a command, you give him a command, explain it to him, sometimes it is not possible with one command, then you can also give two commands or three commands, but from my personal experience, I tell you that whenever he had to work, he would do it in one command and when he did not have to work, no matter how many commands you give him, it is okay if he does not work, then you will give him a command here, after giving one command, he will do your work. It will make it automatic and it will understand the pattern, what do you want the answer to be, then the first command we will write here is A. Okay, as you write, it will come A. A. R. A. Correct is to be written. The first command is you have to give correct . If you do not give correct then the answer will not come. Okay, I have given correct and I have given space here Sharma. Now I do not have to do anything. Come to the cell below and press control E and see your yes, see your answer has come, your answer has come, this is the answer for everyone. I wanted, yes, let’s see one more example, suppose it is the reverse of this. Now think what is the pattern here, think what is the pattern here, what is the pattern here, here is the full name, how is the full name also given, there is a pattern in everyone, Arf space Sharma, Rohan space Iyer Aditya space Mehta Vikram space Malotra Rajat space Bansal Suresh space Reddy, so all these are written in a pattern that there is a name, there is a space, then there is a name for them only we know. What is tex split? In my version of tex split, we are using version 2021. It does not have that formula. Inside 365, you will get that formula. What is tex split? Just like we have joined the text, it says to split the tex, so here we will do this work with flash feel, how will we do it, we will give our commands and after that he will understand now what is the command , what do I want Arav here, so here comes Arav. After that, what is the command that I want Sharma here, then Sharma comes here, okay, after coming here, press control e, after coming here, press control e, and this has done your work, okay, so in this way, we can use the very effect of flash fruit, wherever you want to extract any of your things, you have to do anything, you can use your flash fruit there, so this is your flash fill, we have completed it here, let’s do one more formula here. Let’s make some substitutes. Before substituting, we do one thing. We text the text formula. What does the text formula tell you? There is one thing in the text formula which I have taught you very well. It is going to be used here. It is going to be used here. I always say ‘Bo’. Suppose you want this date given. No, which day was it on that date, just like you don’t write your birthday, we write the birth date and you are asked in interviews etc. that which day was that day, tell me which day it was on that day, tell me, if you want to know this, then how will you tell, see, we will apply the equals to text formula, we will tab the value, what is the meaning of the date, the date has to be given, the meaning by which you want to know, you are asking about the comma format, what is the format? You have to know the format of date according to the date, how is the date written inside the date, D D M M Y Y Y or it is written like this. Now if you want to know the day, then that means you have to write DD, but if you want to write the day completely, then how many times can you write it by writing it four times. Now you have understood how many times D has to be written four times. Now what is D in itself? What is D, is it a number, is it a one? What is text? What is that character? What is text? So there is a text and any text is written in double inverted commas. So here you will turn on double inverted commas. Here you will turn on double inverted commas. You will write D D D D. You will turn off double inverted commas. You will turn off parens and enter. So you will get your answer here. Now you can double tap it, you will get all the answers. What did you do, if you wanted to know the days, let’s say. If you want to know the month , then go to Equals to text tab, after that give the value, meaning give your date, in the format of comma, you write four times mmmmm. When you enter the parenthesis off, then look, it has told which month it is – June, September, July, April, July, November, March. So, you have all the months here, so in this way, you want to get the days. You know the format, you want to get the months, you know the format, you want to get the year. Do you want to get the format written, you know the format, you should know the format and now I have got the format done so well for you, so you know the formatting, why we wrote four times D, why we wrote A, don’t memorize it, people here memorize it, write four times D, the answer will come, write four times A, the answer will come three times M, the answer will come, no, the logic behind it. Now you know the logic behind this, why we write four times only, we three. Why do we write only times? Why do we write only two times? Why don’t we do something directly? Why are we writing at all and why have we put double inverted commas in it? Now you know all these things. So here we have completed our text formula. Now let’s move ahead. Now we will do our substitute formula. Substitute formula. We will do it very easily here. What does the substitute formula say? What is a substitute? What is a substitute? What is my substitute? Someone else has come in my place, today I am teaching you Excel, okay, someone else has come in my place, so he is my substitute, someone else can teach Excel in my place, so that is my substitute, if suppose you are not using Excel, you are using G sheet instead, so goel’s has been replaced and in its place, we can use it. Suppose, you can write with a pencil and you can also write with a pen, but if you have picked up a pen instead of a pencil, then what have you done? Is pen a substitute for pencil or is it meant for writing? Yes, both the tasks are being done by it. Yes, there is a difference but what both the tasks do is only for writing. Neither is pen. Pen is the substitute of pencil. In the same way, if there is something inside the data which we want to change, then we can do it with some substitute formula. Then, Equals to Substitute tab. After that, we have to give the text, then which one should be changed. What is the meaning of the text? What type of change has to be done? Do the commas have to be used in it in a single single because there is not the same change in everyone. If there was the same change in everyone then we would have done this. It will not be able to be dragged. Okay, now we have to tell the old text what to change. 56 78 so 56 78 is the number so you can directly write the comma text. What text do you want to write? Let’s say I want to write here 1 2. 3 So I have to write 1 2 3, I have to do something else, if I don’t understand anything else then just finish it, enter the formula, see if the text is apx600, then you will give it in double inverted commas, p, k, r, you will write exactly the same so that it can understand and, what have to be written in its place, suppose you want to write a b c, then you are writing the because text in double inverted commas, right? If you want to write enter then it has written ABC. Okay, so in this way you can replace anything. Replacement here is this one. Why did it mean that we have substituted? Replace is basically a kind of replace but it is not a complete replace thing because we have to do it differently in each case. If you want to replace a particular thing with a particular thing, then you can do that directly. Okay, this was your substitute formula. Now we will move towards our date and time formula and if we are talking about date, then first of all let us learn that the current Which formula is available for date and current time and which shortcut is available? Shortcut: Yes, you can get your current date and current time directly through the shortcut. If we talk about current date, then you will know the current date. Here we apply the formula to get it. Write today’s today formula, tab it and see, I always say, listen to whose formula or listen to the formula, what are you saying brother, nothing else is required, direct parenthesis. Do it, I will give you the answer, then it’s ok, then if he doesn’t want anything, then don’t give it. Turn off the parentheses. If you enter, then the current date will come. Similarly, if you want to get the current time, you can get the current time. For the current time, you have to use the formula of now. I will tab and it also says, I don’t want anything, just turn off the parentheses, so we turned it off and entered, then it gave me the current, okay, I checked today’s time. Have you just put the formula ? Okay, there is a date here, we have to do the time, so look, it has given me exactly the time. You can check the time formula from here. If you make a little mistake in the date formula, if the time and date of your system are not in the correct way because they are captured, then somewhere, how is it able to find out on its own what date it is and what time it is, then suppose anyone’s answer is wrong here. So please check your time setting, is it accurate, whatever it is will be shown here is fine, so you make sure that in any case, if your answer is coming wrong then the reason for that is in your right corner that your things are not correct here, if things are correct here then your current date and current time will be accurate. In the second method, I will erase this. Let ‘s not erase it. Let’s do it here. If you agree, Take the current date, if you want then control and you have to press the colon control and after pressing the colon, you get the date in this way, then look at what you pressed for this, the control is fixed, just remember that for this we press the colon and for this we press the semi colon, the only difference is, now remember the semicalculus, if you do not remember the semicalculus then remember this, just for this we apply shift. Applying shift means using semicalculus. If we are pressing here control shift semi colon, if the colon one is pressed then basically semi colon will be automatically applied, then your timing will come. Okay, you remember this colon colon control colon, your date has come, control along with shift and put it, then use the colon, then your time will come. So in this method, we find out our current date and current time. Okay, now we will move ahead with the text formula. You already know that by pressing it, take a look at the text tab for once. We gave the value D D D D, turned off the parenthesis and entered and here our formulas have come. We had just learned the text formula, so there is no hard and fast rule in it, as you all know that inside a date, there is a day, there is a month and there is a year, so if you want to extract the same thing, then you can directly extract it. It is a very easy formula, like it is very easy, okay, so what you have to do is to apply the day formula. You have to tab the serial number meaning if you enter your date then the day will come. Okay to get the month equals to month, this is very easy. If it comes in handy in any situation then it is very rarely used directly like this then you enter then your month will come and in the same way if you want to get the year then the year tab serial number means if you enter the date then your year will come. Okay so in this way you can get the day month year, it is very easy. Why do let’s say you have a date, it is 9823, it could be like this, it could be 9th August 2023, and it could be like this, it could be 8th September 2023, isn’t it a possibility? Look, it could be like this, 12th month of 2014, who knows, it could be like this, 14th month of 2014, who knows, it could be like this, 14th December 2014, anything can happen, so to know this, you have read Day Month. Year done now you know 14th will be taken in 2012 ok so sometimes such situation comes you don’t know in which format it is written you don’t know Within this date, which is the day, which is the month, which is the year, then you can extract it directly from the formula by applying the formula of day, applying the formula of the month and applying the formula of the year, I hope you have understood, there is a doubt somewhere, let me know, okay, now we will do it. Look here, the day formula tells you how much day is there in that date, when I say days of any two dates. When you find the difference in between, there will be only days, otherwise now the formula we will apply will apply the days. Basically, what does the days do? Here is the formula applied in between two days. Okay, I have to remove this formula. Okay here, how much gap is there between the two dates, how many days have gone by. If you want to know, then what formula will you apply, what formula will you apply, what formula will you apply, the two dates of the days. How many days have come in between, then what will you do? Don’t memorize all these formulas, you have to do them according to what is written. If you go to memorize all the formulas, you will mess up all the formulas because in some, the start date comes first and in some, the end date comes first. In such a situation, you will get confused, you will not even be able to remember the formulas, they will start looking typical, that’s why they seem typical, so that’s why you don’t have to memorize these, put the days formula and tab it. Two and after that see what is written end date end date meaning when is ending end what is happening here comma start date start since when start when is it starting from here enter 42 days have come ok I for once just hold it with control I shift it here for once ok and control minus it from here left ok for now I shift the data for once Took because I wanted to make you do Days 360. There is one day which tells you how many days have actually passed between two dates. That is where Days 360 comes in. We know that look, we go with a very general understanding about our year, which means our entire year, how many days are there in it? Tell me quickly how many days are there in a year. Normally there are 365 days. There are 366 days in a leap year. Okay, if I remember maths, we used to do calculations in maths and in maths, marks were given like this, calculate the number of days below every question, like there are 360 days in the whole year, so what does it mean, what is the meaning of 360, 360 divided by 12 is 12 months, so it means 30, it will not even consider in which month. It doesn’t matter which month has 31, which month has 30 or which month has 28 or which month has 29. It doesn’t matter to him what it is, he has to know that I will agree that in every month even if it is your February it has 30, your May also has 30 and your November also has 30. I don’t care in which 31 comes, in which 28 comes and in which actual 30 comes, I am I will take 30 out of all and give the answer according to that. So in such a case, the formula we apply is Ear 360. Sorry Days 360. Sorry Days 360. Sorry. Sorry. Sorry. In such a case, the formula we apply is Days 360. What is Days 360 doing now? What was Days doing? The Days which was giving you the answer was 365 on Edge or 365 on Edge and Was giving according to 366 which is actual but how will it give you as per month on 30 days but month month as per month on 30 days is ok now when you apply the formula then you will understand see I am going to give the same date here the difference will come in the answer equal to 2 days 360 tubs after that start date brother see it is in this start date look at that and end date was taken earlier. Start date first, take start date, take comma, after that end date, leave it for once, enter it and see if the answer is coming, is it yes, leave it, don’t enter it, then see, here it was 220, here it was 217, here it was 43, it was 44, then the answer changed, no, why did the answer change? Just because of this difference , somewhere it must have considered exactly 31. 30 A must have considered 29 28 must have considered because 24 isn’t 24 is the leap year so maybe B He must have considered 29 but he has considered 20 everywhere Sorry everywhere 30 It doesn’t matter to him So that’s yours What is your days 360 So here we completed two more formulas Which is days and days Let’s go 360, now let’s move ahead, which is your network days and network days intel. Look, now you understand a little, now you were given a date for example, you were given a date from 1125 to today’s date, let me write this today’s date is 12 3 2025, what to find out the exact in between. To calculate it exactly then we need days formula. To calculate the according of 30 days in between, what is needed to calculate the according of 30 days, so we need 3 days. Well in this I should say exclude weekends and weekends also only Saturday Sunday off, then what formula will you use for network days and if I say look see what I just explained to you that I want to know how many days are there between two dates. But among them automatically it will turn off Saturday Sunday and tell me that if I take it from here to here and there are six Saturday Sundays in it, then it will remove six and tell me that it was not doing this thing, Days 360 was not doing this thing, who will do this thing, the network will do this thing, but the network will do this thing, but one situation has come, what do you get for the second situation? Now let us read the second situation here, let’s read the second situation here. It comes to you that you say that ma’am, it is fine that they are giving Saturday off but my company does not give Saturday off, I only get Sunday off, that means you are excluding the weekend, you want to exclude the weekend but here you want to customize the weekend, meaning it can be as per your wish, you get it on Monday, I get Sunday off, someone gets Saturday off, someone else gets Saturday off. Some people get off on Monday, Tuesday, some get off on Friday, Saturday, so many things can happen, so in such a case, the formula we apply will be network days intel’s, then you will be able to notice this thing there and you will be able to understand well which thing is there and why it is written. Okay, so here you just understand that the network is also doing the same thing, it is giving you the difference between two dates, but what it does is that it Saturday removes Sunday, where when it comes to the network day int64, then you have applied. Now comes to the network days and network days, ital network days. We have to do this after reading and reading. After reading, all will be done. What is the network days tab asking for? Start date, take the start date. What is the comma asking for? End date, take the end date. Okay, now first of all I will show the answer by bringing it normal and then We will also consider the holidays. If there are any holidays other than Saturday and Sunday, then it is okay to consider them too, but we will talk about it after two minutes. First, we will understand it directly. Answer: Look, 31 has come, look, I had given the same date, in this also I had given the same two dates, in this also the same two dates were given and in this also the same two dates were given, but the difference came here and here, it has removed Saturday Sunday and told me, so how many less days are there. If you have gone and seen, you will get the difference everywhere, then it has removed Saturday Sunday automatic. Now I have one more here, one second control control plus, no, from here, control plus, I don’t know what kind of data is below, so let’s write it, let’s do control R and here we write holidays that we are considering holidays also. Okay, what is there in holidays? You have to tell them the date that my holiday is only then when you tell it, right? So what is there in that, he will consider, if suppose your holiday is falling on Saturday and Sunday, then he will not deduct it twice, he will not deduct it twice, he will not deduct it once, if you directly write the number of the holiday, then he will not be able to understand it. How many holidays are there? Will consider if any of these dates is falling on Saturday Sunday then should I count it only one time OK then you will have to pay for holidays also here and pay attention to cell referencing Look here now look at Network Days tab Start date this is taken comma end date Oh hey hey sorry end date this is taken comma Now these are holidays, when I take them for the first, then also all those holidays are for the last. Loo, there are holidays in all, you will have to look at the same holidays for all, otherwise what will you do, fix it with f4, enter, 31 has come, tap it, then look, there are four holidays here and there is one holiday here, why because it has now considered some holidays there, she might not be falling at all, so you have not taken it, then you should also fall, if it is not falling at all, now these three, four, these 8. From 11 to 20, 12, three or four does not make sense, so it will not fall, so it does not come in it. It is okay, if we had written any holiday directly, then it would not have understood, it would have given the wrong answer, so that is why we should tell them the dates of the holidays. He will check himself whether she falls within that time period or not. Is there any of those dates which is falling on Saturday Sunday? So he will not deduct her double time, he will deduct her single time. So that is your network days. Okay, now network days intel, when did I tell you, I write holiday inside it, network days ital, when did I tell you, then I told you when you have to do customization, look at network days ital or it seems exactly. In the same way, customization is done in the last one, start date is taken with comma, end date is taken with comma, then look, it has automatically opened the list, I have not pressed anything, it has automatically brought the list, now check, Saturday Sunday off is required, was it available only in network days, Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, the answer will be the same because only two days have to be removed, yes, changes will come, it is ok because of the date, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday. Friday Saturday, I want only Sunday only. Either I bring it down like this and press tab or directly write 11. Ok tap comma. After that, Holidays. If we are not taking holidays for now, then we enter this. This is the answer. Look, it was the same thing, but now your answers are different. Why is the answer different in all, because the demand is different, here something was coming exact. According to 360, here Saturday is coming without Sunday. Here along with Saturday, holiday is coming with Sunday. Here we have removed only Sunday and here now if we remove Sunday and also remove holidays, then what will we do? Network days, itel, tap ups, sorry, tub, start date, start date, see, whatever formula is there, see, it is written here, so you can also read the end date from here. You will take comma, after that you have written the same 11, if you want, you could have tapped from there, after that Holidays, Holidays, you will take this, you have to consider this for everyone, you will fix it with f4, hit enter, then look, the same thing has come because there was no holiday considered there and it has been changed. Here, holidays must have been considered, so here he must have changed because he must have checked from there, so in this way, we will make this network of ours. days and network days are used by intel, if you have any doubt then please let me know, I have explained it in very detail so that you can understand it very well, now let us move ahead towards our next formula, which is start month, e date and e month, ok, what do you do here, like you calculate the average due date, that is the work of average due date, understand a little here. It will be better with an example . Let me adjust it for once. This is adjusted. For once, we will understand the theory. Let’s take a case with us so that we can understand it better. Suppose this is you. Okay, Mr. He bought clothes worth Rs 10000. Now he is saying payment of Rs 10000 is fine. So Sir, I will not be able to make the payment right now, I will do it after two months. I don’t have the money right now. So Mr. Don’t you know how many people would be coming in a day? So , he records what Mr. I was patient for two months, now I have to pay my due date, so you should know it, and how to know the due date, it is on 12th March, if you add two months in plus, then what will come in March, April, so your due date will be made in May, so you have added two months, right, so in this way, we calculate our due date, so this is the work which you have done manually, this formula. If you want to do it with then use the formula of e-date, end date, basically end date, then you will put e-date, you will tab it, I have said the same thing, you have to do it after reading it, not by rote learning, what is asking, start date comma, okay, now some people may say, ma’am, if there are days, then there are days. Convert it to months, brother, if the date is days, I tell you, first take the months because you cannot do it with your formula, I have this, so what should I do, no, you did this, after that you went to home just because it is on the journal, we need the date, so here we took the short date, this is the date, one more, I create it here so that you can understand, control plus or control R, I would have removed it if you agree, you say. If I have this month, I will make another one, this is the days, write the days 60 90 65 52 62 32 45 85 45 62 If you have these dates, you do not have these, if you do not have a month, then how will you do it. Look, you will have to give the month in the formula, now how will that month come out, you have to know that, equal to e date tab start date taken comma after that take months. Now there is no month, forget the month, there is no month, you have days, how do you get months from days, how many months are there in a year, if there are 12, then divide by 12, no brother, month will automatically calculate , enter yours, 84, enter did you take this date? Well , there are 30 days in a month, so we will not do it by 12 months, we will do it by days, but it will not be standard, that means, in some, 31 will come, in some, it will come, then this can be messed up, okay, here that thing can be messed up, here two is written, here it is 90, that’s why here I write three, your answer will be correct, equal will come, okay, so here I have standardized it. I have divided it by 30 but you will have to convert it into months. Okay, if you want to be very accurate, if it is normal then you can enter the answer in this way. You will not get confused after seeing these two, because they are written randomly, don’t look at it right now, it is written as one, so here I write 30, the answer will be correct. If three is written here, then if I write 90 here, then the answer will be correct here. It is written here that if I write 60 then the answer will be same then this is different because random is written here just to tell you ok this was your end date, after this another formula comes end of month, now what does it mean, this is the formula which I had understood, within this formula I add one more condition, after that you will understand better, now what is the next condition, this person says this thing. It is true that I have to do 10000, it is true that I will do it in two months but but what does it say but sir, whatever date I follow your due date, take the end date of that month, end date of that month and date of that month, what do you say, oh sir, it is very easy, you are telling me, I did the transaction today, yes yes, then you are saying that my due date will be on my 12th, yes, I am on 12th. I am not liable to give it, I will be liable to give it on 31st May, O then your due date should follow anytime, on that day you will be liable to follow that due date which is the last date of the month, K Yes, now if you understand it right, then if such a situation arises, then you can use end of the month, see equals to e, O month which is the end of the month in which you started. Date taken, start date taken, comma, same months have to be taken, here you have to enter months, then look here, your answers have come, now look, it is the same, you had put the same thing in this date also, you had not done anything different, so here, look at 31, 8 is 31, 20 is 31, 23 is 30, look, all the last dates are just months, if yours is June, then tell me what will come, your date is that date. What is the due date? If it is June, then 30th of June. If your second is September, then 30th of September. If your third is of November, then 30th of November is your last date. If it has gone up even by one day or has fallen, then I am liable to give it in the end of the month. You see your formula, so that is your end of month. Okay, after this we move on to our next day. That is a very very very good formula. It is okay but it will be understood very easily. To understand this, let us consider a small case study and from that we will get better clarity. Okay, see here, he has asked to give the resignation. Now what does the manager say, OK fine, calm down brother, you have to give the resignation, there is no problem, but remember that after giving the resignation, you will be given 21 days’ notice. You have to serve your notice period. You have to serve your notice period. What do you have to do? You have to serve your notice period. Oh shut up, meaning I am here today on 12th March and Now I have 21 more days, which means that if I work, it will go till 3rd April, and this means that I will go till 3rd April, I have to work till 3rd April, but no problem , I will work till 3rd April, I will definitely leave, I am very fed up from here, so he has done the calculation directly till 3rd April, but the manager there says no, son, it is not like what you have done for 3rd April, in that you have also counted your weekends too, have you counted the weekends? Obviously your working days will not be counted. What have I said? 21 working days, 21 working days have to be done. If you have to do 21 working days then your Saturday and Sunday cannot come in it or whatever your weekend is, that is also customization. You know this thing that we do customization inside Intel. Okay, so Saturday Sunday cannot come. They say, OK, so now calculate and tell me till when will I have to work . We will tell you who will calculate and tell. Let’s calculate and tell. See, you came here in work days, after that you enter the formula of work days here, tab it here, it is written work day, it means it gives you the last date, I was saying work days by mistake, I am really sorry for that, like you see, when you did the day formula, do you remember in the day formula, you were getting the date as to which day is within that date, but like you said days. If the formula was done then the difference coming between two dates was net work days because in it the difference between two dates was coming, these were network days. I have also made the mistake written above, I will change it now but this work day by day day means that particular day, that is why he gives the date. Okay, we will take the start date, we will take the start date, comma, what is it saying after that, how many days have to be served, let’s say there is no holiday to serve 50 days. Will we talk about holidays later? Will we talk about holidays later? Let’s enter and here I do one thing, I take it from me, I go to home and here I come in short date. Okay, here I do a control plus A, A, I write it and here I do control R. Okay, here we will do the holiday one, then the holiday one too. You have to explain that if any holiday is considered in between, then neither the manager will consider that. Do it, it’s a holiday, work a little bit, so here you have the work day here , it ‘s ok, so here your work day has come, you double tap it, you will get all the dates. I was talking about today, right, I will show you today’s also, you did it here and we had taken out 21 days, so how do we take out its work day tab, after that was the start date, we did this with a comma, after that we gave this and entered, then we have 10th off. Where will April come? He was sitting there with ‘Third of April’ in it, do Alt HEA, then it will be deleted. Okay, so here we will calculate the working days now according to the holidays, so it is the same step of holidays which was in your network days, you take the start date, put commas, tell the days, take commas, for holidays, you have to tell this and this has to be considered in all the holidays because it is going to remain the same in future, so you Fix it with f4 and enter, your answer will come and here we go, so here you can find it in this way, if suppose you want to do customization, here by default it has considered Saturday Sunday as weekend, but here, if you want to consider Saturday and not Sunday, you want to consider something else, if you want to consider only Sunday, then you can do that also, you will enter the working day, tap the start date. You will take start date, you will go here and put comma, after that you will take days, you will take days here, you will put comma, after that you have to do customization here, what will you do for customization, you have to show only that of Sunday, otherwise you write 11, put comma, after that you have to consider holiday, if there is anything, then we will consider the holiday later, so I removed it and entered, so see this in working day only it considers both Saturday and Sunday. Here it has taken a consideration, so the date has changed, if I suppose I do the same thing here, I take it, I control it like this, and here I take the holiday, we write the holiday here, we write the holiday thing, holiday and we turn off the parentheses and enter and here I am going to consider the holiday also, so we will apply the formula again, how to do equals to work day, take the intel tab here, after that you should start. Date Start date How to take Start date is your comma after that you want days then for days you have this After that you need Sunday only, to take Sunday only you have taken 100 sorry 11 taken I am really sorry for that 11 taken com, now you need Holidays, I have told you about the holidays, select it, fix it with f4 and hit enter, then see it is the same thing but now your only holiday has also been added in it, so your answer has changed Holidays. You have understood the concept, you had done the same concept in the network days and the same concept is there in the work days also. I am so sorry. Okay, so here we have included all the possible formulas related to our date which are used the most. Here we have completed them. Now let us move towards the time formula. There is nothing much in the time formula, it is a very easy thing which you have just learned about the date. What are the things written inside a date? Inside a date, your day is written, month is written and year is written, similarly what is written inside a time, an R is written, a minute is written and a second is written . Because for now it is in this format, so what format will we do it in? No general format will come in the time format, okay ninth R means ninth R is going on, we will apply the minute for minute formula, we will tap, after that you will take it and enter, then it is 10 minutes, from how many minutes it has extracted, we will tap for second, after that we will take the serial number, we will enter, so so many seconds are written in it, okay, we do not want it in this much, we will take it in this. We have rounded it off and given it. We have given it by rounding it off. If you want, you can do it in this way. You can show it normally to two seconds. By rounding it off, we can take it from this. Okay, so in this way your R comes with minutes and seconds. So here we have completed all the possible formulas of our day and time formulas which were most used. We have completed them here and also. We will do the formula further, let’s move ahead, see till now we have seen, now let us start our logical formula. What is the logical formula? The first formula inside the logical formula that we are going to learn is the if formula. Now before learning the if, see how if is called in Hindi . On the basis you will be asked what is the answer, basically you will be given a condition and according to that you have to answer. If you did not understand the thing, let us understand from the example. Suppose there is a Raju, Raju goes to school. Okay, now Raju has given the exam. Now what is said in the exam that if he gets more than 45 marks then he has passed, otherwise he has failed. What did I say that if Raju gets more than 45 marks? If he comes, then he is passed, otherwise he is failed. Okay, so what is the condition that we have given? What is the condition that we have checked his marks, are they more than 45? What is the condition that we have given that the marks are greater than 45? If this is true, then either this will be true or this will be false. If this is true, then write PASS there and if this is false, then write FAIL there. Have you understood just one thing? You have to understand the condition very well, after that you can do this work like suppose we will travel again for now this is student A, this is student B and this is B and this is student C and if I say his percentage then it is 55. If I say his percentage is at 40 and if I say his then it is 75. So now tell me whether the one who is a is pass or fail is pass or fail is pass. If I talk about b then it is pass or fail is fail and if I talk about c then fail of dice is pass then if you tell me this then you know how to apply the formula, we just have to understand a little bit of the formula, basically what will we know by doing time travel, first what did we check, did we check our condition whether the marks are greater than 45, what did we check whether the marks are greater than 45 and look at the marks, it is such a thing. Marks percentage is the same thing, okay percentage is something which is different for this person, it is different for this person, it is different for this person, that means these are the marks. How are the keys changing, so what does it mean here, what will we select , we will select a cell, that is, we will select the cell with marks and then greater than 45, 45, whether it is this or this, the condition is same for everyone that it should be more than 45, so here we can write the number at 45 because the number is always fixed, so here we understood one thing that the first thing we have to check is what we have to check is to check the marks. Is she greater than 45 days? Then we time traveled that as soon as we get to know about the marks, that means we get to know about a condition, sorry, we erase it. As soon as we get to know about a condition, what do we have to do? Now that I have got to know about the condition, what will I do now, I will think about the condition. Is it yes or no, that means, has this condition been successfully achieved, if it has happened . So what will pass and if it has not passed then what will fail? Okay, what are these two? What is text and what do we write the text in? We write the text inside double inverted commas. Okay, now we have understood this but I have explained these things, why what is their logic? Let’s see what formula I am making you here. Right, just give me a minute . Why is it showing like this? No problem, here we will write equal to if tub here. Read what is the logical test value of true and value of false, so now we will elaborate this formula a little bit, after doing it in detail, we will understand it completely, okay, so here I write the F formula which is what is our logical test value if true and value false and the formula we have just given, we will understand it according to the example we have just given, so that we can understand F in detail. What is Logical Test? What is Logical Test? Check the percentage of marks. Is it true of the individual? Is it greater than 45? Value if true, if the condition becomes true then what to do is pass and A value false. If the condition becomes false then what to do is fail. So in this way you will be able to apply your formula here, that is why I told you the value of true by making this condition one condition two. Because value of true value of false also comes in your formula, so now you know what is value of true value of false, you just have to think of the condition properly, after that think about the condition whether it is true or false, after that you can apply your own, so see, here we will apply the formula practically, we will go with the same thing, whoever has more than 45 marks, he will pass, otherwise he will fail. Here we will write equals to if tab, after that logical test, what is the percentage in logical test? The only thing to be checked is the percentage of every student. Take the percentage of every student and obviously now Aarav Sharma will be next. Riya Verma will be next, then Anaya will be there, then Karan will be there, then Sanya will be there and then Rahul will be there. Meaning, the things that are changing will keep on changing, so don’t fix it. Okay, keep it at Greater Day 45. Greater Day 45 will be there. Do you check the comma value of true? If this is true then the condition is true then you have to write pass and if this is false then you have to write fail. Now you don’t know what you have learned till now in so many formulas and in that way. Now you will never get troubled by looking at formulas or symbols. Half of the people get troubled by seeing what are the symbols that why did you put this double e and inverted comma and then why did you put comma after that. Why is this greater than given? I will not be able to understand the formula or they will come. Now look, double inverted comma is text, hence we use comma for any next command. Greater given is given because we want to check this condition. If you hit enter, it will come close to here. Double tap it, then look, it is failing here, why 27 at 33 45, we have not put equal at 45, if we want to assume that If there is equal, then put the equal sign here, enter and now double tap. Now the one who was at 45 also passed. If you want that the one who was at 45 should also pass and the one above him should pass then you can do it like this. Okay, is this working or not? Once I check it, I made it 20. In this side also his marks will have to be 20. So see if he has failed, then in this way you apply your if formula. If you understand how the IF formula looks, take one more condition and tell it in another statement. Suppose any party name is written here. Party name is ok. I write any party name here. A A B C B C D E F G H I have written the party name here. Now I write the amount here and write the status here. I am explaining it very easy. Look, let’s go with a condition that see, this is my party. Now if any payment comes from them, then I write it here otherwise this cell remains empty and now I have to put the status. Suppose from here I have received a payment of Rs. 10000. It is okay from B. No payment has come from C. No payment has come from D. I have received a payment of Rs. 20000. After that I get F. A payment of Rs 63000 has come from H and then I have received a payment from H of Rs 52000. Now I have to update the status here that from whom has payment been received and from whom has no payment been received. Okay, now what will I do here, wherever the amount is written, that is, wherever the amount has come, then I have to write payment done and wherever the amount is not written, I have to write pending. So now what is the condition whether the cell is vacant or not? What will I think here, what is mine, what do I have to check, I have to check the cell, is it equal to MT, if this is true, that means, if it is MT, MT, then yes and no, yes and no, if it is true, the cell is empty, then what should come here, cell is empty, it means payment has not come, it means pending should come, and if we assume that cell is not empty, it means payment has come, then yes, payment received, understood, confusion, tell me once more. See what I am saying, come in the third, I am saying here we are going with a condition, see what is the condition, we have to check the cell whether it is MT and if it is MT, the condition of MT thing is yes and no, if yes means cell is empty, when is it empty, when payment has not come, payment has not come, it means pending and if it is not empty, that means payment is written in it, that means amount has been received, then payment is done. If it comes , then you know the value if true and value of false. You know that pending and payment done have to be written, but this is a logical test, how to write it? What am I saying in the logical test, you have to check the cell, whether it is MT or not, then it means that you have to check a1, then you will take a1. In the logical test, a1 is equal to two. How to show empty, there is no number, any number of text or character or anything other than the number. If it comes in double inverted comma, then double inverted comma. Now you have to show it empty, right? If you have to show space, then you give space. If someone has to show you a symbol, then they write that symbol. You have to show it empty. Stop it as it is. It means nothing. If space is given, what do we sometimes do? We give space to show empty. If you have given space here, then he will understand that there should be space inside that cell which you have shown in double inverted comma. What you write will come, now you will not write anything directly, you will turn off the double inverted comma, this means that it is empty and if it is empty, then it will come, so let’s try it for once, then you will understand better. We will go to logical formula here, we will put Equals to If tab. What is the logical test? What is the need to check this cell, what is the need to check whether it is empty, then I turned on and off the double inverted comma, but did not do anything in it because Only then it will appear that it is empty, there is nothing to be done, comma, if this becomes true then it is really empty, then it is empty, it means the payment has not come, that is, pending, see what happens, sometimes we think negative situation, sometimes we think positive, that is why I explain the logic, if you understand the logic, try the condition by making it yes and no, then we will find the correct answer, otherwise we may get confused, okay. Pending

comma value false means the cell is not empty that means when the cell will not be empty then when the payment has come then we will do the payment. Pens of enter then see if you do this then see here the pending is coming. Now I delete it here, this is also pending. Suppose if I write any payment here then this payment is done. Okay, in this way we can effectively use if. If one like this. There is a formula which is used a lot, whether you are doing small work or big work, whether you are making a report or doing anything. If is used the most, that is why if you have a doubt about understanding If very well, then please let me know in the comment section. Here we have done it in great detail, just like we did If, similarly in logical functions, there are two more formulas in the logical formula. Other two formula R and and R and and R Now let us give a little logic to this We have to understand what is the meaning of ‘and’ and what is the meaning of ‘and’ and after that we will be able to work well. Okay, now what I am talking about is ‘end’ and ‘or’, these are English people, they are English people, now how come this is my friend Mr. I will eat pizza and burger and on one side I sent a birthday card and wrote what all will happen, meaning this is a fictional kind of example ok and there it is written pizza and burger in English and there is either pizza and burger, can we get both? The answer is no, where else comes to mean either A or B, one but where end comes, means A and B means both and both are ok, so this is the basic difference. Now why did I explain this in between is and and and and, I am talking about logical, I am talking about condition, I see where I have reached, here also it is a matter of condition, like suppose till now you had what was being talked about inside if and what was being talked about, single condition is ok, now it has come to the case of if condition, multiple condition, you have more than one condition and now there are two situations, either both the conditions are satisfied. Only then will some work be done or if only one of them is satisfied then it will work. If both have to be satisfied then apply the ‘And’ formula and if any of the two conditions, suppose you have two conditions, if any one of the two will be satisfied, then apply one more thing. Well, one more thing. The ‘if’ formula is more flexible and gives more customization. How inside the ‘if’ formula, you tell yourself that I have to write a pass, I have to write a fail. I want to get payment done written, I want to get pending written, I can get anything written but there are such formulas which will give you the answer not only on the basis of true and false, remember Go to Special, inside which there was a formula from which true and false were taken out, that is why when we were saying that brother, only where true and false are there, he considers it logical, why do he consider it logical? These and and and and whatever they are, they come from the logical formula. You will answer only and only in True and False. Through these you will know whether your condition is satisfied or not. Now if you understand it with a practical example, you will understand better. Whenever you do not understand the theory, no problem, we explain the theory only so that you can understand the core of it. If you do not understand there, it is okay. Not everyone understands the theory, then you will understand through practical. Now we have an example. What is the example that our manager is telling us to make a list of all the persons who are eligible for the employment like bonus. I said ok, it will be fine, we will make it. What is the condition, the experience of the employee should be greater than 5 and his rating should be greater than 5. If it is so, then he will get the bonus, otherwise I will not get it. Said right, meaning he needed both the things that he should work for more than 5 years and his rating should also be good, only then he will give the bonus. Okay, so in such a case, we will apply the formula of end, what is the end tab logic one, I have to check the experience, is that greater day equal to 2, because even if it is five, it will work and after that we have to check the rating, is that greater day equal to 4, if you enter it, the true answer will come. And double tap here, always look at us, here we are giving sale to whom, we are giving experience and we are giving rating and this is in keep changing, that is why we have not fixed it, now see, here it is six years and if it is 4.1, then your pay here has come true but here it is 3 years, it is 3.8, even if I make seven years of pay here, it is also false, if I make five years of pay here, then go. It is true that means both the conditions should be satisfied, I made it three here, then why did it come false, because the experience here is less than 5 years, he has to satisfy both the conditions, what has to be done, if both the conditions are satisfied, if even one condition is satisfied, then it will not work, see where the thing with one condition works, same is the same example, everything is the same, same is the data, here if even one condition is satisfied then let’s go. If you go to that is your or formula tab, you have to check the logic, Greater than = 5, comma after that, if you want to give logic two, then you will check that the rating is greater than equal to 4. If you enter it, then it will come here. Now let’s see here what was 65, so 65, so it will remain true, assume it is 4, this is 4.5, that means the rating is good but the years of experience are less, still he is giving true, if this of mine becomes three and this also becomes three, then it will go and give false saying brother, if neither of them is failing then if even one thing is right then it will give true to me, what else is that single condition also. If it is satisfied, then it will give you the answer. True and what are both the conditions, that is, all the conditions which you want to impose will be satisfied, then what is more, even if even one condition is satisfied, it will give you the answer. By default, the answers they give are in True and False, so here we have completed our logical formula. Now we come to you some miscellaneous formulas. First of all, we will learn that we have to rank. Now we will understand the method of calculating the rank from an example and then after traveling in the same way, we will make the complete formula. Okay, so let me draw five students here for you. Let us write the students here like this. Student A is one. He is at 60, the marks of D are at 85, and the marks of E are at 45. Now tell me the rank, who will come first, who is the student who will come at the first rank, who has the highest marks, then you will simply look at it and say that D is the first, then you will say for second, B is the second, C is the third, the fourth who will come will be A and the one who will come fifth will be E, and if you If you have given the same answer, then you have given the correct answer. Okay, now it comes to the fact that we will travel. Basically, what did you do? If I have to get the rank of a student, I have to get the rank of A. If we are taking an example, then first of all what I check is, I check the marks of A, that is, that person’s own marks. So, are these marks going to be different for A, different for B, different for C, different for D, different for E? Yes, of course, A’s own marks. B has its own marks, C has its own marks and D has its own marks, so this is keep changing and keep changing means that we are not writing anything on our own, we have to take cells only, the leaves of both numbers and text are removed, only cells have to be written and because there are individual marks, after that, what did you do in the second step, you can tell by just looking at A, what rank he has got. Unless you look at the other students, then to check the same rank, you have to check the same rank. Also checked B, it is 70, which means it is more than A. Well, it is 60, which means it is more than A. Okay, its 85 is more than A. Okay, if it is less than A, then according to this, whatever A will be, it will be on the fourth, so it means to check the rank of A, what did you check? So the second step comes that check the whole lot, basically the whole data. Okay, now tell me one thing, if you find it for b, then find it for b first of all. B’s marks are checked, O is 70, okay fine, after that, you will not do this. C’s is 60, D’s is 85, E’s is 45, okay, you will check A’s too, so no, we move ahead, we check all of them, it means for B too, you will have to check all of them, for C, we will check C’s marks, after that we will check all of them, only then we will be able to tell what is its rank, so basically the whole data remains fixed. If it is sales, then we will fix the sales manually. What is the meaning of fixing manually? We will apply dollars beyond that, then in this way your rank will be determined. It is very easy to get the rank but still you make mistakes in this, then we will also see what mistakes you make and we will correct it and will also see the correct answer. Now let us try it practically, so here we will put the formula here, we will have equals to rank, here you have it, tap the number, the number means which. What is to be checked? What is to be checked? Percentage is to be checked. Have you taken the percentage? Okay, comma is saying that reference means which one should I check? I check in these and I do one thing. For now, I will not fix it and after that we will check the rank. Okay, comma is asking for order. Now don’t memorize here, we will take zero, we will take one. Hey, here it seems to be zero, here it seems to be one, whenever things like this come, true false comes. If row one comes or any thing comes then in such a case you have to read that thing, you read why it is getting written and zero. Why am I writing this? Now I want to know why I am saying this. Generally, we take descending in rank but sometimes the opposite can also happen. You are carrying a negative situation. If you are checking your date, then in the date, the person who is lowest for you will be the one with good date. The one from whom our debt is less, so those are good things. If you use ascending there, then when will you be able to use it now. You will be able to do this when you have understood the logic in it, now you have not understood the logic only, you have done only 01 01, then you will make a mistake, then you will think that how will this happen, here we will do zero, which is descending and parent off, we will enter, we have got the rank, double tap it and the rank is correct, what is it, see, the first rank here is at 78, then the first rank is at 62, then the first rank is at 6051, what happened now ? Let’s check for once the mistake that people generally make, the mistake about which I had also told you that here we checked the rank, what did we check? Firstly, i3 is what is written in i3 and after that we checked from i3 to i17, it is okay, i3 is the individual marks and from A3 to i17 are all children, after that we came here, we had to find the rank within what is i k4, so here we will check. i4 as well as what is staying here from i4 to i1 means what did it do. If you are getting the rank here for i4 then it has been taken from i4 to i 18 whereas in 18 there is no data here, there is no data here and where did it start from. Sorry here, there is no data here and where did it start from here, it did not even check this 51. Then accept it if you are on i6. If you are coming, then it is checking from i6 to i20, it is increasing like this because you have not fixed anything, then in such a case, will it give you the correct rank or not? That is why this was the mistake, so now we will correct it. Just give me a minute, I have to remove all of this and then we will put our formula again here. So we took this, after that we erased it, after that now we will put the formula here. Equal to rank tab ok rank average taken by mistake I took the tab number take the number comma after that take the reference take the reference I took this and now fix it with f4 comma ascending penis off enter and now see now you double tap then your rank has come here see if these failed were failed then see the last rank is 12 15 14 okay so in this way you have to find your rank so here we have another formula. Completed, what is a rank formula? Now let us move ahead. We will do the round formula. What do we do? Whatever you round off, you get it rounded off. Now how will the round off be done? Let’s learn to round off a little bit. I will write a number and according to that I will teach you the normal round off, like suppose you have written 9635 6949. So first of all this. Understand, if I tell you that I want a number up to two digits, then it means that I am saying that I want a number only up to two digits after the decimal, so I want five, so I will write as it is and after that I am here, I want this number up to the second digit, neither this till the second digit, as far as we need, it is dependent on the next digit, if our next digit is If it is above five or equal to five then it gets converted to the next number and the other way it remains as it is, so now the number here is nine which is more than five, so now we will write this number by taking it here, then it is completed in two digits. Suppose this number was 96 3.56 449, then what do we do here in such a case. 9635 Now see on which it is dependent, on the next step it has to be checked whether it is greater than five or equal to five, so here it is four, which is less than five, so we leave it as it is, it comes to zero, okay, it is five, it comes to zero, let me tell you another number, let’s think of rounding it off, see here 89 7.65 5 3 2 I have two. Do you need round off till digits, what will you write 8976, what is the next number, five is equal to five or more than five, then what do we do with it, we round off, so that is your normal round off, now this is the normal round off, I understood when to do it and when not to do it. Here are two formulas and come out which is round up and round. Down tell me one thing, let’s me in this, we will understand this one and I will take its example, okay, I am taking the same number but changing the example a little bit 8 9765 432 Now tell me the answer to this, what will happen on rounding off 8976, this f is dependent on this four, four is small, f is as it is, now what these two are, what is the normal round off? Normal round off, but at the same time, let me tell you some different round off. Suppose I have got this situation here that I have got this number and now I have to apply the round up formula, then the round up formula says whatever the number is, I don’t care what your number is 8976 5 432. If this number is not there then it is smaller than f but still 8976 6 will give the answer, he will always round up no matter what. It doesn’t matter whether the number is above five or not. Okay, this thing, now let’s try it by rounding down. We use this formula to round down, see 8 97.6 5532. Now tell me one thing, technically this number after five is five, so it should become six, but rounding down will give you the answer 8976 5. That means he keeps the number as it is. It doesn’t matter to him whether the number on the side is higher or not. It is less, he keeps it as it is, so that is your round out, now we apply this practically, I explained this round off because people get confused about the decimal thing, so now you will not be confused, so see here, we will apply the round formula, apply the round formula, one second, we will do the equals to round tab, after that look, the number is saying, number has to be taken, meaning which number has to be changed, check, this one has to be done. The comma after that is saying the number digit. I had asked you how many digits to keep, so here we keep two digits or if you want to keep three digits, you can keep three, but after entering two, it has been sen. Now we will read this. First, we double tap it. See, after six, nine was and if it is more than five, then it was sen. After three, two was and if it is less than five, then we left three after six. Two was which is less than 5 so left it as six so in this way you have rounded off now let’s see the round up if the numbers are the same round up Tom after that we will take the number we took the comma the same one is asking the way of putting the digits is exactly the same situation will come different so you have to see ok now see this is the same number here now there was two after three so let it remain three but round up says I don’t care after Whatever number I have, I will tell him by increasing it, even after 63 there is a two, he makes it 64. Even after six, even after a two, he makes it seven. After five, even after a four, he makes it six. So that’s yours. Round up and same stubborn, ours is round down. He says, I don’t care, I will keep it rounded down. If I round it down, then we will take the number. After that, we will take the number . Comma digits two, you need to turn off the parentheses, enter end, you can double tap it, then here the answer comes, see it is 37, because after that there is nine, then it should increase, but it did not increase, it did not increase, it does not increase, it says, I do not care, this is fifth here, after two, there is five, it should increase, but it did not increase, it says, I do not care, I am stubborn, I will do it like this, so the round is your normal round off. Round up always keeps the dozen matter up, what is the next number and round down always keeps it on the down. Dozen matter, what is your number? So here we have completed all the three formulas very well, which is round, round up and round down. Now we will do some such formulas which tell you what is written inside the cell. Now you will say what is this, yes, I am telling you there is a list of formulas inside it, this formula is different. There is no point in doing this but let’s keep it in a little understanding like suppose you know what is written, a number is written, a formula is written, then you can check it, is the number tab, after that give the value, enter is this a number, yes this is the number, it is true, ok equals to is text, whatever you want to check, tab, did I give this value, enter, was this a text, then it gave false. Given, if suppose I do the text tab here, after that I give it and enter, was it text, yes, then it is True, in a way, it is behaving like a logical thing. In True False, it gives you the answer. Let’s tell whether that content is there inside that cell or not, like now you put equals to is here and you are getting lots of them here, you are okay, here you have to check if this is the formula, so you tap on it, give you this, enter the value given by you, is this a formula, yes, there is a formula inside it, then true, if I do the same thing somewhere else, then I would have given this formula tab and this Pooja Deshmukh enter here, was this formula no? That was the name I had written, the text was the constant text, you know this thing, you have already learned about the constant thing and the formula thing, okay, so here you will know, okay, next we will check is the error, is the error tab, is this an error, so you checked this, enter false, now see is this an error , okay, this is close, so we get this here, equals to is the error tab. After that we took this enter, so is it an error? Yes, if there is an error, then it gave true. In this, another formula comes, what does E E R R E R E R E R do, it also tells the error but it does not consider N. It is an error and considers all the errors but E E R R does not consider N and considers all the others. You take this, enter it and it will come true, it is ok. After that, more come to you in the same way like this error e error we have done ok fine after that comes to you e even meaning we have to check whether this number is even check yes this number is even in the same way if it is not an even number then it gives you this false and you get the formula in it see you can read from here like is a like e r r it does not do a but does the rest is a for particular a. You have to check whether there is any error with ‘A’ there or not, this number is good, this is weak number, so here you have many formulas which you can explore, I would like to do something else in this blank like took this blank, took tab, gave value, gave enter, so what was the blank here, otherwise if I remove it, then false comes, then yes, true, this is blank, so in this way, there are many many things here. There are formulas which are logical formulas, they are used very rarely, they are used along with some formula, their usage in themselves is less but if the situation arises then you should remember that yes, there are some formulas of this method too. All the terms that we have taught you, all these formulas are related to those terms in the data. Okay, so here we have completed these formulas, we have many good formulas. That’s done for now. Now let’s move ahead. I have done this for some advanced formula. I have been doing this in basic only but this is in kind of advanced. It is a good formula. Which is Sum F. Now let’s see it in detail. When I talk about the Sum F. So, first of all, look at its name. What is Sum F? How many words is Sum F made up of? Sum and F. Sum. What is the meaning of total? To total something if Had you read a condition just now? Had you read the if? Had you read the else? So this is what you had read for the if. One condition, one condition, two, check it in that. Now and in that condition, I am saying that you have to total. Now you have not understood the point, no problem. Let us understand from the example, this is your manager. The manager has a report. There are 10000 entries in the report and within the entries, there is data of North South East West and the manager has told you that Mr. Raju, you have to prepare a report. In the report, he gave this report to make a report. He wrote this, North, this, South, this, East, West, this, he wrote the total and did it like this and said, brother, fill in the values here, fill in the values, meaning, tell me how many total sales have I made, take the data of these 10000 entries from me and check with me, what are the entries of North, what are the entries of South, what are the entries of East. What are the entries of West, what are the entries of West, total them and after totaling, make such a report and give me such a report. I want to know how many sales have we made in the entire North region, how many sales have we made in the Southern region, how many sales have we made in the East region, so what is the condition here, what is the first condition, first condition will we apply, so what is the first condition, what is to be found for the North and what to do, then if we get the North, we will get the entire North, then what? If you have to make even, then when you have a single condition and you have to make even, because you have to know the total sale, what has he told you, this is what he has said, I want to know the total sale of North Region. In such a case, what is the condition, what is the answer, what is to be done, then what formula do we use to sum, I have understood the condition, okay, I have understood the example, now let’s read the formula for once, after that you will understand better, it is sum, ff, tub, range, criteria, sum, range, ok, range, criteria, sum, range, I write it and after that I explain it to you completely, then we have another color, we work equal . To Sum F Tab Range Criteria Sum Range, this has to be understood carefully because they will understand that if they did not understand this one, nor did they understand the portion, then they will understand the reporting that you do in advance as well as the formulas used there and at the same time, if you are able to do all the work with the data using any formula you have, then you have to understand it very carefully. Okay, yes, first of all we will not talk about the range, we will talk about the criteria. What is the criteria? What is the criteria to search? Now tell me one thing that I have to search. Above, I gave you the example where the manager gave the report to you Raju and said that I want the sum of note South East West, then Raju will search whom, whom will he search for North, he will search only North, he will search only North, the amount is written in front of it, but whom will he search among all the entries, this is the amount, isn’t it? Will start searching for North. North will start searching for North. If all are found, then the amount is already written in front. So whom will he start searching for? North, here what will be his criteria, what will be North then for South, for South for East, for East for West, then what can I say? Can I say that the region is asked for region wise report, neither is the region within the report, within the region report within the report, so I wrote the report because the one with the report should be found inside the main. If you are thinking about the data, then what is your criteria range, meaning in which to search, in which to search, now tell me one thing, I am saying that you have to find the region, okay, you have to find the North, okay, you will search in the data given by the manager, you will search in that only, then you will search in that and tell me, North, okay, this is the entries of North, so in which you have to search, so what will you do here, if you take the region from the main data, then check in the region. You will do North North North North North North North North North and from that you will get to know the sum range which you have to sum means your amount which will come and where that amount will be written in the report. What has to be written in the report, if we have done the total, then what will you get in the main data, so basically now think about it, it was logical, but we have put it in the formula, how is it logical that there is a big data with 10000 entries in which North South East West has entries, so logical. Right, I want to know the total sum of North, so obviously I will first find out all the North, first I found out who I need to know, okay fine, I want to know the North, then I sorted out all the entries of all the North and after that I did all the sums separately and after that I took the total of all the amounts which were here, this is what you do, now we have brought this work inside the formula, how easy is it, so if I start making the formula here, if I start making the formula here, like this example. If I start making the formula, what will be the formula? Look, if Equal to Sum F Tab Range, then what will be the region in main data, what will be the criteria, what will be the region in report and sum range, what will be the amount in main data. If you do not understand this thing, then there is no need to panic. Let’s put an example practically. This is an example with me. What an example. See, here I have party names and also party names. What are the entries of the sale here, see how many entries have been made, one person comes many times to buy the goods, so look, we have a lot of entries, what is it now, I know that I do not have that many people, I have only so many customers, these people come again and again to buy, so here they are, now someone told me that I have to go, according to the name swift4, okay, so now you have come to a new example, leave that example. Now understand this, here there is an entry of sales, name of each party is given, there is sale next to it, you want to know how much sales have been done, then we will put it because if I search for swift4 in the name, then I have taken comma, now I am doing it for one, after that I will tell you how to put it for complete, so who did this comma criteria? If you want to search, then look, it gave me the answer 80586, okay, everyone understood, if I want to check this, then with control shift L, I applied the filter here, from here I searched for shuff nova, sf nova, ok and heavy go, then this is our total, look here 805 869, so here our total will come 80586, understood, okay, we remove the filter here, now the thing was, we have removed one if this is the thing, if I If I drag and bring all the answers, what are the correct answers? What are the correct answers? Look, he is choosing the range from b5 whereas our range should have been from b4. That means there might be chances that this is correct but no, this is the wrong way. We should not do it this way. We will use the right way because what I just said, there might be chances, I was not accurate, so we have to do the accurate work. Equal to Sum So brother, do f4 or fix it with f4. Take all these criteria about comma criteria one. Okay, we have to remove comma for this. After that, even range, even range, tell me one thing. Sf Nava also has to be found in this. Same range for blue puck also, same even range for a cross. So okay, then when this is for everyone then take the even range and fix it with f4. Okay, enter your You will get the total of all the passes . Now you can do Alt Equal to here and enter. You have got the total of the sales. So, how much time did you spend in this method and was it a method that we will apply filters, we will find the answer of North, we will find the answer of South, then how hectic it would have been. So look here, you have to find all the answers in one turn, then this was your sum. If the way we calculate the sum, what do you think in that way? The average is also calculated and the count is calculated in the same way, so in the same way, no matter how much you read excel in the whole series, wherever it seems to be even, understand it automatically. Similarly, the average and count will also start calculating in the same way. Now suppose you want to know about Swift Nova in the same way. On an average, how often does it buy, what does it buy, meaning how much, what does it buy? Now imagine that there is a party which comes only twice or thrice in the whole month and It takes such a major chunk, that is, 30-40 business comes from only that, so we will see or say that three or twelve times it comes in the whole month, but if we look at the average, then brother buys in lakhs and there is a party which comes 20 times but buys in thousands, then from the average we come to know how much a person is buying from us. On an average, how much is he buying, then the method of calculation is exactly the same. Average Average F Tab is exactly the same. Range criteria now. Last comes the average range. Look, obviously if you are doing sum, then the sum range will come by writing the average. If you are doing average then you will write the average range. Doing is of the same values, otherwise the range in which we have to find is the same, so we will take this party name. Do you know that we have to fix it, why do we have to do this because comma criteria is same for everyone, meaning what we have to find is obviously, we have to find these only, comma average range, we will take the one which is in the sum range, the even range. If the average is even, the average will be in the range, we will fix it with f4 because it is the same for everyone, enter it, then see on an average, here is how much they do, if you do not want decimals, then you can remove them from here, okay , so you have this, now comes the point, this was also very easy, the main part of the average comes the count of sales. If I ask you, those who think that you have this for one month, it was a sheet of sales for one month, okay. Now I ask you, how many times does the person who is SF Nova come to you and buy from you, then if you concentrate on this thing a little, then think about it, if any person comes to you, he will buy something from you, if he buys something, then you will enter in your cell, you will enter, it means that every time a person is coming, he is entering in ours, so if I want to know how many times that person buys from me, then I check his name. How many times has his name been written in my entries? If I find out how many times his name has been written in my entries, then it will definitely become a fact. That he has bought something or the other from me as many times as that is why I have included him in the entry of the sale. So, we will do the same thing here. So think about it, here I have to check about a person how many times he has come but is there any consideration of any value in this? Rather, I am checking how many times his name has been written, that is why inside the formula, when you apply count if, then you will do a second tab, then here there is range, there is criteria, but There is no value because we don’t need the value, so we have to count how many times it is written in it, so you have taken the range in which you have to search, fixed it with f4 and after that you have done comma which means the criteria to find, you have to search for them, just enter, then it has come to you, see SF Nava, it is 28 times in the whole month, see the maximum, Golden Leaf has come to you, no, the maximum has come to you, True Harvest or Organics, so this is If you understand it in a very simple formula, then it is a very simple formula. From this simple formula, you have taken out all the insights about how something is going on in your business, so that is your sum formula. If any doubt arises anywhere, then please ask, I know this thing remains a constant for some time, but here also we are doing it in great detail, still if there is any doubt. Please note that you keep commenting, keep commenting because you will get their reply one by one one by one one by one one by one. Now let us move ahead and look at the formula. We have completed the home tab. We have completed our basic formula. Now we should move a little towards the tab. Now what we are going to do in the next tab is insert tab. So see, we have completed our home tab, we have completed our basic formula. After completing the formula, now we should move forward a little in tabs only. Now what we are moving towards is Insert Tab. Here is your Insert Tab, inside which there are different groups, Which is Table, Illustration Chart, Spark Line, Filter, Link, Comment for Insert Tab. If I summarize one thing and say that the Insert Tab is mostly used, then you can create and link the Insert Tab with this. Creativity. Mainly creativity, if you are creative or doing some work like creativity, then you need insert tab. Along with this, you can also do the work like reporting easily through insert tap. Now through creativity, you also get dashboards, so the most important for you is if any tab comes after home, then comes insert tab. Inside the insert tab, you can see the options, which are tables, inside which we can prepare tables. After that comes the Pivot Table. Pivot Table in itself is very useful for reporting. For now, I am giving you an overview of the Insert tab. After that, we will do the groups one by one. After that, you have the Illustration group. Inside the Illustration group, there are different types of things like there are pictures, there are shapes, there are icons . We will talk about all these now in the charts. Basically, I am going with a scenario here and that scenario. This is that we have Pivot which is useful for reporting, Charts in Plus which help in generating insights in creating your dashboards, if they help, then in Plus you will see filters which are your slicer and timeline. You have already used the slicers for the table. When you were reading, now the use of timeline will come with your pivot only, so I can say that there is a group of filters which has slicers and Timeline is the end, so these things are not complete in the complete reporting. This is a huge chunk in itself, which we will not do with the insert tab. We will do it separately and will do it at the end. Why do we do it at the end because what is the result of anything? It has the insight from which we will take the decision. There is a dashboard, so if I put it in the middle now, then it will not be relevant, you will not be able to connect because half of the things are available, half of the things are not available, now the advanced formula is there. If you don’t even know the advanced formula, you have to do it, so only after that, if we do the reporting, we will understand it better, that is why we will do it later, then what is left, the illustration, we will do it now, we will do the spark line, we will do it now, we will do the links, we will do it now, okay, so let’s complete the overview here, now we will do the insert tap. We are going to do that, we are going to do the illustration group. One second, if something comes first in the illustration group, then what is it? As soon as you click on the drop down, you will get three options, this device is stock image and online pictures. You can insert any picture from wherever you want. If you do this device, then it will ask you the location inside the device. If you do stock image, then the stock images will be shown here which you can directly insert . For online, it will be shown online. Now like I insert a picture from here, okay, I have inserted the picture of the boxes, so look, this picture has come here, now I have to arrange it a little, so I arrange its size in this way, look here. Okay, see, one thing is journalized for the insert tab, so understand it very carefully. From the insert tab, you insert anything, whether it is a picture, whether it is a shape, whether it is a table, whether it is a pit. Be it a table or a chart, if you have to make any changes in it, then you cannot make changes from the insert tab. Then we will say ma’am, then what can we make changes in, if only in that, we will have to make changes. See, whenever you insert something, what you do is click on that thing, then you will see that a tab is created above here, look, I am clicking outside, the tab is gone, I am clicking on this, the tab is clicked out. The picture format has been done on this, that is because if I have to make any changes inside it, then I will click on it here and I will get all the options here, I will get all the options here or I can right click and go to the format picture, then I will get all the options here. The options which are here in the extensions too, like these extensions are not visible here in full, they are visible here on the format control. You go to anything right click. Do format, go to picture or go to format, then you get all the options here to change them. So you understood. You insert anything from the insert tab. If you want to change any thing inside it, then a separate tab will be created. Changes will be made directly from it. There will not be a separate tab. I don’t understand. Right click on the same thing. Go to format. You can explore all the options from there. What did we learn here? Insert a picture. Now picture. I clicked on it from here, suppose I have to remove the background, I can do correction, I have to change any color, see, I wanted to show this kind of color, I have shown it, no, I want to show it a little brighter, so I have shown you the way you want to show the color, you can show it, okay after that, you have to show some artistic effect, what kind of effect should come or any other kind of effect, like this kind of, then you can show the effect in this way, I did not like it so much, I made it normal. I want to keep it in this way, I have kept it, after that you want to compress, the size of your picture is very big and you want to reduce it, then you can do that too. Here, if you want to change the picture itself or reset it, you can do that. After this, you want to frame beyond them. Look, if you want to do the framing in this way, then do it. This frame looks fine to me, it looks beautiful, so I did it, okay, I understood, after that suppose you want to change the color of the border of the picture, then I did. If you want to apply any effect on the picture, like I took this yellow color for glow, then it came, after that, the picture layout, if you want to show your picture in some other way, then you can do it like all text, if you want to put any text etc. in it, suppose you have done it here, if you want to make another copy of it, then what you have to do is either you select it and do control C and go to the side and do control v, then one way is to copy it. Look, I have made a picture here, the second way is this, you go to any picture, click on the end control and hold the roll, just drag it down, just drag it down, just drag it down, so in this way you can make many copies. Okay, now as you have done this, if you go to the picture format, suppose you go to the picture format, then bring forward send backward, this means to bring it forward, let’s say I am this picture . If I want to bring forward from this picture then I will bring it forward, so see that it has not come outside, I have to keep it behind this but if I want to keep it in front of the one behind then In this method, if you want to change anything on your pictures, you can do so. Now let me tell you one more thing, whether it is a picture or a shape, how will you know that it has been selected. As soon as you click on it, whether it is a shape, a picture, or whatever, you click beyond that, then bubbles come in the form of these bubbles. You are seeing these points. Yes, if you are seeing these points everywhere. That means there is a selection there, these are not visible, that means there is no selection, these are visible, that means there is a selection, okay, so from here we have learned about the picture, you want to crop it, you can also crop it, you have learned about the picture, after that suppose you come to the insert tab, I click outside, in the insert tab, Next comes to you, there is a shortcut key of the picture which is good for shape, I will also tell you the shortcut key of insert. It is N, like the shortcut key of home is H, its N is N, press Alt, see N is visible and the picture starts with P and stock starts with S, so S, then look, this window opens with you, whatever thing you use very often, just remember its shortcut key, okay shapes, look, shapes starts with SA, so if I press Alt and S H, then the shape will come, okay from here we can take any shape, I took this shape. I have made it, so here I will teach you a lot of good things in the shape later. I will do simple things. Now I have to make any changes in the shape, so look, I cannot do it from the insert tab. If I click on it, then look at the shape format. If it was a picture, then the picture format is this shape. So the shape format has to be changed. The shape has to be edited. You can do it from here, you have to write something inside it, double tap, your cursor will go inside, you will be able to write inside it too, okay. Okay, from here you have to change the color of the shape, you can change the color, let me assume that this color looks good, so I have taken this color. Look, this is the cursor, you can move it here and adjust it. Okay, after that, you want to change some color here. You can do that. If you want to keep some outline, I want to keep the outline yellow, so I have kept the yellow outline. If you want to give some effect like you can get the effect of glow, then you can change the glow in this way. Take the effect. Well, here if you say in the text, you write some text inside it, you Accounts My Bad Accounts Expert, you had to write this, you took this, after that, suppose you fill the text, you want to make it in black color, you want to outline it in black color, you want to outline something in white color, if it is not looking good then you make it black so that it looks darker, do you want to apply any effect, do you want to apply some reflection in this way, then see this reflection has been done, you want to fix it. Yes, you have selected it, gone home, normal, aligned it in the way you do alignment, formatted it in the way you do formatting, see how well it has come, you are not liking this effect, go here and change the text effect, reveal, you can also do this method, see, you can change anything in this method, OK, now assume that Bring Forward and Forward are exactly the same, you click on this. Do it, hold it with control , bring it backward, so you can do it in this way, okay, I have to delete it, I have deleted it, after selecting it, you had this for the shape too, if you right click on it and go to format shape, then you will get many options here, just as there were for the picture, you get all the options here also, it is totally up to you from where you access it, after that you go inside the insert tab. You will see the icon. Click on the icon. Let me tell you that as soon as you click on the picture shaped picture or the stock image, then look from here also. You can go directly to the icon cutout, people, sticker, illustration, cartoon people or you can go to the icon separately. If you want to go to the icon, then you can also go to the separate icon. From here, suppose I take an icon, I took this plane, I inserted it, this is my icon, now if you want to make any changes inside this icon, then I can go to this icon. When I click on it, the graphic format comes up. By clicking on it, the shape format comes up. In the graphic format also you have to change the shape of the graphic. Let’s say you have to change some color, you have to fill something inside the graphic, you have to make the outline of the graphic yellow in color and if you have to apply any effect on the graphic, then I have kept all these look, similar, similar kind of off. So that it looks good, bring forward backward, you know all this, you have to crop, all these things are same, right click on it and format graphic, then the options will come here, all the things are exactly the same, go to insert, after the icon, I tell you the 3D model, in the 3D model, you click, from here we take the emoji, there are very cute emojis, trust me and from here we took this emoji and will insert this emoji, look at the pot once. For this, I made it a little smaller and placed it here, after that I do a little bit on the side. What is a 3D model? You can move it in any way, okay, it’s totally up to you, how do you have to keep it and just look at the face, yes, it is a cute emoji, so now you have to change anything inside it, click on it, the 3D model comes up, you have to reset something from here, what is the way to do it, if you do not understand, then you can do it like this. Or you can move it directly from here, it is fine. Bring forward a backward. You know that by right clicking on the format 3d model, the main thing is to get the rotation done here. In this, you can get the rotation done directly from here. You can get the rotation done manually by entering numbers there. It is the same thing, in this way you can also insert the 3d model, after that you get smart art. Smart art is done in a way that your diagram does not. As soon as it is listed, it is processed, it is processed, if you want to show any type of relationship of cycles, then like you, I took this process one and I did OK, so it came here, now I decrease its size a little, not a little, but I decrease it a lot. And if I have to make any changes inside it, then I can make changes inside it too. How I clicked on it and here both smart art and format came , what is the format for the things inside. To change and smart art means I have to change only a shape, for that suppose I want to make the shape fill orange, so this is not looking good to me, white is fine, it is fine in this way, well, it looks fine for now, if you want to make any changes inside it, then you can do it directly from here, all the features are the same, you can also format the shape by right clicking, next comes to you, go to insert and screenshot screenshot . Let me tell you, if you do this in the screenshot, then if I do not have any screenshot in my system, then it is not showing. If you already have any screenshot, then it will show the other wise. Screen clipping, what does screen clipping do? Now, this will appear on my screen and suppose I take any screenshot, from here, I have taken any screenshot by doing like this, I have taken a screenshot of it. Okay, so look at this screenshot, it will appear here. Let me just adjust it. First, I have added this image here. Okay, now I zoom it, see, this is my image, the screenshot that came is coming in the picture format, I have to make any changes, I can do it by right clicking on it, doing format printer and clicking on it, then the effects etc. which were applied on it, will be applied here also, okay, you can use format printer also, so here we have completed our illustration group, now let us move ahead with our spark. Before reading groups towards line group, I remembered one thing which I have to teach you, what is a picture insert in a shape, so let’s see, suppose I have taken a shape, sometimes what happens is like we are making an invoice or anything, then we have to put a logo, so we keep adjusting it, so it is better that we take a shape and insert a picture inside it, now you will say, yes of course you take it. Right click, go to Format Shape and from here go to the fill option, here you get picture and texture fill, click on the picture and from here you can choose your picture, after inserting it, I take a stock image, from here we take these buttons and insert it, then in this way you can insert any picture inside your shape, first thing, then this is the second thing, let us assume that you are someone very creative in this. Shape has to be given, sometimes what happens is that you have taken a laptop with green screen and you want to show something inside that laptop, then how can we do such a thing, we will right click and here there is edit points, click on edit points. If you do this then you will see that points have appeared everywhere. Now your cursor is also changing. Now you can make anything happen with it, like made it like this, then from this point we made it like this, any kind of shape, like suppose I have to make it like this at this point. It has to be made like this. It is becoming kind of A, isn’t it? It is becoming kind of A. Now I will take this shape a little and make it look tight, now I understand. That is , if I want to do more on this point, then I will right click and do edit points and I have to stretch this one a little bit more, stretch this one and move it here a little bit and now I have to make this shape tight like this, so look, I have made a shape, I was just making a random shape, ch is a a, now suppose let’s look at another shape, we have taken a shape, we have taken a rectangle shape, right click here. Okay, now the picture has come, this picture has come, okay, now I will right click on it, I will do edit points and let’s say okay A points, so I have made it like this, look, it looks exactly as if there is no screen, it looks exactly like that, look exactly like we have created a separate LED kind of that screen, you can make any shape in any way, see, you can make any shape, anything is fine in this way. You can edit their points and create any shape. This is a problem for general people, but it can be done very easily here. Now we can move towards our spark line topic, for that we will need a data, so quickly let’s see what will happen that there are charts made inside the cell itself. There are very small charts which tell you about that data. We understand the charts as soon as we see them, so they are not charts, basically they are There are spark lines which we can create. Now suppose I want to see all the marks of Aarav Sharma in the form of a chart here. So what will I do. I will go to the cell in which I want to show it. I will go to that cell, after that I can do whatever I want to create a spark line. First of all, whenever you have to show a trend, you use the line, then you will take the line. Here you have to take the data range, the data range means which you You want to show that you have taken the data range, location range, I had already told you, go to the cell where you want it, if you do not go to that cell, then here you can put it in the location where you want it, you do OK, then it has come to you in this way, see, it has come in this way, now I will make it 60, it will come in this way, now see, I had just explained to you last that if you insert anything from the insert tab, then you will have a tab for that. One way it comes out is that I can drag it directly, then I will have to go through all the formatting one by one, I will have to change the thing or I will have to change the entire selection, so now what I do is, I click on it, I go to the spark line, first make changes in it, later I will drag it. Okay, what is the edit data here, meaning if you want to change the data itself, then you can do that here on the line column, let me say this. If I want like this then I can do it directly. There is no need to go and do anything. Look, high point means what is the high point of this entire data. 47 60 2040’s 60, then see second is high point, what is low point, 20 which is maths, what is negative point. Negative edge is true, we do not have any answer. What is the first point, from where it started, meaning 47, what is the last point, where it ended, 40 markers. Which will show these markers, like high point, low point, negative point, if we have turned it on then it is showing all the points through the markers, okay, now you know which point is which, okay, I have also told you from here, according to what I am telling you, if you want, you can also change the color of the spark line. Firstly, the spark line means the line that remains, if you look, I have made it red, then the line itself has become red, okay, if you want, you can change the color of the spark line. You can also change it. I am keeping the color of the spark line black, after that you can change the color of the marker, like leave the negative point ready, whatever the marker is, you can show it yellow if you want, or you can show the marker green if you want, I have taken green, or we can show the marker with some other color too. Which is blue, so we have taken these blue ones, after that we show the high point with green. Okay, we show the low point with red, you can show the first point with blue, so look in this way, blue green red red, now you will understand by seeing this, you can drag it, you are not able to see it, so I do one thing, I fill it with color so that you can see it a little better, now you can easily do not fill it just for the sake of showing, it will look very strange, just now you can see this thing clearly, so I have inserted it, just like when we have the spark with the column. If you want to make a line then you can do that also. You have started applying the formula. You go to the Insert tab and then go to the column. Give the data range here, after that you do OK and you have to change any things inside it, like here you have to make the negative points, the high point, you have to make it green, you have to leave the low point red, you have to make the first point blue, just double tap it or drag it and your spark lines will appear. Similarly, you have to do the same for Win Loss. You will go to the Insert tab, you will go to the Win Loss tab, the data will give the range, you have given the range, after that you will do OK, so this is where you got the markers, now you have understood how the markers work, then in this way you can change the colors of the marker, okay, it is up to you, in which way you want to see, in which way you want to show your data, you can use it at that place, so this was your group with Spark Lines, where we have completed about Spark Lines, this is it. All the options were there, after this the link comes to you. Now we will read about the link because of the filter, we are going to read with the pivot. Now we will read about the link. What is the link? For the link, I will need a sheet where we have many sheets like we have this sheet. Now suppose I create a main sheet and write anything here. First of all, I write a name which is written here. Data creation is ok. Creation, we have written this name here, Data Creation. Now suppose I want to put a link on it so that if I click on it, I will either reach the data creation sheet, then in such a case, we can insert the link. You can either go to the cell and click on the link, this window will come up or what can you do or what can you do directly by pressing the control, because what do we call this link, we call it hyperlink. If you do control H then the replacement will come K is the last alphabet so control key is fine, you can remember control key. If you press control key then you will get a window like this. Now let’s see what is there inside the window. First of all assist file and web page. If you want to tell any web page then you can tell. Okay place in the document. If you want to link to any document which is inside this workbook then you can do it from the document. Create a new one. If you want to create a document or want to attach an email address, then you can do it. Now we are going to explore both of these, like place in the document, so we had taken data creation, this data creation is here, comma, click it, OK, now see that it has changed, now you will click on it, you will go directly to the data creation page, okay, which sheet were we on? We were here, now this does not mean at all that we need to have a sheet. I have to take the same name like there is date and time formula but I write Accounts Expert here, okay and by going here, controlling it, going to Place in the Document, I link it to the date and time formula here, so it doesn’t matter what is written here, if I click on it, then access to the date and time formula is okay, so it doesn’t matter at all, it doesn’t matter at all what you have written, where has our sheet gone. Okay, we were here and we come to sheet one, okay, so here we learned, now after this we have to learn one more thing like suppose we have to do a web page, now I copy the link of our website here, here we took the link of the website and from here I copied it, now I go to my place in the sheet, write here web page or website, okay, here we did it with control, after that we took the web page one and we get here the browsed pages, current folder, all this, so Go to browse pages, enter the address here which I want to link, I have linked it, I have done OK, now I have one more thing to do. I will delete it from here so that you don’t think that we have taken the same link as before, we have taken the end here and okay, we have opened it, now we go and click on our link on the website, as soon as we click, it will take a little time just because this is the work of the internet and see, it has directly redirected us, directly on our website, we have come to our website, so in the same way, if you want, you can add any kind of link in it. You can attach it, it will redirect you there itself, okay, how do you have to do it, press the control key, your hyper link will come from there, that thing will be attached, here I have told you both the things, place it in the document and in which way you can also place the web page in this, the third thing is that your email comes in it, you have to log in for the email person, so you can log in that thing or you can directly create a new document, so here we have told The major point is that the link has been completed, after that you get the comment. What is the difference between comment and note? You are also hearing the note when we were doing go to special. We were doing special in pay special. In go to special, there was both comment and note. There was note in go to special. So, what is done with shift f2, like what is done with shift f2, this one is fine and one is this, you get this. Comment is fine. Comment, you can write anything like. Defaulter and Anything Okay, now what is the difference between these two, look for the difference, we need a data data, if we get it, then we can tell the difference, like suppose I have this data, one second, I take some good data, just give me a minute, we have taken this data, okay, we have this data and suppose I have added it here by doing shift f2 in such a way that the payment is pending for this person, so we have to take care of his payment pending in the next time, do this, OK and here. Also, I showed it through shift auto that the payment is done, I showed it here, so this is a note that whenever I go, the same will be visible to me and otherwise I can’t do anything in it, only these notes will be visible to me, only that girl can add a comment here, to add a comment, I showed payment pending here, I did this and I see, it is written here, if you press control enter, then it will be posted, then it is posted, now you will go to this. So the comment is coming but here it gives you the option that means his payment has not come till today, never mind, his payment has not come till tomorrow, never mind, the payment has not come till tomorrow, no problem, the payment has come today, so obviously you want to remove it, then you can right click on it and here you can resolve the thread that the thread is resolved, now whenever you go to it, resolve will show that brother, payment first. It was pending, now it has been resolved. Now let’s say, if you want to delete it, you can delete it. Now, if you want to delete it, you can delete it. Okay , so this is the difference between the comment and your note. This was your comment which got resolved, which you can delete. These are your notes which are visible as it is. You cannot do anything inside it. What you have written is there. It is done in that way, okay, so here we have completed the comment, you have given the link and also the comment, after that the text comes to you, the text is nothing, this is a text box, you will say that it is a text box, I don’t understand, see, it is very easy, the way you have inserted the shape, then you will go to the shape, then the first thing that comes is the text box, don’t you see, this text box has come, so the same text box is directly given separately here, this is also a text box, see, it is the same, you will click on it. Even if you click on it, the shape format comes, so it is the same as I told you about the shape, it is the equation equation or symbol equation, I tell you many equations are already there, ink equation. Suppose you want to write an equation and now you have like you are using a pun tub like me, then you can write any equation here like Why is he considering, he is considering the sum, he is not considering anything, 3 4 is not considering anything, he is considering the fear and the rate as zero, that is, in this way you can make any equation, like I have made this equation, it is behaving like an equation. Let me make one more equation and show it, it is not of much use but still if you have any use of it then you can use it ok just give me a minute equation, we will take ink equation and like you can write this x up in y = 239 in upon 435 multiply by 3 That equation will come, then this was a method, so whatever creative thing was there, it has come in the insert tab. We have completed our insert tab here. Now we will move ahead towards our page layout tab. Now the next tab that comes is the page layout tab. What does the page layout tab do? See, whatever you are creating data and doing, if you are obviously reporting, then there might be chances that you will need all that in hard copy also. So, if you want everything in soft copy, then in such a case, you will need a lot of Page Layout tab because it helps you in printing. Okay, so first of all, let’s have an overview here for once. The group that comes here is the theme group, which we have also read with the cell style, that if we have to change all the colors, then how can we do it? You can do it from here, like I have changed the palette here, so whatever is the initial a which is our home. The palette that was there inside the tab has been changed. Okay, here inside the cell style also, the colors of the palette have changed. Okay, if you want, try changing any palette here again and make it green. Now you go to home and check your palette from here and check the cell style from here. It has changed. Okay, so these are our palettes, which we are here to change things in the entire data. After that, we have the page setup, scale to fit sheet comes. Option comes and arrange comes then mean these three come here which is page setup scale to fit and sheet option ok so before we do this let me tell you why we are doing all this so that we can print right then print how do we select our data and take control . It is also visible that we can connect the printer, that thing is different, the properties of the printer etc., I am not talking about all this here, I am talking about all the other settings related to print, if you setup its end page here also, then other settings will open, then you, I am defining this thing here so that there is no confusion, the settings here and the settings here in the page layout are the same, it depends on you, from where you like to do it, do you like it better that I am here. I make the changes and after that I go to see the preview, then make the changes there and if you think that no, I do not understand what I have to do and what not to do, I want the changes to be reflected, so you can make the changes from here too, those changes will be reflected to you here, okay, so we will make some changes from here as well as from there, but don’t get confused, that is why I have already told you that this thing is going to happen in this way, let’s go now. We move towards one group each. The first group that comes is the page setup. So we know how will the work be done without theri. Our work cannot be done without theri. Our alt okay just give me a minute right now, first of all we will come to the page layout, we will come to the page setup work. First of all, what is the margin? Now what is the meaning of margin? What is the meaning of margin? So we hear profit loss margin, there is that margin over there. Don’t you see, this is your paper. Okay, I ignore the drawing. Do it, this is your paper and I am talking about the paper that comes to you generally and when you look at that paper, you can see the lines inside it in this way, there is another small line in it, okay, this is how the paper is visible and here a slight extra is left so that you can turn to the next page, so tell me one thing, here you are left for the title and for other things, here you can write the serial number etc. and you can write the other things. Yes, this one is left blank space for you and if you talk about exam, then you yourself come here with a line so that the teacher can write his marks here, then what do we say to the one who leaves this area on the side? What is called margin? What is called margin? We say that we have left margin on the side and the middle area which is now I make it a shaded area, a second shaded area which will be this middle area, this one which will be the middle area, inside this you write correct, inside this you write, then the outside area you have left is called margin. Now I will show you or tell you one or two things right there itself. One, you have seen the normal thing, two more things come that let’s say. You have this notebook here or this page of notebook, okay, one is this page and one is this page, okay one, I have done this where also I will do the yellow part, that is your writing portion that you can write here, so we did it here and it is here now I highlight the writing portion where you can write, you can write here and here you can write in this, you can write in this portion, okay so you one Tell me one thing, when you talk about the margin inside this one, you are seeing that the margin on the side is very high, so this margin is called wide margin. What is called wide margin in which there is less space for writing and more space on the side and right here, if you see that there is less space on the side and more space for writing, this is called narrow margin. And how basic understanding or common sense is that if you assume that you have large data, then obviously you You would like that the data on the side should be less in space and my data should come on the same page, then you will use narrow margin. If suppose you have a little data and it should look a little better in the page, then you will use wide margin so that space is saved on the side and my data should come in the middle properly. And if you have a normal situation, then you will use normal margin and not the normal margin as it is then it is fine. Similarly, now you understand the three types of margins, go to the page layout. There are three types of margins within the margin, normal, wide and narrow. We can also customize it. To customize it, we can do it by ourselves. It should be so many centimeters. It should be like this. We can do this by ourselves. It should be horizontal. It should be vertical. Look, it is visible here, the horizontal center on the page should be horizontal and vertical. So, you can do all these things. Now how to do this, once we Let’s look at my data here, if I go to control, my data is coming in this way, the complete data is not coming, then what do I do? Look from here, either I take the margin narrow from here and now go to control, then see more data is coming, first it is coming till the product name, now it is coming till the state or look here also there is an option of margin, you can click here also, you can do custom margin here, I make all the things zero, I definitely want

margin. Otherwise look, the space is gone from here by mistake, it was removed from me, we will go back to the custom margin, we will make everything zero 0 0 0 Row and OK, so look at this whole page, even a little bit of space in the whole page, now the data cannot come on the side, there is no sheet, there is only this much data, so that is why it has done till here, so here I have not left any margins at all, my data is coming in the whole page in the whole page because I have set it myself, customized it if you want. If you don’t customize then you have normal wide narrow. Now if I did wide then only this much data would have come. If I had done normal then this much data would have come in normal. If I had made narrow then I would have had data in this manner. But what I had done at that time was that I had customized everything, I had made it zero, so I make it zero for once , from here I made it zero, made this also zero and did OK, so my data has come in this manner. Okay, next we come to orientation, now let me explain the orientation a little creatively so that that thing can be remembered, now I am telling such a thing and if it is not remembered then what is the use, so just give me a second, now let me explain it to you, see, all of you must be taking selfies, taking pictures, so whenever you take a picture, you have held your phone in this way and now you are taking a picture, so which mode is this mode? Let’s say portrait mode. You are holding the phone in vertical form. The form in which your reels come and shorts come in which form does it come in portrait mode? Suppose I do it like this. Now if I am clicking your picture or clicking any picture, then in which mode am I clicking? Which mode is it in landscape mode? This is landscape mode. If you are giving a picture or youtube0 video, obviously most probably you will be watching it in this way. Right, by doing this in this way, then in which mode are you watching? In landscape mode, if you were watching it like this, then in which mode would you be watching? In portrait mode, then it is fine. Similarly, we can adjust our data, it is up to us, how do we want to print, click on the orientation, look at the portrait, the picture is also visible here, portrait or landscape, we have the data is big, we need to show it in landscape, then do it in landscape, if you want to do it in portrait, then do it in portrait, from here, let’s say for now, I control p, control p for a second, then I have the data coming in this way, okay, let’s say now I once from here I will also tell you from there, I will control p, then look, it is coming in landscape mode, look, now everything is coming after writing till the price. I was not getting the columns in landscape at that time because there are more columns at the top, so I should have done landscape. It was not coming in portrait. Well, you can change it from here also. I told you that all the settings are there here, you can do portrait from here too, it is not looking good in landscape, that’s why we do it here because here we have to do it. You get a direct preview of what is there outside, then we have to come here and check, this is giving me a better clarity, this is giving me a better feeling, my data is visible in it in a very good way, so I will keep it in landscape, okay, so here we learned the next thing, that is our landscape or portrait, which is the orientation, after that comes to you the size, you click on it, many types of things are already given, so either you Pick it directly from there that I have to pick this, I have to do this, I have to do a legal document , I have to make a statement or I want a3 size, I want a4 size, do this, I will definitely tell you a very basic way to understand it, whatever document we make, whatever documents we print, all of them are done in A4, okay and if there is no problem in understanding, then I will tell you that as this number decreases, I will say a3. a2 So that means the size is increasing, the size is increasing, okay and as soon as I say a5, a6, it is getting reduced, now let me give you an example, there are documents in a4, inside a3, your sketch which you make is so one page, the thick page comes, that is your a3 and there if you talk about the pages of the notebook then a5 will come and if it is a small notebook then a6 will come, okay then it is the reverse. It is said that as the number is decreasing, the size is increasing and as the number is increasing, the size is decreasing. Okay, so in this way you can see that the normal document that we prepare is within A4, rest it is totally up to you that in which you have to do it, then that is your size, after that comes the print area. Now think of it, you are in your data, here you control p for a second, by controlling p, the complete data comes and you are seeing. Yes, there are 52 pages coming below, this is such a huge data, but you say no, I don’t want all this data, I only need the state and that much data, I only need this much data, so select the amount of data you want, after that you go to the page layout, after going to the page layout, click on the drop down of print area and set the print area from here, this is done, now you go to control page, only that data will come which you have selected, rest of the data will not come, look below, it is one page. Earlier, how much was coming, 52 pages were coming, so what did you do here, set the print area, what did you do, set the print area, okay, if you do not want to set the print area, then you will go here Clear Print Area, now look, press control, it is complete, right here it is complete, if you want to set the print area, then you can set the print area from there, after that you have the option of breaks, what does it say that if you want to insert any break, then we have inserted break here. So look at this line, my data was here at that time, look here for a second, I had put a break in my data here, so my data is here. Till now everything else is coming below, in this way you can apply brakes, you remove them for once, then these brakes are gone, one second reset all page breaks, look at ours, I take it in normal view, our data has come in normal view, I go here, only after three headings, I insert the break here, okay, one line has come, now I control p, so see, two lines have to come on the initial, in everything else. The data is coming in two lines in the initial because I had put a page break. After two lines, only two lines are coming there, so you can break it as per your wish. Now you have put this break wrongly. So what can you do, go to the break point, reset all the pages, now do control p, then your data will come in the same way. Basically, suppose you have to put any type of break anywhere, you have to show the entries till here, you just go here and break it and then Press control and see that you have got so much data. If you want to leave then simply go to break and reset all pages. After that press control and see that all your data is coming in the normal way. So in this way, if you want, you can also insert a break. After that comes print tiles. Okay, sorry. After that comes background. Suppose you have this Excel file which is visible behind you, which is Excel like this. If you want to insert something in the entire Excel, it looks beautiful. If you want then you can put it, we don’t use it, but it is not used that much, but if anyone wants to do something creative, then you can do it. Let’s say I take the logo from here, I don’t have any pictures like this, we can take a picture from here, so see, this is how the logo will be placed, it is present in the entire workbook, it is present in the entire meaning sheet and if you want to remove it, then just delete the background and it will also be removed. Okay, after that comes the print tiles. Inside the print tiles, there are many settings which help you in printing in different ways, like if you click on the print tiles, then look inside the print tiles, there is the page, there is the margin, there is the header, there is the footer, there is the sheet. Let us know about the page. Suppose my data is not being adjusted. Now I want to adjust it, so I have two options. First of all, look at the orientation. I have done the scaling. You can also do the scaling here. Will read, if the option here has come inside it, then you can read there also, after that the print quality is OK, fine margins are there, which I have read, the header is the footer, which we will read and all the things inside the sheet sheet, whatever we have to change, look at what is there now, print area, print titles etc. You already know that turning on the grid lines means that if you want that whatever I want to print, the grid lines should be visible, then you can turn it on, you want that the black end. If the data is in white then you can turn it on. If you want draft quality or heading of row and column, then you can turn it on. We do not want that. Down the over over the down. The way you want to order the pages, you can do it. Now we have done the down the over, which is right and you do OK. Now look, you come by controlling p and see that the colors have gone from the heading because you had taken black and white as an option there. Now if you do not want black and white, then you can print it. Go to the tiles , go inside the sheet, turn off black and white and do OK. Now turn control panel and see that the colors have come back. It is totally up to you how you want. From here, go to the print tiles. If suppose you do not want the grid lines, you can remove them. Okay, now I will tell you one more thing that suppose you turn the control panel and here the heading is appearing on your first page but the heading is not appearing anywhere on the second page or third page. In such a case, you If you get worried about not being able to see the data, then in such a case, you can get your heading repeated again and again here. You will go to the print tiles and look inside the same sheet. It is written here, ‘Row to repeat at top’ or ‘Column to repeat at the bottom’. There is nothing on the left like if I want to repeat, then I will not take that. If your data is horizontal then you can take it. Right now our data is vertical, so we need row repeat. We have to do this, we will select it, select it and do OK. Now look, now you control p, after that look, you go to any page, look, I look below, I am on page 20, 21 , but all your headings are appearing in every page, so this In this way, you can put any heading you want to put in every page. If you want to remove the heading, then go to the print tile in the same way and remove it and do OK. Now when you control p, your heading is no longer coming here. If you want to put it, then you can go and add it. Okay, here you guys have learned this setting, now we are left with two settings of the page which are Chch is page which we will learn inside scaling and from here we will Okay, so now let us learn both of these things. First of all, let us learn our header footer . What are header footers? Suppose, let’s take a page here. Here we have taken a page and inside the page you will see that there may be a name of your company at the top or anything else you want in every page. If you want, you can write the page number at the bottom. So what we write above is what we call header which we write in the space above. And what we write in the space below, we call it footer, so it is okay, you can also customize your header footer inside your document, so how will it be, like in the page layout, first I go to my data, it can be in two ways, either I can go to the print tiles and from here I can go to the header footer and write here. Ah, either I can choose from here what I want and or else I can write a custom header here, I want it in the center, I want it in the left, I want it in the left. I want it on the right. I want it on the right. I want it in the center. Suppose I want to write Accounts Expert. I wrote Accounts Expert and OK. And here in the footer, I want to write pages. So look, I will not do custom footer, I will take pages from here. Page one, page two, page one. Took and I have given OK. Now I will take a preview tomorrow. I will do a p here just because we don’t have space. Look, page three is also being written and accounts export is also coming on top. So let’s do one thing, this is the margin and we keep it narrow, so see here Accounts Expert is written below. If you are going to page one next, then Accounts Expert is remaining as it is because we had customized it and the pages are going as you are moving. Look, it is going on in every page of yours. Okay, you can do it in this way. If you want to customize the footer, you can do it. As of now, Accounts Expert is visible in the middle, if you click left and right. If you want, you can do it from there itself, there was one way, see what is the second way, you get different views here, you will also get it in the View tab and here also, you go to the page layout view and directly from here, if you want, you can write something else, like let me say here, I write Accounts Expert in small letters in short, earlier it was written there or wait, I write Accounts Expert Accounts Expert app.com, which is our website, okay. We wrote this and entered it and after that I have come to the normal view. Now I did control p, so look, now above here the account is written as expert.com which is a website and see it is being written in every page. Okay, so in this way you have two ways. Either you can write directly by going to the page layout view or you can go to the page layout and see that the page layout is the same and this is also the page layout, so the thing is the same but as per your choice, what do you remember? What do you want to use, then you can either do the page layout from here or go to the print tiles and customize it by going to the header footer here. You see it visible here. If suppose you want to remove it, now you say that you want to remove it, then the methods of removal are the same. Either go to Easy Out there and remove it from there or remove it from here, then they will be removed. Okay, I will keep it here now, so here we have done the whole group of people with page setup, now the thing is. Now comes scale to fit. Suppose I control p. So look here, 64 pages are being made. I don’t want it in 64 pages. I want it in 50 pages. Look, to do it in 50 pages. There is anything to be done in 50 pages. Look, what is the maximum that can happen? One, I can reduce its margin. Okay, I don’t want to reduce the margin because the data has to be shown in a small way. So what can I do after that, which is the data, the size of my data. If I can reduce the size, then how will I know how much to reduce the size? Look, I have two options either I keep reducing the size myself, like I kept reducing the size in this way, it is okay and after that now if I control it, then it will be more. It is able to take entries. Look, my data has become smaller. Now it is able to take more entries. Is it okay or what can I do like custom scaling? I will tell you, wait for a second, click on it here, the same window comes, you come here, either I told it what size to take, I don’t want to tell it the size, I don’t want to tell it the size, I keep it at 100, just keep it at 100 for a second, I I want to tell you how many pages I need to fit in, I need it in 50 pages, now you do it, okay, now according to you, he has taken 62 because he knows because I told him that brother, I need it in 50 pages, now brother, you see, after how many pages you need to do it, will you give me the correct answer, if you give me the correct answer, then now it is 50 pages for me in 20 pages, okay, because we had made the height wise, we fit in two pages. Will do one second one and wide by okay t and from here we will do 25 and okay let’s see once let’s look at it now it has come to 50 pages and it did it comfortably and what it has done is scaling on 81 has shown that whatever multiple we get na I took the multiple that the width of two pages and the height of it in 25 pages adjust it in this way you can adjust it from here also you can adjust it from here also You can do this or go to the print tiles and from there you can also do the page settings from here. You have all the options from where you have to do it. It’s totally up to you. After that you get grade line views and print view. If you want, you can turn it off or turn it on. You will see the same according to whether you have put borders or not. If you have not put borders, let’s say Control A, I do Alt H B A, I do Control A, Alt H B A, I did one second. So my data is gone, even though I am on control, see grid lines are coming, I have removed them then why grid lines are coming then why should it not come because in our page layout the grid line is on, now I have removed it, now I press control, then see now grid lines are not coming, if I turn on these here, now I press control, then see now grid lines are coming, so even if you have not put a border, turn on grid lines, that border kind of off you. It will be visible okay, same with the heading, if it is in view, if I have removed it, then press control, it has come in this way, now the heading is not visible to you, whatever heading comes above, you turn it on, these headings have come, okay, bring forward etc., all these things are the same, we have covered the main ones in the print settings here, now what we are going to do next is that we will do the formula just like the formula, so this one. We are not going to tap the tab. Now what we will tap will be the review tap and then we will tap the view. As its name is, its work is basically giving you review by doing things and helping you in doing things. The first one comes for spelling. Let’s say I take some data here, let’s take a small data like I took this much ta, copied it, brought it here and pasted it and just I did it like this, okay, control A, did Alt OCA, now assume. Take, I make some spelling mistake in electronic, removed this in fashion, removed this in fashion, okay now suppose I want to get it checked, I took this and after that press f7, either press f7 or click on spelling, the thing is the same and it is giving me a suggestion here that look, you wanted to write electronic here, did you write it wrong or wanted to write electric or wanted to write electronics or wanted to write electronica. I remember yes I had to write electronic so now you chose this one. After that see, you have the option Ignore once or everywhere if there is a mistake then ignore all but I don’t want to ignore it, I have to change it. Now the question comes whether the same mistake is still happening somewhere else too. So suppose we do one thing only at one place, I do it here at the same place, copy it, do it here too, do it here too, okay look now, selected the data, pressed f7, now it is saying ‘Electronic Aana’. Okay, if I ignore the one here, then you have understood the thing. If you accept that I make a change here, if I make a change, then it is fixed here, it has not happened in other places, it has not happened in other places, it is showing for other places, if I do change all, then it has been changed everywhere, okay, now it goes to the next page until it is clear that everything is there. The spelling is correct, it will keep telling further, it is saying here, do you want fashion, yes, I want change all, so it was everywhere, now it is saying spell check complete, you are good to go, now you can go, it is absolutely correct, so whenever you feel that your spelling is a mistake, you can check your spellings, it will suggest you that it is a spelling mistake and now you can correct it, inside the complete data, after that comes to you Thesis What is the thesis? It is a synonym in a way, suppose you have written a word, you have written answer and answer is such a basic thing, don’t you want me to write some advanced word for it, I will write answer here and will search for it, that is why I told you that you can call answer as response, you can also say reply, you can also say reaction, you can also say resolution statistics, you click on this, how many words are there inside this workbook, first look inside the workbook statistics. First of all it is telling about the current sheet, which sheet is open, about that sheet, the end of the sheet is g17, the cell with the data is 39, the tables are zero, the formula row is Sheets four, the cell with the data is that many cells and after that it is telling about the workbook, so whenever you want to know anything about your workbook, you can go for the workbook statistics, after that comes to you, check accessibility, now what is good and what is bad inside my report. It is better for me to search for a person to know this than I ask Excel itself to tell me what is better or not so I will click on check accessibility here so it told me here so what is it telling me hard to read text contrast so where is it saying here it is difficult to read okay so here it will suggest you current text color is hard to see consider a high contrast color so That the text is clearly visible because here if I had made dark green color here then it would have become more visible okay like I have crossed it out okay sorry we will go to the review to check accessibility okay so this is our clear missing all the text so see here the text is missing so it is telling me okay after that our rest of the things it is telling me okay the default sheet name is saying there are three sheets which have the default sheet name so you are seeing. If you don’t give the names of the sheets , then we won’t know which sheet depicts what, what does it tell, so in this way it has checked and told me and it will make me correct all the things one by one so that the report I make is at least a little better, doesn’t it help me, that is your check Accessibility Translate is normal, we do not use New comment Add a comment which is the same thing that we learned from shift f2 and then notes Notes: You have already learned where we had added the protect sheet. Here we had protected the sheet inside the format inside the home tab. The same protect sheet is now inside the review. There are so many options that they are found in many tabs, some will be found in the home tab too and some will be found in other tabs too. If we do the same work then there is no problem in that. We have done hide ink. Suppose I am using pe ink here, I have used pe ink here, anything. Ink has been used. Now suppose I want to remove it, then it gets hidden. Hide all ink on sheet or delete all ink on workbook. It gets deleted from the entire workbook. It gets deleted from this sheet or it gets hidden. If I delete from the sheet, then I deleted it from the sheet. Okay, so here we have completed our review tab. I am doing a little tab. If you are also like me, then I have completed my review tab. While practicing, you want to write. I use the pen tab. If you also want to do the same, then I am telling you for that. See, this prop is your pen, there is a brush whose thickness you can increase or decrease, so you can do this normally, like I am writing, you can write anything in this way, okay, after that you also get this pen, this eraser comes with you with which you can erase anything, after that this marker comes. With which you can highlight anything, after that suppose you want to delete the whole thing, then you select it like this, you can move it here and there and can also delete it, after that this arrow comes. Suppose you want to use the arrow instead of the pen, then you do the arrow. If you do not select the arrow, then it remains only a pen, after that comes to you Ink to Shape, so what will you do in Ink to Shape? Suppose you have created a shape like this. After rounding and then in Ink to Shape, I select it for a second and then I go to Ink to Shape, then see it has been converted to shape and it has literally been converted to shape, you click on it, see that the shape format will come, I will make another one and tell you like I have made it here in this way, now I will select it first because my selection will be from this and after that I will click on Ink to Shape, then this is my right. The angle triangle has been formed and now let’s say here I select it with arrows, then see the shape format comes here. Okay, ink to math. Just like we had written the equation, it is exactly the same that you can write the equation here, which we have learned in the equation. Replay of these, let’s say here I have done Tanu single here, anything like this, I have done anything like this and I want to see the ink spread, so look like I have moved my ink in this way. This has come in the format of video, okay, I erase it and okay, we can also delete it, so this was your draw tap, it was very easy, I thought that if you use it, then you should give an overview for once, so this was our draw tab, now we have moved towards our view tab, but still there is one thing left in it, so that is for that one thing, so we will definitely see it, rest I will tell you the most in the view tab. First you get the views: Normal Page Break View, Page Layout, Custom View, then you get this thing from here, so you do not need to worry about going there, you will go to the View tab, then you will see that the work is being done in an easy way, we should do it in an easy way only, so you can see it directly from here, after that, Grid Lines, lad, all the grid lines I was turning on and off till now, I was doing it with the shortcut key T, Alt , you can do it from here. You can also turn it off. Look, I had turned it off for now. Now it has turned on. Do you want to remove the formula bar? Remove the formula bar. Do you want to remove the grade line. Do you want to remove the grade line? Click on these three dots and do the Always Show ribbon here, now the ribbon has come back. Now from here you can turn off the grid lines and the formula bar and also the heading, so in this way, if you want, you can show the entire data on the entire screen, you can also make changes for the ribbon, you can remove the grid lines, remove the formula bar, remove the heading, okay, after that you get the zoom option, so you can use the zoom option. It is better if you explore from here itself, then you will click here, see here, you have to do 100%, 100%, if you want to zoom, then this list has come, if you have to zoom a lot, then you have to click on this, then it is in this way, it is better if you explore directly from here, if you want that list, then click on this, then this list will also come, so you do not need to waste your time by going to the view tab. You can do it directly from here, after that comes a new window. Suppose, the way I taught you, inside the format for the sheet, inside the home, you can copy it from here, then as it is, a sheet will be created. Similarly, if you want, as it is, a workbook will be created. Now our workbook or insert tab is basic. If suppose I make a new window, then the insert tab has come to basic two. Now suppose I want to get it arranged. So I have arranged all, how do you want to arrange it? Horizontal Vertical, I want to arrange it vertically. Okay, so look, all the files that were open have been arranged vertically in this manner. I did not want to arrange in this manner. It’s OK, I did not want so many files. Where were we, we were here. Okay, and we have arranged all the files for once, so in this way you can arrange . Only after this, you will get this view side by side, which view do you want with this, which class do you want with this, so these two views have come, now there are a lot of files synchronizing, if I do this, view side by side, due to there being a lot of files, this is not happening right now, you can also see it in the same way in the other wise, by moving here and there, OK, switch window, switch window, now we are free. First of all, let’s see what is the switch window? Suppose, I can directly jump to any file from here, but if I am confused from there, then I can see it directly from here. Like, if I want to go to Insert Basic, then I have come here. Okay, I right clicked on it, it came completely. After that comes Freeze Pin. What does Freeze Pin do? If you see, now I go down, my heading is not visible, so I am not able to see which thing is which, so if I want to freeze my heading, so how can I do that, whatever you want to freeze, you select the area below it, after that you go to the freeze pane and do the freeze pane, after that see, okay, we have selected the area wrong, we said okay, unfreeze from here and here, come here, from here and after that you come here, okay, now do the freeze pane, freeze pane, then see, this is how your data is being done, okay, directly here too and you If you want to unfreeze , then unfreeze your beans will also be done from here itself. Okay, at the same time, you have the option here, freeze top row directly. Even if you do this, it will become the top row. You do not need to select anything. Suppose you want to freeze the first column, then you see the top row is also there. If you go here and there, your date will remain as it is so that you can see this date is this and the rest of the things will remain like this. You have to unfreeze. Unfreeze it, okay, so in this way you can see your data, so here we have completed our view tab, now what we will do, let’s see what we will do now, I will teach one formula, I will teach two to three formulas that if you are looking at the data, then how are these data created, if you want to learn this, then now you can learn this in a very accurate way. See, first of all, what do we need, first of all, we should know this. Suppose I want the serial number, then I have given the serial number. After that I wrote the number , I want a party name, so I wrote the party name, after that, suppose you want any amount, then write the quantity, write the quantity, after that you want the rate, you write the rate, after that you want the amount, you write the amount, I make one data, I make another data and tell you, let’s make two data. Okay, what can you do for serial number, normally you will write serial number and just drag it as much as you want serial. You need a number, here you can take 10 serial numbers, which is enough and take one more, okay, we are making 10 entries for the party name, now let me tell you for the party name, you can use Chat JPT, all two here too, you can integrate your AI but we will do that later, but now we will use Chat JPT, what will you do, go to your account, write Chat JPT here, you will enter, after that you will You will go to the official Chatpati from open, you will click on it and here without logging in, you can do whatever you want with it, you will tell him give me 10 random Indian business names, then he will create it and give it to you and now you can copy it, okay copied and you go to your data here, after that paste it here, then you have these names, quantity for quantity and rate, amount for amount, then this will come quantity to rate. But for quantity * rate, if you need some values here, then here we will apply a formula, what is the formula? One is Rand formula, all the formulas are Rand, all the formulas are random, okay, what is random now, we will apply the random formula equals to rand between one, so let me explain the formula to you, first let’s do one thing, Rand formula, what does Rand formula do? It gives a random number between one and one, put rand formula, tab it, what is it saying, I just don’t want anything, I just turn off the parentheses, turn off the parenthes, hit enter, then look, it will give a random number, okay, what does rand between do? Equals to rand between tab, it asks you, in between which range do you want the number, like I want a number between 100 to 200, so I asked what is bottom, what is 100 up. Top what is 200 pence of enter so it gave me the middle of that now you notice this changed rand formula whenever you apply it or do any activity the whole formula changes like suppose I have written a here it has changed write anything here d whatever I am doing this will keep on changing so this is a draw back of it but I will also teach you how to correct it okay so first we rand You will fill your data here using ‘Between’, after that I will teach you another formula. ‘Between’ tab, after that at the bottom you have to write which is the quantity, neither 500 is good, you can write 50 to 150, Pens of Enter, so here we have written the quantity, what can we do in the rate, Equals to Round, ‘Between’ tab, after that at the bottom, take 1000 in the highest. Take 5000, turn off the pens and enter it and double tap here. Here you can put any formula of yours. If you put the formula here and just check then you have created the data here. Now what is its biggest draw back is that it will keep on changing, so what will you do to ensure that it does not change. Select all the data, select both of them, do Control C and go to the same place where it is, do not go anywhere else, do Control Alt v at this place and in which Now change it, this is the formula, convert it into values and do OK, then see that now the values are written here and the values do not change, the formula changes because there is a reference in it, so now it will not change. Now you can do whatever you want, after that you can do whatever formatting you want in it. If you do not feel like doing formatting, simply press Alt O A. This is a shortcut key of your auto formatting. Where you can use any key and give OK, its formatting is done, you just correct its alignment, then look, you have data ready, you get worried like this, let’s create another data, here I will take the rest from here, I have taken this thing, instead of party name, I will take student name, okay and here I want student name, here we will call only four GPTs, give random 10 Indian names. With first and last name, okay, we have entered and it will give us, okay copy it from here, come here and paste it, so it comes to us, now we will write here Hindi, here we will write English here, we will write maths here, we will write science here, we will write total here, okay now look, I need marks here, I know I need 10 rows, 10 rows have to be filled, four columns have to be filled, total, so I will get it later, so here we will put the formula. We will tap the array, see how much is required per day, how much data is required, 10 is required, 10 entries are required, then write 10, how many comma columns are required, Hindi, English, Math Science, four columns are required, four commas are minimum, if there are marks then minimum can be zero, maximum can be 100, minimum row can be maximum 100, if you want to keep some more minimum maximum then you can keep comma, now it is asking for integer, see if you want that Decimal number will also work in the result, so put false for me, but if you want it or not, I don’t want decimal number to work, then put true that I should get complete integer, then it is totally up to you, what do you want, I have to do true because I want complete number, I turned off the parens and entered, then look, it came in one go, but there is a problem with it, do anything, if there is a change, then there should be no change, what did we think for that, what did we do to select this data? We will do Control C, we will do Control Alt v, we will enter, and see, in this way your data has now been converted into values, now you do not have to do anything, here you press Alt equal to 2, here it comes Control A, do Alt o A, press A here, let’s say I want this formatting, I have done the formatting, okay, your data is completely prepared, so in this way we prepare the data for ourselves, now we will enter our advanced formula. Let’s move towards advanced formula. First of all, I am going to take the formula that we have. If I talk about ifs, then look, we have done no ifs. Okay, so now we are talking about ifs. What is ifs? What is ifs? It is the one where there is multiple condition. When we talked about ifs, what did we clearly write when we talked about ifs that brother, single condition is single. We had written the condition, just like when we talk about ifs, we have this plural word, so now we have a multiple condition, now it can be any multiple, which is more than one, okay, so here we go with a normal scenario like now see, here the rating is given and here the name of the party is given, so what is inside this scenario, we take two things because there is more than one. We have to see the condition that if the rating of a person is below three or equal to three then we call him good and if he If it is above three, then what do we call it? We say excellent. Okay, we can keep these two things that if it is like this, then this is this, if it is like that, then this is the condition here, so what can we do here, we can put ifs formula, ifs tab, okay, this thing, no, we can do more than one, just because now you have made only a single condition, so now we do with two conditions, okay, so what will we apply logical test here. What logical test will be applied, who has to be checked, who has to be checked, you see these things, no, I have already made you know that now all the terms will come, you have already done the logical test, now you do not have to do it again, now you have understood it, so we have to check the rating, we have checked the rating, what have to be checked, is it greater than equal to 3, what if it is greater than equal to 3, then first let us take the Smollett one. Is it equal to 3 then what do we have to write that it is good and if this rating is greater than 3 then what do we have to write that it is excellent. The value of true value false does not come in it. It just has to be told directly in it that write this, then see it has come in good, you double tap, see it is five, I make it four, then see it has come in excellent, I make it six, that’s it. If I give a five, then see if it comes in excellent, then in this way you can do these things. If suppose you have multiple conditions, how will you do it in this way, then you may have to apply more look ups, you may have to apply Will tell, okay, I take it like this and delete it, okay, I had prepared this report, on this side, I have taken the names of all the parties, on this side, I have taken January, February, March, this is my data, inside which I have a look, let me tell you, date, month, name, category, product name, everything is okay, what do I have to do now, I want to know the total of the particular party, right now the same party must have bought many times, so I want to know in January. How much did you buy in February, how much did you buy in March and there is date and month written next to it, so I can find out this too, so here generally when it comes to sums, I take a sheet here. See, when we talked about sum if, if you remember, okay, we saw that you had a sheet with 10000 entries given by your manager, in which North, North East, West South entries were given, so you sum them. Now the same manager is saying to you that yes, it is okay that you have taken out North, now in North also tell me how much in January, how much in February, how much in March, how much in June, now he had single condition in North and put one more condition, how much in January, how much in February, so now what have you got, multiple conditions have become multiple conditions, so there are multiple conditions, so it seems ifs, that is why we will put even ifs, okay even. If you apply Ifs then you get the same things. See Equals to Sum Ifs tap, what comes out of that, Sum Range Sum Range, what to sum, Criteria Range, Criteria Range One, Criteria One. Look , let me tell you a little difference for once, so that you can understand well, here we will first put Sum F. Sum F, here was our range Criteria and here was our Sum Range, okay and here what will we do, Equals to Sum Fff, now this What is taking even range criteria range one criterion neither then criterion range two criteria two and so on because if you can take more than one then tell me one thing tell me one thing let me first ask what is this range in which you look for so here what is the criterion range do you look for the criteria no there is more than one criterion here so I have written criterion one and here I have written criterion range one. It is the same here, there was only one, so there was no need to specify whether there is one or two. Here the specification is done only because there is more than one criteria here, so here I wrote criterion one, here I made the criteria range one, here also you used to select the range first and then select the criteria, here also you are selecting the range first and then You will select the range of criteria, then a criteria of the same will come, okay, here the sum range was given, it was given in the last place, here you have given the sum range earlier, the only difference is that everything else is the same, now we will put the sum ifs, earlier I have shown you the data, we will put the sum ifs here, let’s do the data, yes, okay, we will do the sums, let me go here for once and I will put this data in one go or else one. Let’s put it in both the bars one by one, first find out the answer for one time, then find out the whole answer together because cell referencing, now we have got the hang of it, now we are talking about advanced things, so equals to sum, ifs tab, sum range, we need the sum range in our data, obviously we will take the sum of sales price, we have taken the comma, after that look at this formula, read the criteria range, one criteria, what is the names, is the names of the names. If you are searching for the names then in which name then you have taken the named range, okay comma, what is the criteria, what is the criteria, you go here, Bharat Innovation is in even F, comma, after that, criteria range two, now you have January, February, March, this was also your condition, so now you will go here and where will you get to see this, whatever you have made for this month, you got this, after that you have f2, okay, don’t fix it now, comma, after that you have this. Here, who has to be checked, I have to check January, enter two answers, it may not be of Bharat Innovation, it is good, this is the way we enter this data, now what is it, I tell you how to calculate complete, in this there may be only zero answer, no sale was done in January, that is why it is here, then I delete it from here, they will sum the complete of complete, if that means we will tab all the completes, will give the sum range here. What will come, we have to take our amount, so from here we will take the sale price, this is the entire amount taken, tell me one thing, the even range is going to be the same for all, did we do this thing in Even F also, yes, it is going to be the same for all, fix it with f4, fix a comma after that, what is the criteria range one, what is your name, then what will be the range, there will be a column with its name, we have taken the name, is it going to be the same for all, with f4, it is going to be the same? Fix comma after that, if your criteria comes then what is the criteria? Whatever you are going to search, you are going to search all these names, na select all of them in one turn, comma after that, second, what are you going to search, this is January February, so first of all you have to take the range, then you will go inside your data, you will take the range from here, from where will you get this monthly range, have you selected this, is it going to be the same for all? It is going to be the same , fix it with f4, do the comma, I think, okay, I think, I will tell you later, okay, now what criteria do you have to take, so this is all in one go, if you want the answers of January, February, March, then select all of them, do not take the total till December, enter the complete answer till December, our data was such that selective sale was going on, so see, the entire sheet has been filled in this manner, so if you also want, then it is in this manner. Let’s see what we have applied, you may think that I have done it very fast, but if you apply, then do it very slowly with patience, reading each and every thing and understanding each and every thing. I will once again revise it to see what I did. First of all, I had to sum the range, so whose sum had to be done, I had to sum the amount inside my main sheet, Criteria Range, Criteria Range, what was to be taken, brother, I had to see according to my party name. Where will I find the party name? Inside the party name, in the main data, there is criterion one which we are looking for, criterion two in our months and criterion two which is inside our report, so in this way we have applied this formula and have prepared our sheet. Through the formula, if you were to apply the filter yourself, how much time would it have taken, then here you can create it directly, so here we have completed all the ifs. Well, there is a very small formula which is left with us, which is sub total, so we would like to see it further and see what is the benefit of sub total. I just want to tell you that, so I do one thing, I take a little data from here, let’s just take this much, okay, we will copy and paste it here separately, let’s do old OC. Now what do I do, I sum here. To do this, what do I have to do here? To make even, what do I have to do here? Tell me, I have to do alt equal to. I made alt equal to enter, so here I have got even. I do a little formatting on it. Okay, here I have got even. Now what do I do here? With control shift A, I apply a filter here. After applying the filter, I do any filter. I have to check the decor, so I did the decor and OK. So now I am not getting even here, then it is a big problem, so what do we do in such a case, we put sub total here, instead of sum, whenever we work, we should use sub total, what benefit does sub total give us, put sub total, do the tab, see what sub total says, it has a lot of options, so you can use any one in it, what do we have to do now, we have to sum, how much is the sum, is it nine pe, or I go like this. Should I tab or directly write nine like this, comma after that is sum like the formula of sum seems to be reference one reference to that means he is asking for the number then you will give the range from here, you will enter then your total will come, now you see, press control shift A, after that you take dicker from here and do ok, then see now it will show you the sum of whatever you want to sum, you can do car excrement from here, do ok then see it will show the sum. So this was your sub total formula which helps you a lot, so whenever you are working on any of your big data, you know that I have to apply a filter on it, later if I want to check the total then apply sub total instead of normal sum and it will give you a better result, so here we have completed our sub total formula. It is about advanced formula and not about look up. How can it be like this, what we are doing now. They are going to do their look up formula, what are they going to do? Look up formula is ok, look up formula, now why did I say this, so let me tell you its logic too. Look, we do three formulas, we do look up, A is look up and Bring it, search it, bring it, now you will say, what does this mean? I don’t even understand it. Suppose this is your manager. The manager has a complete data in which there are lakhs of entries. Now the manager has selected you out of 1 lakh entries. He has given you this and here he has made a report in which there are 100 entries in it and has told you to extract the data of these entries and give it to me. Take this data of 1 lakh entries. Take this from inside it. There are 100 entries, take them out and give them the specifications. Take out these 100 entries and give me these 100 entries. Will you apply a filter or not? Will you find out from there? No, this is a very time consuming process. So, what do you do? Do you use the look up formula? What will the look up formula do for you? We will go inside this data and will give you the answer of these 100 entries from this data. Okay, so now you understand this. If I talk about lookup formula in general, then how does lookup formula help you? If you want to extract some small information from big data and you want to extract some information from big data, then lookup formula is used. Now you will say that ma’am, lookup formula is used, so what is this and lookup H lookup And look up then comes to us A look up and then comes to us What is horizontal data? Do you remember I had made a special on you in which you were transposing the data, then the horizontal data had come, your that is your horizontal data is fine and single access data, why are we saying that, we will understand further, now suppose you have understood, why is it called v look up, why is it called h look up, both the formulas are the same, I do it like this, both the formulas are the same, if v lookup comes When I went, h lookup came. The only method is that when the data is vertical then apply v look up and when the data is horizontal then apply h look up. Now I am talking about these two, so h look should not feel left out, it should feel the most modernized. Why should it feel? One, x look up is a new formula, it is not in every version, it is in the versions after 2019 and the x look up is optional. Whose alternative is v for look up and h for look up, it is okay if you don’t know v look up, h look up doesn’t come, no problem, x look up comes, all the work will be done, if v look up comes and the rest don’t come, then there is a problem because h look up will not happen, h look up comes, even if v look up does not come, there is a problem, but if The same will be useful, this is an alternative and I would say it is an easy alternative if you have not learned V look up. Suppose you are in an interview and in his system only V look up works. Let’s see, I am going with a scenario that this is your big data or this big data with lakhs of entries, party name is written here, category is written here or product name is written here, region is written here, contact number is written here, is it okay in some way, this is your A column, B column, C column, D column, E column is okay and now you have to find the data inside it, so here you are making a report inside which the first name is written Raju, now you have to bring its contact details, what should you bring? If you have to bring the contact details, then basically you have to find Raju, who do you have to find, if you want to find Raju, then how does the look up formula work? When suppose this data, suppose I am creating a dummy data here, inside this data, this one here, I do not want to spoil anything, so I am creating it here. Suppose Raju is standing here, that means there is a person standing here who has to find Raju. Okay, so he should know that he is searching for Raju. If I I will not tell him that I need Raju’s contact details. I need Raju’s contact details. Will he search ? That’s why whenever they start the formula, they should know who they are looking for. Whom we are looking for, we call it look up value. What do we call look up value look up? What do you call look up value? Look up means whom to search for, go and bring whom to bring, that value, Raju is the look up value when your formula is started. If that person goes inside and searches, then he should know in advance that he should keep roaming around for a while, then you will tell him that wait, I had to find Raju, it will not happen like this, so when he starts the formula, right from the beginning, he should know what is the look up value, if we want to find Raju, then from here itself, our first question arises, what comes out, I write down here, the first question that comes out is that our look up value is extreme. It should be on the left because look, there is vertical data, so first it will go to the first column, first it will go to A. How do you read AB, CD, this is how you read, that’s how you check, isn’t it a systemic way? Check B first, then check C, then check A, then check G, then check G. Don’t do it like this. It will go to the first column, then to the second column, then to the third column, then to the fourth column, then to the fifth column. He will go and then he will find out, oh here is the contact details and I wanted the contact details from here and that too of Raju, he will find Raju here only, this Raju is here and after that he will go and check the contact details in each and every column, then the first requirement is that your look up value should be in the extreme left, if your look off value is not in the extreme left, because see, if any person starts searching for something. If you do it, it will go left to right, it will go left to right, you are going A B C D, if you are looking at yourself then you are going left to right, then if your look up value is not left to right, if your look up value is not in the extreme left, then your look up will never give the answer and mainly people make the same mistake. They know how to apply V lookup but they do not understand the parts of V lookup, that is why. If it doesn’t work then you understand its meaning now. If you apply it then you will understand better. Second second comes to you, what is Ajman? No duplicate look of value. Now let’s say no in this. No duplicate data. Data can be duplicate. Look up value should not be duplicate. Meaning if I say there are two Raju’s then you will not get confused about which Raju either tell him in a simple way Raju Sharma Raju’s anything but if you tell him only two same person’s name is in it then get confused. This will happen, then it will bring wrong data, that is why the look up value should not be duplicate. If the subsequent data is duplicate, then it will work. Look up value should not be duplicate. These two conditions are there. If these two conditions are satisfied, then you can apply V Look Up on that data. It will bring you the answer and give you the answer. Now see what all the things are there inside V Look Up. Now V Look Up works like this, now I will tell you more about the look up. Here, if A look up happens, A look up happens, in v look up, what does it do? It is checking each column. In H look up, it will just go to each column and check. It will go to the first row, then it will go to the second row, then it will go to the third row, then it will go to the fourth row. So the movement here is from up to down. Okay, this is the only difference, it is the same ajman, that is everything. Now let me tell you both the formulas here like what is the Equals to v look up tab. Look up value table array column index number and range look up So let’s write it and after that tell you like here we look up what is coming inside it look up value table array what is coming after that column index number and what comes after that after the column index number your true or false ok I will also tell you the look up h look up also here and tell you by writing h what is the meaning of look up h look up look up value now you will be able to understand the difference in this. Look up table array raw index number and true and false. Now see the difference between these two. Look up value. Look up value. Whom to search? Whom to search? So whom did we have to search there? If we had to search Raju, then Raju is yours. Look up value is the table array in which we have to search and in this we give the entire table so to search in which we do not give any specific thing. Like within the range, Pressa easily used to say, search in the party name, it is not there. If you give the complete data in which you want to search then the complete data is complete data but remember that the range should be on the extreme left which is your look up value. This is what I told you. Look at the column index number. In V Lookup, it checks in each and every column, hence the column is the index number. Inside it is the raw index number. What is the difference between the two, in which the answer is written, the column with the answer or the raw number and you tell this number by counting yourself and After that you get True or False True. You use Approximate to match whether you want an approximate answer or not. We will put False because we need an exact answer. Okay, now let’s go ahead and see if you understand. I will look at our data first. Name is Category. Product Name is Region. City is everything. After that you come here to v look up. Here we will apply the formula for Harmony Foods is equal to two. v Look up tab one second I had to zoom it a little bit here equals to v look up tab look up value Harmony Foods are looking for comma table array table array is where we have to tell all the data to it so you take your data and remember whenever in the table array, your look up value should be in the extreme left, there is no look up value in the extreme left because he will start looking from the left, your look up value will not be found in the left. And if it will not give you the answer, then from here on the extreme left our look up value, we have selected the data, comma, after that it says the column index number, what answer do we want, do we need a category, count the category, on the first page comes the name, on the second page comes the category, then what is your column index number, so you have taken two, comma, after that, what do you have to do, should I put true or false, we will get the exact match from true. If we want the answer then we will take the exact answer, tap on it and close it from here and enter, then see our answer has come here, okay now I will tell you by adding one more thing in it like I have added the serial number here, serial number and here I do one and here I have done this and made it a fill series, I take this and go to home. I took this format post, I clicked on it, once again and I am here to tell you that we look up, which is the mistake that people generally make and after that they say we look up doesn’t seem to look, we look up tab look up value look up value, we have to search this: comma table array table array, take the table array, they take it from the serial number, so you take it from the serial number, now tell me one thing, is your look up value in the most extreme left or not? That’s why the answer will not come, I am telling myself right now, the answer will not come, but let’s look at the column index number. First of all, there is the serial number. One second number is the name. On the third number, there is the category. If you want a category, then you will write three, comma, after that, false tab. Panis of enter. The answer will not come. Will A not come? Now the answer will come. Look at the answer. Equals to V. Look up tab. Look up value. Look up value. You have to search for a value. We are here. Okay sorry, had to take a look up value, I put back equals to v look up tab look up value, we took the look up value, comma, after that we will take the table array, table array, we have to take it here, now we cannot take the table array from here, what will we do, we will take it from here because what we need is in the extreme left, whatever look up value we need in the extreme left, we have searched from here, comma, after that now we will take our column index number, then the column index number. Now should I write two or should I write three because there is also a serial number, so we always have to count from where the range starts. Now where does our range start, it starts with the name, so the name is the and the category is the two. Whichever range you give, it seems to be the same, its data does not know the data before and after it, so that is why if you write two from here, then write two directly here, make a comma, do false, tap on the pencil. Turn it off and enter, you will get the answer. Okay, understand. Now suppose you can drag this. If you drag, will the answer come? What if the wrong answer has come? This is the wrong answer for you. Okay, so how will you bring the correct answer. To get the correct answer, see, we need the product name here. If I am doing it here, then it is 2 to 2, so ours was that, 2 is our category, so this is this . How to fetch the answer because it has look up value a2 and here it has taken our look up value b2, it has taken the look up value fashion, so what look up value is our fashion, otherwise you cannot do this, so now if suppose I have to do something simultaneously, then how can I do it, so either I have this method that I keep changing the column index number for each one, three for this, four for this, five for that, so this is a time consuming process. How can I put equals to we look up tab look up value comma, after that we will take the table array table array, now we will take it by name only, you know why we are taking it by name and whether the table array is going to be the same for all or not, then we will fix it with f4, comma, now tell me one thing , what answers do I need in the column index number, what answers do I need, I need category, product name, region, city, state, meaning if I count again. If I start doing 2 3 4 5 6 7, I want the answer till seven, then should I do it one by one because I write two manually and it is fixed, so when I drag, there is not even three in place of two because it is fixed, so what will you do in such a case? 7 Turn off the curly brackets, after that, remove the comma, remove the tub, turn off the parenthes, enter, your answer will come in one go, it is correct, see how correct it is, a2 is its look up value, a2 is its look up value, a2 is its look up value, ok, I still have one complaint from here that I had not kept this or that, so if you want, you can fix it, what can I do now ? I select it and just drag it over here, then see, it will give me all the answers, okay, this was one method, but this method with curly brackets does not work in the old versions, so in such a case, you can put a column formula here, what can you put a column formula, if I delete it here, then I tell here, the column formula will appear here, equals to and look up tab, look a value look a. Value taken comma table array will take table array you took and it is going to be same for all so fixed it with f4 now look column index number we cannot take curly brackets but We have to take something like this that if it starts counting automatically, then we will put the column formula here, then what will we do in the Column Formula tab, after that, if we want to count from here, then we will come to our V Lookup and wherever it is, then we have to take it, okay, after that we have to turn off the parentheses, put a comma, after that, false , turn off the parentheses, enter, so see, it has given me the answer, okay, so one way is also there, if in your If the curly brackets don’t work then you can use the column formula. Okay, this was your nested formula. Nested formulas are when you put another formula inside a formula. Here we have put a column formula inside a formula so that we get the answer. So this was your nested formula. So in this way we put our and look up. If I had to put H look up, for H look up also I have If there is data to be passed, then what do I do? If this data is visible to you, if it is in horizontal form, then we will apply H look up, okay, but before that, H look up is normal, it is used very less, so now what we will learn is that we will learn X look up, look inside Can’t go here, can’t go there, it should be on the left. There is no ajman, it does all the work with ease. Second thing, let me tell you what values are written inside x look up . Array, just like you did not do in range, you used to directly choose the party name. Now in this also, directly choose and return array. What is the meaning of written array? Answer, just as in that, you did not do it by taking the same range. You used to take the same range or return it. Meaning, we have to tell what is the answer, find out what is the answer, what type of search is to be done and who has to do this search. Okay, so now we will put our Look up is done very easily, so we will directly take care of equal to We will fix the comma, after that return array answer, what is the answer, what is the answer, what is the answer, what is the answer, if we want the category answer, then we will take the category answer and enter, then see here, I should have fixed it because it is going to remain the same for everyone, enter and just double tap it, then you have the answer for everyone, but what should we do so that it gives the answer for everyone, so tell me one thing about us, if I have for everyone. If we want an answer then our look up value is going to remain the same and when the look up value is Y then the look up array is also going to remain the same, the only answer is what we have to change, what do we have to change in the written array, what should we do in the written array so that we have all these answers, right? We have to set it in this way, so let’s put it again. Let’s check once in which way we put it. We can see by putting lots of combinations, then look up X. We will tab, we will look up value, we will take comma, we will look up array, we will go to our data, look up array means where we will find it, where we will find it in the name people, we will find it in it, we fixed the comma with f4, now we need return array, in return array we need answers, from category to gender, so I selected till gender and the selection is done till the bottom, now it has come from c2 to h30 331. If I enter it directly, it will give me the answer. Is it Maharashtra Pune Male Gender Is it correct We check Voman Dress Yes is it correct and then now I drag it and bring it down Is it giving me the correct answer Fashion Suit South Kochi And see what answer was coming here I delete it and it was getting the answer here All West Vadodara Gujarat That means our X look up is wrong here Is it wrong They check so that If we want to understand it right, then look here there is a2, here a2 a3 a4 a5 is coming, it means it is coming right. But here also this thing is coming fine, that means the look up value is coming fine, the look up array is fine, now it comes to the point, now tell me one thing, if we want to find the harmony force, then our range is from c2 to h33, okay, here our same will remain the same, here it is from c3 to 332, here it is from c4 to h33, it means c should remain common and the numbers are increasing, the numbers are increasing, but We have to keep the number number the same. We also have to keep the number the same, so what will we do, we will put a dollar in front of C so that C is fixed, let’s try once and in front of H, now let’s see by entering. Hey, I should have done it here, let’s fix it with A4, let’s try and see only by doing, we will know where what mistake we are doing. When we entered, then see, now it is here. Now I go and drag it, then there is no impact on the answer, why not if I am here? If we had taken leti, what would have come to mean that C was already fixed, we should not fix C, we have made this mistake, now let us fix two and see, we put dollar in front of two, fix it with f4 and here also we fix it with f4, okay let’s enter, so what we did here is that the number is changing, right basically C and h remain the same, the rest of the numbers are changing and see your answer has come, what were you doing? Change of s and h to c and h was the same but the number was changing. Now I will try to explain it again so that if you understand it better then equals to If you want the answer then take the answer till gender but remember to press f4 so much that your numbers get fixed. C and H are fixed anyway but these numbers should also be fixed because the range is going to be the same for everyone and you press enter, you will get the answer and after that you can drag it because if you have not fixed the look up value then it will keep moving and you will keep getting such answers, then in this way From this you can apply Yes, let me do HMC like this, here I will write any name, like what we do is that inside this filter, we create a drop down with data validation, okay, I am going to teach you this later on, but for once here, let us create it, okay, so here we have the name, we will write any name here and after that we will have its formula, meaning its data will come in it, no matter how many times it is written, everything will come, so first of all for this. We need that whatever is your data in which you are going to search, I am going to search which also has duplicate entries inside it, so if there are duplicate entries inside it, then we are going to search in it, we keep this data here, it is okay for once, we are going to search inside it, now the thing is that we have to keep the same heading there and the other wise, our data will not come in the right way but remember that according to whom you are searching, your heading should start from there. If you want then we will take comma from here, copy it and go to our filter here and paste it here, so in this way your data has come here, now we will put the formula here, Equals to Filter tab, after that we will take the array, inside the array you have to give the complete data, so you will give the complete data from here. Well, the data you have to give is to be given by name, it is not necessary, you can give the complete data, you have given the complete data, comma after that it says Include according to whose name you are looking for. According to whom you are looking for according to the name,

then you will select it, you will do equals to and what should it be equal to, what should this cell be equal to, this cell should be equal to this cell, whatever you are searching should come inside this, enter it, so here just because we have to take it like this, in the date format, okay, so here he has brought me all the entries, whatever his Look, if the entries were not completely copied here, then here it has completely copied and brought it from the date, so all the entries that we had to take, all the headings which were to be taken should have been taken from the date, so it has locked it and if I say some other name from here, then look, it has locked the entries for that too, if I do something else, it has brought it’s entries and given it. You click any of them, it will bring all the entries and give it to you, okay. So in this way, if you want, you can apply a filter formula, if you have duplicate entries, then it brings that too and gives it, so this was your filter formula, you see, making a search box, this is what it means to make a search box, in this way, you create a box, write your name in it and your complete data comes below, then they say that the search box has been created, the name is written above and the complete data is below, so this is what happens, that search box is fine, next we move ahead. Look, till now you were working with this actual data and what was inside it. There was a look up value in the extreme left. There was a look up value in the extreme left. Now I do this work with the look up value. Whatever is there, I bring the shift category here. Hey brother, no problem, do control plus, sometimes things do not work, control v and delete this, okay. Right now I say that I want a category according to the name, then you will say that there is no look up value in the most extreme left, otherwise how will we look up? I will apply Datchi’s formula. Now how does the index max work, which is an index? Equals to the index tab. So look, what is required in it. Are arrays required? Raw numbers are required. Column numbers are required exactly the same way as we use in Laka etc. Raw numbers are required, are column numbers exactly the same? How does this work? It works on the intersection, basically it will find the data in two ways here, it will also find your vertical data, then it will also find the horizontal data, where the intersection will come, it will bring you the answer. Okay, so now how will we use this intersection, how will we do all the things, let us see, we will put the equals to index formula here, we will tab it, we will give it, we have to give the complete data, so we will give the complete data from here, it does not matter, you complete it. Give the data, don’t think that brother, yes, if it is a serial number, then don’t give it. Give a comma. After that, the raw number. If your data is vertical or horizontal, if it is vertical, then you can give the raw number in the vertical. What can’t you give, then instead of the thing that you cannot give, I am telling it in a very simple way. I have not gone into much detail because you will get confused. The formula is like this, that is why I am telling a very logical thing, the vertical data is raw. You can give numbers, you can not give, you know that we are applying a different formula of combination, then put the match. If there was horizontal data, then we could have given the raw number, then we could not give the column number, then there we would put the match formula in place of the column number, now here we will put the match formula in place of draw, put the match formula, do the tab, what does the match say, look a value, what to search, then you see what to search here, we have to search this name, isn’t it the name? You have to search comma, after that look up array, where will you get this name, it is exactly the same as you will get this name, right here inside this column, comma, after that you want exact match, less day, greater day, obviously exact match, do zero, turn off the parentheses, so till here you have put the column number, you have not put the column number, now you will tell him what is the answer, so you had chosen from the serial number, right? If you want answer category, then 2 is your column number. Is there anything left after that? Will we use comma? No, there is no need to do anything after that. Turn off the pennis and enter, then it has given me the answer. Fashion is ok, can I drag it? Try it by dragging. No, why can’t it? Why can’t it because the answer has already been given? I have given it a column number. Can I bring it like this? Yes, I can bring it like this, but here I have to do it. We will have to check the match because even inside the match we have given a look up value, is it correct? We will have to check that thing once again for the product name. What did we do? We took the array and took the array. We will select the entire data from here and the array is going to be the same for all. Yes, so it has been fixed. Comma after that, can you give R number in the raw number and vertical data? No, apply the match formula. Tap Do after that look up value. What is the look up value? You see, you need according to the name. You have taken the name. You have taken the comma. The look up value has to be changed again and again, so we will not fix the look up array. Look up array. Where will you get it? It will be found here in the name. So you have taken the name. The look up array is going to be the same for all. Yes, so you fix it. After that, we need zero exact. Take off the commas. Do the comma. After that, what do you need? Column index number. What do you need the answer to? Now you need the product name. The product name would have come anyway. There was no need of a match. There was no need of an index, but you tell me. 1 2 3 4. Forth on the fourth number and enter. Here the answer will come. Woman dress. Just drag it over here. So you have all these answers. Now we can drag it. Can’t we? Okay, so in this way you can use the index match. I just wanted to tell you a little bit, you all. Work can be done with v look up Lo, even if I change my heading in this way, your answer should change. Now this work cannot be done in V Look Up, why because there is column index number in Select it, OK, you have selected it, put a comma, after that the field means what is the answer you want, what is the answer saying, what do you want, give it whatever is written in this field, it is not there because we can change it, so give that comma, after that criteria criteria, you already know what we have to find, but here we give the criteria with the heading, when we enter, then this answer has come, now look, I am here. If I am changing it then look, the answer will change, this is me, no one of any kind will give you any error here, let’s put it once more like D gut did tab did what did we do in the database, we give the complete data in the database, give us your whole load data, okay, these are multiple criteria, then it comes in handy, you gave a comma after that, what is it asking from you, you will check this field field, whatever is written about it, give a comma after that, criteria. So the only criteria here is that it has to be given along with the heading, enter it, your answer will come , you check it, you change it, then see that it is getting changed, okay, so in this way we apply the D Gut formula, after that you get D Sum, D Sum also works in multiple criteria, so we will put Ds here, like Sum If is an upgraded version of Sum If, so if DCM is to be applied, DCM. Put the sum, if it seems easy, then put that, there is an alternative to that, tap the database, take the database, we have to get the complete data in the same way, we have taken the complete data, after that do the comma, after that it is saying tell the field, then from here we will tell the field, we want the amount answer, so we took this comma, after that it asks us in D Sum to tell our criteria, so now the D Sum is such that within which we have to give the criteria along with the heading, we have If you enter the given then this answer will come, okay what you have to do, everything is the same, you have to give the same database, you have to give the same fields, you just have to keep in mind that whatever criteria you give, you will give it along with the heading, so here we have completed two more formulas, f is d sum and d is gut, after this let’s do a formula which is large and small. Basically, assume that you have this data and you want to know that it is rank wise and not rank wise. We are extracting but give those five numbers which are the highest or give those five numbers which are Smollett, then in such a case you can apply the formula, see here you put large equals to large tab, after that array means from which you have to find, then you have to search from this, so we have taken this comma k means which values 12 2 3 4 5 This is what we need, top one is needed, top two is needed, top three is needed, then you take this and enter. If you do, the top five values will appear before you. Similarly, the opposite will be given that if you want small then small will also come, just tab it, you have to give an array, give it a comma, tell him the meaning of top small, he will tell from the bottom, he says no, your rank came from the bottom according to that which is the lowest, according to that, he has gone away telling, so it was very simple but it should have been done, so I got it done for you, after that it comes to you, a we are mostly at our place. We have covered all the formulas that we need to know in advance. In this, I will teach you one more formula which is the finance formula. Finance formula. I want to explain it to you in complete detail. So let’s complete it with a case study. See, here we will take a very simple example. Suppose you have bought a phone. Okay, you bought the phone and you bought that phone for Rs. ₹ lakh. It’s okay. And on which interest of NM 12 is going to be charged, now you figure out how much its installment will be, so 1 lakh and you are going to pay it in 1 year, you are going to pay it in one year, then you see how much you will pay within 1 year, 1 lakh, then you have to pay the principal amount of ₹ 1 lakh, so its cost is ₹ 1 lakh, plus its discount on ₹ 12 means interest of ₹ 1 lakh on 12, then you will have this amount. How much becomes 112000, it becomes okay, now you have to divide this amount by 12, that much will be your installment. For example, for once, let us take 8000, that is, your 8000 is being made, so within 8000, you know that you have withdrawn only a little of 1 lakh, this is also the 12th installment, so your 8000 is being made. Your principal amount is also going inside it and along with it, your interest amount is also going there. Right, whenever you have to calculate the installment that how much money will I have to pay, then you apply PMT. PMT calculates the installment and gives it. When out of this installment, when you want to separate how much interest has gone and how much principal amount has gone, that means brother, I have paid how much principal amount and how much interest has been paid, then I will calculate the interest amount. For this, you apply IPMT and calculate PPMT to know the principal amount, then I can say that whatever is logical for you is fine, there is no such equation, PMT is equal to IPMT plus, PPMT means your installment, what is formed from the principal amount in interest plus, so this is how the formula works. Now let us see one or two things in the formula here. What are one two things, one two factors, one. So what is the factor that principal amount is the principal amount which is the main amount on which you have bought it. Okay, secondly, what is the rate rate? The amount of interest you have to pay, the interest you have to pay, now the interest you get generally, when P is written, that means enum means for the whole year. If I write this on 12, it is for the whole year, then how much will it be for the month, because of our formula. If it asks us in months then Ch is 12 but divided by 12 then it will be % of every month. Okay, after that it asks for time. Time means in how much time you have to repay it. Suppose if you have to repay it in years, then our formula asks us in months. So 2 * 12. We will answer 24 that we have to repay it in so many months so that because your installment goes, it goes as monthly installment. If it does not come for this reason, then what will we do here? Now apply our formula and see, here it comes to you, you can see what is the loan amount, it is a loan of 1 lakh, your interest is being charged, so how did you withdraw this much monthly, if you have done it at 10/12, then the monthly installment has come, sorry, the monthly interest has come, the loan term is said to be five years, so the period month should obviously be 60. It is 5 * 12 for 60 months, so now if you want to withdraw the installment, then what will you apply? PMT, will you tap? You have already calculated the rate, so you take the article, calculate it in advance, divide by 12, otherwise you will have to put a comma in the formula, after that on n, on n, what will be the time taken, to be repaid in 60 months. Comma after that, PV means the principal value will be this much. Enter, then you have this answer. Principal amount is an outside world, meaning we have to give this value, it is outwork. If you show this value as negative inside your formula, then this value will come positive. Otherwise, you can also keep the installment in negative. You have to know the principal amount. Now that you know the installment, you want to know that if my installment goes, then it will be in that. How much will the principal amount go to, then we will tab PPMT, we will take the same rate, comma after that, what are you asking but for how many years it is going to last, that is, we have to find out the number of years, how much principal amount we are paying in a year, or in that one comma, how much is the total going to be, go after 60 months or comma, what is the PV after that, enter lakhs, then see, this amount from this installment is your principal value and right there. If you take out the interest on pay then IPMT tab, after that you will give the same rate. You have to take out the year on the comma, but the year comma is once in a year and after that what are you doing on N meaning your months comma after that enter your PV then this much is your interest. If you total both of them then which is 21 24. This much is your installment going. This much principal amount goes inside the installment and this much amount of interest goes. So here we have done the basic, meaning it is basic, if you understand it well, then it will be basic. Other wise, you will get confused in this also. In the basic funda way, I have given you the finance related formulas here, so here we have covered all the formulas from basic to advanced. Now we will move towards our main topic which is going to be our pivot, where we will learn from reporting, where we will learn about dashboard. After all this, we will tap the data tab and developer, now let’s move on to it, so if you have watched this video till now, then I can definitely say that now you must have understood Basic Excel and Advanced Excel very well. Unfortunately, we have to stop this video here and the reason is that youtube2 If I am explaining pivot table to you, making you a dashboard, making you make a power query or making you make an AI tools and in the middle that video has to be ended there. That’s why we will bring part two of this video where we will cover all the similar topics, be it your pivot table, charts, dashboard, power query, DAX, VBA, macros, AI tools, all of them are going to be covered in part two of this, so you will stay with us, as well as all the content I have used here, you can access it on the app on top of our app. Go above and check the free content there, you will get all the sheets. Apart from this, if you want to do professional training, do live professional training, then you can join us. We deal in accounting software, data analytics and finance, so all the software related to this, you can explore them on our app, on the website or if any query comes, then you will meet directly on call or whatsapp2, till then you will get your Don’t forget to give feedback because from your feedback we get to know how we should bring content to you and how we can deliver the best for you. So let’s meet in the next video till then goodbye.

By Amjad Izhar
Contact: amjad.izhar@gmail.com
https://amjadizhar.blog

Affiliate Disclosure: This blog may contain affiliate links, which means I may earn a small commission if you click on the link and make a purchase. This comes at no additional cost to you. I only recommend products or services that I believe will add value to my readers. Your support helps keep this blog running and allows me to continue providing you with quality content. Thank you for your support!

Comments

2 responses to “Mastering Excel: Data Management, Formulas, and Finance”

March 30, 2025

Anna Waldherr

Thank you for this excellent explanation. I will have to come back and study it in detail.

LikeLiked by 1 person

1. March 30, 2025
  
  Amjad Izhar
  
  Anna Thanks.
  
  LikeLike

Mastering Excel: Data Management, Formulas, and Finance

Excel Fundamentals Study Guide

Quiz

Answer Key for Quiz

Essay Format Questions

Glossary of Key Terms

Briefing Document: Analysis of Provided Sources

Excel Basics & Formulas FAQ

1. What are cells in Excel, and how do they relate to formulas?

2. What are the three basic components of an Excel formula, and how do they behave when dragging the formula to other cells?

3. What is the SUM function in Excel, and what are the different ways to use it to add numbers?

4. How can you fill a series of numbers or dates automatically in Excel using the “Fill Series” option?

5. What is the difference between “Constants” and “Formulas” when using “Go To Special” in Excel?

6. How do relative, absolute, and mixed cell references work in Excel formulas, and when would you use each type?

7. What are some common text functions in Excel, such as LEFT, RIGHT, MID, LEN, TRIM, LOWER, UPPER, and PROPER, and how are they used?

8. Explain the IF, AND, and OR logical functions in Excel, and provide examples of their use.

Excel Navigation Keyboard Shortcuts

Managing Multiple Excel Workbooks

Excel Cell Data Entry Methods and Techniques

Excel Data Entry Shortcuts: Efficiency Tips

Excel Basic Formatting Guide

The Original Text

Discover more from Amjad Izhar Blog

Comments

2 responses to “Mastering Excel: Data Management, Formulas, and Finance”

Leave a reply to Anna Waldherr Cancel reply

More posts

12 Scientifically Proven Signs of You’re in Love with someone Head Over Heels!

Legitimate Transcription Jobs From Home

15 Easy Freelance Jobs That Pay Well

20 Things That Can Destroy a Marriage

Mastering Excel: Data Management, Formulas, and Finance

Excel Fundamentals Study Guide

Quiz

Answer Key for Quiz

Essay Format Questions

Glossary of Key Terms

Briefing Document: Analysis of Provided Sources

Excel Basics & Formulas FAQ

1. What are cells in Excel, and how do they relate to formulas?

2. What are the three basic components of an Excel formula, and how do they behave when dragging the formula to other cells?

3. What is the SUM function in Excel, and what are the different ways to use it to add numbers?

4. How can you fill a series of numbers or dates automatically in Excel using the “Fill Series” option?

5. What is the difference between “Constants” and “Formulas” when using “Go To Special” in Excel?

6. How do relative, absolute, and mixed cell references work in Excel formulas, and when would you use each type?

7. What are some common text functions in Excel, such as LEFT, RIGHT, MID, LEN, TRIM, LOWER, UPPER, and PROPER, and how are they used?

8. Explain the IF, AND, and OR logical functions in Excel, and provide examples of their use.

Excel Navigation Keyboard Shortcuts

Managing Multiple Excel Workbooks

Excel Cell Data Entry Methods and Techniques

Excel Data Entry Shortcuts: Efficiency Tips

Excel Basic Formatting Guide

The Original Text

Share this:

Discover more from Amjad Izhar Blog

Comments

2 responses to “Mastering Excel: Data Management, Formulas, and Finance”

Leave a reply to Anna Waldherr Cancel reply

More posts

12 Scientifically Proven Signs of You’re in Love with someone Head Over Heels!

Legitimate Transcription Jobs From Home

15 Easy Freelance Jobs That Pay Well

20 Things That Can Destroy a Marriage